Home

1 - GRS Systems

1. Items Adjustable ltems Adjustable Data Saved Range Remarks Data Saved Range Remarks BRIGHTNESS 7 Adjust the LCD monitor brightness H PHASE 100 Perform fine phase adjustment for 40 FINE horizontal hold when configuring a mr 000 system C U F 7 J 100 COLOR 7 Adjust the LCD monitor chroma level LEVEL 0 Sails 1394 SETTING CONTRAST 7 Adjust the LCD monitor contrast Items Adjustable Remarks 0 Data Saved Range c U F 7 1394 SPEED S100 For setting the transfer rate of signals BACKLIGHT NORMAL Adjust the backlight 200 output from the DVCPRO connector HIGH NORMAL Mode normally used 400 100 100Mbps _Iclulel HIGH This is brighter than NORMAL 200 200Mbps Ic u E 400 400Mbps SELF SHOOT NORMAL Select whether or not to change the MIRROR LCD monitor to mirror image 1394INCH J0 For setting the input channel of signals NORMAL Do not change to mirror input to the DVCPRO connector image 63 0 63 To fix to the designated value 5 IclulF MIRROR Change to mirror image AUTO AUTO To follow the settings of the IC U E externally connected devices ASPECT SQUEEZE Select a screen ratio for images CONV LT BOX displayed on
2. Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range TABLE A Select the VF MARKER setting table USER BOX JON For setting whether the user box is B First select table A or B then set the OFF displayed in the viewfinder or not IC U FIR items below for each table lclule R CENTER OFF Switch the center mark USER BOX 1 For setting the horizontal width of the MARK 1 OFF Do not display center mark WIDTH user box 2 1 large 13 3 2 Hollow large T f i 3 small lhe al ba 4 Hollow small USER BOX 1 For setting the horizontal position of the C U FIR HEIGHT i user box center SAFETY OFF Select the frame type for the safety E MARK 1 zone clulFIRli00 z aie ae display frame USER BOX H 50 For setting the horizontal position of the POS user box center 00 clu F R 50 2 Corner frame USER BOX V 50 For setting the vertical position of the POS user box center 00 C U F R S SAFETY 80 For setting the size of the safety marker C U F R 50 c AREA Pa It is possible to set the size by units of 20 1 with a fixed ratio between of width The user box can be displayed in any position as a C U F R 100 and height boxtype cursor FRAME MARK ON Set the frame marker
3. CAC ADJ DIAGNOSTIC2 Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range CAC ON ON The color astigmatism correction is SYSCON Display the software version for the CONTROL OFF performed SOFT system control microprocessor OFF The color astigmatism correction is _ lulFIR not performed TTL o CAC FILE The color astigmatism correction file that LCD SOFT Display the software version for the LCD DELETE is recorded in built in memory of the unit microprocessor ST ee and selected in the CAC FILE No item is al ae deleted CAC FILE NO 1 To delete the color astigmatism pope OS BAE OSWersion for the streaming correction file from the CAC FILE F T La 32 DELETE item select the color HRT astigmatism correction file to be deleted P2CS AP Display the application version for the TITLE 1 The color astigmatism correction files streaming controller SCROLL 55 are scrolled Select this item by using es ta Fa Pe fs the cursor and press the JOG dial SH4CTRL Display the program version for the button and then turn the JOG dial button EPGA streaming control FPGA to scroll the CAC files EE PRCCTRL Displays the version of the program for 01 32 The first 27 characters of the names of FPGA the prerecording control FPGA the color astigmatism correction files 01 aa aE to 32 are displayed SEEE SYSIF FPGA Display the program ver
4. CONTRAST control Used to adjust the contrast of the video image in the viewfinder This does not affect the signal output from the camera BRIGHT control Used to adjust the brightness of the video image in the viewfinder This does not affect the signal output from a ee the camera O Q 15 Viewfinder left right position anchoring ring Used to adjust the side to side position of the viewfinder Front tally lamp This lamp is activated when the 3 TALLY switch is positioned at HIGH or LOW and stays on during recording It also blinks in synchronisation with the 16 REC lamp in the viewfinder and provides alerts VIBWINder front back positi n anchoring Use the TALLY switch to change the intensity of the lever a lamp to HIGH or LOW Used to adjust the fore and aft position of the viewfinder Back tally lamp Note This lamp stays illuminated during shooting It also blinks in synchronisation with the REC lamp in the viewfinder and provides alerts When the lever is positioned at OFF the back tally lamp is hidden For more information see the instruction manual for the viewfinder Parts and their Functions Viewfinder 29 Recording and Playback P2 Cards i Inserting P2 Cards 7 3 Insert a P2 card into the P2 card slot until the EJECT button pops up Note When using the camera recorder for the first time be sure to set the time
5. For setting to correct the time code according to the delay of video signals 0 Do not correct 1 To delay the time code to be input according to the timing of the video images 2 To forward the time code to be output according to the timing of the video images 3 To delay the time code to be input and forward the time code to be output respectively according to the timing of the video images For details refer to Externally Locking the Time Code page 61 186 Menu Menu Description Tables REC REVIEW REGEN ON OFF For selecting whether the time code is regenerated to the value on the P2 card or not when subsequent recording starts after setting the RET SW item on the SW MODE screen to R REVIEW and pressing the RET button on the lens or the USER button on the unit on which the RET SW function is assigned ON The time code is regenerated to the value on the tape OFF The time code is not regenerated UMID SET INFO Items Data Saved Adjustable Range Remarks COUNTRY u F NO INFO Input the user s country NO INFO is displayed until the input completes ORGANIZATION u F NO INFO Input the user s organisation or company name NO INFO is displayed until the input completes NO INFO Input the user name NO INFO is displayed until the input completes Indicate the pr
6. Oo 5 E USER SW GAIN LENS IRIS Items Adjustable R imarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range S GAIN Select whether or not to enable 30dB for A IRIS LEVEL 000 Set the target value for auto iris 30 dB SUPER GAIN x Enable 045 clu F R a Disable C U F R i00 36 dB Select whether or not to enable 36dB for A IRIS PEAK 000 Determine the peak to standard ratio for SUPER GAIN AVE the auto iris Enable 030 A larger value sets the auto iris to Ic ul E R e Disable 100 respond to the peak in the IRIS DS GAIN Select whether or not to enable 6 dB 7 for detection Window while amp smaller value sets it to respond to the average value in 6 dB 1 DS GAIN the wind x Enable C U F R e window IcJul E R e Disable AIRIS NORMI Select the auto iris detection window 10dB7 X Select whether or not to enable 10 dB J WINDOW NORM2 NORM1 The window closer to the center P for DS GAIN CENTR of the screen k Enable NORM2 The window closer to bottom of e Disable the screen C U F R CENTR The spot window in the center of 12 0B 1 Select whether or not to enable 12 dB IclulelR the screen for DS GAIN x Enable S IRIS LEVEL 000 Set
7. C U FIR SHUTTER JON Set the shutter speed indication to ON FILM REC ON For selecting whether to indicate that the OFF or OFF MODE OFF Gamma Select is set to the FILM REC C u F R c u F R mode FILTER ON Set the filter No indication to ON or OFF OFF Bal cd bo a VF INDICATOR3 WHITE ON Set the AWB PRE A B indication to ON OFF or OFF ZENER Miette E Randa Hearne GAIN ON For selecting ON OFF of the gain g T OFF currently selected S GAIN and DS P2CARD OFF Select the indication mode for the P2 ZTclulFIR GAIN displays REMAIN ONE CARD card s remaining capacity TOTAL OFF Disable the remaining capacity IRIS OFF OFF Disable indications of both the indication IRIS super iris ON status and the iris ONE CARD S IRIS value Display the remaining capacity of the S IRIS Enable only the iris value P2 card currently used for recording indication TOTAL Display the total remaining S IRIS Enables indications of the super ZIclUlF IR capacity of all P2 cards in slots iris ON status and the iris value S Enable indication of the super BATTERY ON Set the battery voltage indication to ON iris ON status OFF or OFF The display of the aperture value and C U F R the display of the iris override are AUDIOLVL JON Set the audio lever meter indication to interlinked When the iris override is OFF ON or OFF changed it is forcibly displayed for 3 _IclulFIR C U F R mee TC ON ON Select whether the time code is to be CAMERAID BAR For setting to
8. C U F R displayed MODE CHECK IND Items Data ae Remarks Saved STATUS ON For the setting to display the status OFF screen when the MODE CHECK button ICIU FIR is pressed ILED ON For the setting to indicate causes for OFF turning on the lamp on the viewfinder is displayed when the MODE CHECK button is pressed The causes for turning on the lamp lclu FIR are displayed with FUNCTION JON For the setting to display the FUNCTION OFF screen when the MODE CHECK button IC U FIR is pressed AUDIO ON For the setting to display the AUDIO OFF screen when the MODE CHECK button Ic U FIR is pressed CAC ON The setting to display the CAC screen OFF when the MODE CHECK button is ICIU FIR pressed PON IND ON For the setting to display the status OFF screen immediately after turning on the power of the unit Note Even if it is set to ON in this item the status screen is not displayed immediately after turning on the power of the unit when the STATUS item is set to Ic U FIR OFF ILED Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range GAIN 0dB JON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the GAIN is set to a iIc ulFE R value other than 0 dB GAIN 3dB JON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the GAIN is set to a ICIUIFIR value o
9. D emmm NO MODEL DATE TIME HDD EXPLORE HDD PARTITION TYPE S 1 AJ P2CO16RG 2007 MAY 07 14 29 2 AJ P2C016RG 2007 MAY 08 15 41 3 AJ P2C002SG 2007 MAY 15 15 24 4 AJ P2C002SG 2007 MAY 15 15 32 5 AJ P2CO04HG 2006 MAR 21 02 26 VENDOR Panasonic MODEL xx012345 USED 37 4 GB 5 CARDS MENU MENU SET THUMBNAIL REMAIN 18 5 GB 1 1 gt PARTITION NAME 00 00 00 12 00 00 16 26 00 00 20 11 00 00 24 06 05 06 creg E a x a i 00 00 29 24 00 00 40 06 00 00 48 09 00 00 56 29 NUMBER 5 PARTITION TYPE S AZB04D0059 DATE 2006 MAR 21 TIME 02 26 24 VERIFY ON FINISHED NAME PART 1 HDD EXPLORE HDD PARTITION FAT VENDOR Panasonic MODEL xx012345 SIZE 233 7 GB USED GB CARDS REMAIN GB MENU MENU SET THUMBNAIL 1 PARTITION This section indicates the type of the hard disc drive The available functions depend on the type of hard disc drive HDD type Feature Available functions TYPES A special format that Thumbnail viewing allows high speed writ writing and writing back ing and writing back on on a card basis writing a card by card basis A back on a clip basis and drive formatted with the formatting camera recorder uses this format P2 STORE P2 STORE AJ Thumbnail viewing PCS060G No writing writing back on a card can be performed basis and writing back on a clip basis F
10. One clip l TOTALRECTIME C Recording time on P2 card P To stop recording Press the STOP button Recording stops Then the camera accesses the P2 card to record the video stored in memory before recording stops The record from the beginning of the interval recording to the moment of pressing the STOP button is generated as one clip For continuous recording Press either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens again Interval recording resumes To stop the Interval recording mode Setting the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE to OFP When INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to OFF the mode returns to ordinary recording mode if the POWER switch of the unit is turned OFF lf INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to ON the interval recording mode will not change even if the POWER switch is turned OFF 38 Recording and Playback Interval Recording Shooting procedures for the ONE SHOT mode of INTERVAL REC After setting the ONE SHOT mode of INTERVAL REC follow these steps 1 Following basic operations of shooting and recording according to Basic Procedures lock the camera securely 2 Press either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens The AJ HPX3000 automatically goes into ONE SHOT pause mode after the specified REC TIME 3 Performs recording for the duration specified under the REC TIME option by pressing either the
11. Only for 1080 59 94i 1080 50i HD SDI For locking the HD SDI signals to the GENLOCK input For the down converter output signals the start position of the video delays by about 90 lines COMPOSIT For locking the down converter output signals to the GENLOCK input For the HD SDI output signals the start position of the video gains by C U F R about 90 lines H PHASE 100 Perform coarse phase adjustment for COARSE horizontal hold when configuring a 000 system 100 Menu Menu Description Tables 163 PAINT RB GAIN CONTROL RGB BLACK CONTROL 164 Menu Menu Description Tables preset mode Items Adjustable Items Adjustable Data Saved Range nomen Data Saved Range naman R GAIN AWB 200 For setting the Rch gain when the MASTER PED 200 For setting the level of the master PRE WHITE BAL switch is in the PRST l pedestal 000 position uia lf the remote control unit is 4200 lf the remote control unit is 200 connected settings made from the connected settings made from the menu are disabled The set value is menu are disabled The set
12. THROUGH Output audio input without delay This setting prevents echo effect between the sound source and audio output when the sound source is near the C camera recorder FAN MODE OFF For setting the operation mode of the fan AUTO OFF The fan always stops AUTO The fan will run automatically when the temperature in the unit increases Note Once the power is turned off this will always be set to AUTO whenever the power is turned on If the unit is operated as the fan stops the temperature in the unit will increase and data may not record or play back properly Use the unit after setting this as item to AUTO for normal operation 192 Menu Menu Description Tables Updating the firmware incorporated into the camera recorder For the most up to date information on firmware see the support page for P2 at the following Web site https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av To update the firmware confirm the version on AJ HPX3000 by selecting MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTIC 1 and DIAGNOSTIC 2 screens from the menu and then access the above Web site to download the firmware if necessary Then load the downloaded file on AJ HPX3000 through an SD memory card to complete the update For more information on how to update the firmware see the above site Note SD cards used on AJ HPX3000 must be compliant with the SD standards In addition they must be formatted with the camera recorder
13. The adjustment values are now stored in the non volatile memory so that even when the unit s power is turned off there will be no further need to perform the white shading adjustment uolesedaid Preparation Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments 107 Preparing for Audio Input Take the following steps to prepare the camera for connecting audio input devices E When Using the Front Microphone AJ HPX3000 can be equipped with the AJ MC900G stereo microphone kit an extra cost option 3 Connect the microphone cable to the MIC IN jack on the camera 1 Open the microphone holder v gt ieee 7 es Uk 4 Set the AUDIO IN switch to FRONT depending on the audio channel to be recorded 2 Mount the microphone and tighten the clamping screw The microphone must be attached with the UP mark on the microphone facing up AUDIO IN Switch Clamping Screw I wren Using a Wireless Receiver When Using the Unislot Wireless Receiver 1 Remove the cover to insert the wireless receiver and secure it with the screws 2 Set the AUDIO IN switch to W L depending on the audio channel to be recorded 108 Preparation Preparing for Audio Input when Using Audio Devices 1 Connect the audio device to the AUDIO IN jack with the XLR cable 2 Set the AUDIO IN switch to REAR for the channel to which the XLR cable is connected 3 Set the LINE MIC 48V sel
14. i aes REMAIN Show remaining free space on the P2 card as the P2 card status display Factory setting USED Show used memory capacity on the P2 card as the P2 card status display 130 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Properties Contents of P2 Card Status Display Settings 1 2 P2 REMININ 0 3 58 NO CARD NO CARD NO CARD 10 Write protect Mark The A mark appears if the P2 card is write protected P2 Card Status remaining free space The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated by a bar graph and percentage The bar graph indicator moves to the left as the remaining free space decreases The following indications may appear depending on the card status FORMAT ERROR An unformatted P2 card is inserted NOT SUPPORTED An unsupported card is inserted in the camera NO CARD P2 cards are not inserted Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2 card for data you want to access and press the SET button to display detailed information about the P2 card to check individual information such as the serial number and the user ID P2 Card Remaining Capacity Total Capacity Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total capacity in minutes The total of the remaining memory capacity for each P2 card that is displayed may not match the actual total remaining memory capacity for the P2 cards because only the figure in minute is displayed Total remaining free space for the sl
15. internal memory 12 To exit the menu press the MENU button Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy 91 E Resetting Menu Option Settings to Defaults The menu settings can be reset to their defaults To reset the settings to their defaults select the menu option READ FACTORY DATA in the lt INITIALIZE gt screen which is accessible from the FILE page All settings will be reset to their defaults Note This operation does not delete the scene file lens file and the information stored as the user data E Lens file lt INITIALIZE gt READ FACTORY DATA WRITE USER DATA The built in memory of the unit stores eight sets of lens files On the SD memory card eight titles for eight sets of lens files in a table total 64 sets can be written E How to provide lens files The following data are recorded on the lens file Title name White shading correction value Flare compensation value RB gain offset correction value Adjustment of white shading For the white shading adjustment refer to Adjusting the Lens White Shading page 106 Adjustment of the flare Using the menu operations open the lt LENS FILE ADJ gt screen from the MAINTENANCE page and adjust the flare in the LENS R FLARE item the LENS G FLARE item and the LENS B FLARE item gt lt LENS FILE ADJ gt RB GAIN CTRL RESET ON LENS R GAIN OFFSET
16. 6 01B 6 01B 41B 41B 2 04B OFF Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels 53 Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewisnipy Adjusting Recording Levels To adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2 follow the steps below Audio level meter on the display window 1 Posi NDF SLAVE HOLDWHD GPSY Position the MONITOR SELECT CH1 2 CH3 4 selector switch at CH1 2 so that the audio level meter pe gee ac on the display window will provide CH1 and CH2 Maw Vast ag Cam Naat Yam ie indications Ensure that the channel indications CICA LIL LIL rie I J 2 m Dd h Y minM s D frm displayed in the window are 1 and 2 SHNI Whether to enable or disable the FRONT AUDIO MEDIA Emm m mE mHE EEEF o LEVEL control must be preset through menu options BA I Em m m SS w 40 FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2 Note that this _ LOOP OP SLOT 1 aB control is factory disabled The menu options are found in the MIC AUDIO1 Audio level meter in the viewfinder screen which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page 2 Position the AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switch at MAN When operating the unit without a sound recordist it is recommended that the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control should be used to adjust the audio level In advance check the level meter in the viewfinder screen and use the FRONT AUDIO
17. Dimensions W x H x D 137 mm x 209 mm x 318 mm 5 3 8 inches x 8 1 4 inches x 12 1 2 inches excluding handle and wireless option cover Approx 4 8 kg 10 6 Ib main unit only Weight Shutter speeds 1 60 50 Hz 1 100 59 94 Hz 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 deg 172 8 deg 144 0 deg 120 0 deg 90 0 deg 45 0 deg Synchro scan shutter 1 61 7 to 1 7200 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 1 30 9 to 1 3600 1080 29 97P 480 29 97P 1 24 7 to 1 2880 1080 23 98P A 480 23 98P A 1 51 4 to 1 6000 1080 50i 576 50i 1 25 7 to 1 3000 1080 25P 576 25P Lens mount 2 3 inch bayonet type Color separation optical system Optical prism F1 4 Sensitivity F10 2000 Ix 89 9 reflection 1080 59 94i Minimum object illuminance 0 064 Ix For F1 4 36 dB S GAIN 20 dB DS GAIN Video S N 54 dB standard Registration error 0 03 or less all areas excluding lens distortion Horizontal resolution 1000 TV lines or more Memory Card Unit Record media P2 card Video recording formats Selectable from AVC Intra100 AVC Intra50 DVCPRO HD DVCPRO50 Audio recording formats 48 kHz 16 bit 4ch Recording playback time Approximately 16 minutes For recording in AVC Intra100 1080 59 94i 1080 50i mode using one AJ P2C016RG Approximately 32 minutes For recording in DVCPRO 480 59 94i 576 50i mode using one AJ P2CO08HG Note This recording time represents one shot continuously recorded on a P2 card
18. If they must be formatted with a PC then download special software from the above Web site and use it to format the SD cards Updating the firmware incorporated into the camera recorder 193 1 p10991 e1 WLI BU OJU peyesodoou asemu By BuepdA Specifications General Power supply DC 12 V 11 0 V 17 0 V Power consumption 44 W indicates safety information Operating temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Camera Unit Pickup devices 2 3 inch 2 2 million pixels IT type CCD x 3 Image pickup scheme RGB 3CCD 2010 H x 1120 V A 3200K B 4300K C 5600K D 6300K 1 CLEAR 2 1 4ND 3 1 16ND 4 1 64ND Quantizing 14 bit Horizontal drive frequency 74 1758 MHz 59 94 Hz 74 25 MHz 50 Hz Sampling frequencies 74 1758 MHz 59 94 Hz 74 25 MHz 50 Hz Digital signal processing 74 1758 MHz 59 94 Hz 74 25 MHz 50 Hz Programmable gain 3 dB 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 15 dB 18 dB 21 dB 24 dB 27 dB or 30 dB Digital Super Gain DS GAIN Selectable from 6 dB 10 dB 12 dB 15 dB or 20 dB Super Gain S GAIN Selectable from 30 dB or 36 dB Total pixels CC Filter ND Filter 194 Specifications Operating humidity 10 to maximum 85 relative humidity Maximum continuous operation Approximately 120 minutes using an Anton Bauer DIONIC90 battery
19. LOW LIGHT LVL 35 RC MENU DISP OFF 50M INDICATOR OFF MARKER CHAR LVL 150 SYNCHRO SCAN DISP sec DISP MODE Message appears when Message settings 1 2 3 CC ND filter changed FILTER n n 1 2 3 4 O O e Gainohanged pai oe 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 Spens WHITE BAL switch re positioned WHITE n n A B PRE O O o a IOER posinoned at AUTO KNEE ON or OFF Ole o Shutter speed mode changed oF Maen ei acini T 1 1000 1 2000 Oje o White balance adjusted AWB performed Example AWB A OK 3 2 K O e e Black balance adjusted ABB performed Example ABB OK Oo e J Extender selected Example EXTENDER ON OJOJ USER button selected Example UM S GAIN 30 dB O o o MARKER SELECT button selected Example MKR A OJOJ Iris being overridden Example F 5 6 O The CAC lens is connected or removed Example CAC LENS DATA INVALID Ojo o Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Message appears O Message does not appear Bulpiooey 104 sues pue sjuswysni py T1 E Setting the Marker Displays The center safety zone safety zone area and frame markers may be set to ON or OFF along with specifications of the marker types To set and select markers go to the VF MARKER screen from the VF page and select the appropriate options For directions on navigating the menu see Setting Menu Options pag
20. Set 30 the d i Note SIC U FIR e aynamic range f All items in CAMERA SETTING are setting targets of the item PAINT MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W imuke SELECT gt screen The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode FILMLIKE3 7 FILMLIKE2 Video level Luminance When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is used for FILM LIKES the following settings are recommended MANUAL KNEE ON KNEE POINT gt 85 0 KNEE SLOPE 50 Menu Menu Description Tables 171 I vF VF DISPLAY Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range DISP NORMAL NORMAL Display status constantly CONDITION HOLD HOLD Display status only when the MODE CHECK switch is C U F R pressed DISP MODE 1 Set the DISP MODE 2 Switch the camera s Warning Message 3 indication Please refer to Display Modes and Setting Changes adjustment Result Messages page 77 for more lclu FJR information VF OUT Y For selecting the video signals to display NAM in the viewfinder screen R Y Brightness signal G NAM Output signal with the highest B level among R G and B signals R Rch signal G Gch signal C U F R B Bch signal VF DTL 0 For setting the detail level of the f viewfinder screen R The details of the signals fo
21. The recording time may be shorter depending on the number of shots recorded For the latest information on P2 cards not available in the operating Instructions visit the P2 Support Desk at the following Web sites https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av Digital Video System Frequency range Y 74 1758 MHz 59 94 Hz Quantization 74 25 MHz 50 Hz AVC Intra100 AVC Intra50 DVCPRO HD PB PR 37 0879 MHz 59 94 Hz 37 125 MHz 50 Hz AVC Intra100 AVC Intra50 DVCPRO HD Y 13 5 MHz DVCPROS50 Ps PR 6 75 MHz DVCPRO50 10 bits AVC Intra100 AVC Intra50 8 bits DVCPRO HD DVCPRO50 Compression method Digital Audio System Sampling frequency Quantizing Frequency response Dynamic range Distortion factor Headroom H 264 AVC Intra Profile AVC Intra100 AVC Intra50 DV base SMPTE370M DVCPRO HD SMPTE314M DVCPROS50 op 48 kHz synchronised with video 9 16 bits S pe 20 Hz 20 kHz 1 0 dB at standard level 2 Minimum 85 dB 1 kHz AWTD 0 1 or less 1 kHz standard level 18 20 dB selectable with menu Specifications 195 Input output Unit GEN LOCK IN BNC x1 1 0 VP P 75 Q This is available as VIDEO IN or the return video input connector which can be switched in the menu MON OUT BNC x1 1 0 VP P 75 Q VIDEO OUT BNCx1 It can be switched among HD SDI SD SDI Composite HD SDI 0 8 VP P 75 Q Compliant with the SMPTE292M 299M standards S
22. USER1 SW or USER2 SW These options can be found in the lt USER SW gt screen on the CAM OPERATION page When recording is paused pressing the PLAY PAUSE button plays back the last recorded clip from the beginning After completion of playback the camera recorder enters the stopped state a Recording starts Recording pauses The PLAY button plays back The RET button the clip from the beginning puts the camera recorder into REC REVIEW mode O A Notes Set the menu option RET SW found on the SW MODE for CAM OPERATION to R REVIEW When the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side panel is positioned at MEM the video for REC REVIEW is output from the video output connectors VIDEO OUT and MON OUT connectors and also to the viewfinder Note that when a backup device is connected to back up the video the pictures for REC REVIEW are backed up 40 Recording and Playback Recording Review Function Normal and Variable Speed Playback The PLAY PAUSE button provides monochrome playback through the viewfinder and color playback on the LCD monitor A color video monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT or MON OUT connector of camera recorder also provides color playback The VIDEO OUT connector outputs an SDI playback to view the playback the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side panel must be positioned to MEM F Variable speed playback The FF and REW buttons provide 32x and 4x fast playbacks and fast reverse pl
23. Used to control the volume of sound output from the monitor speakers and earphones 13 ALARM warning alarm volume adjustment Used to control the volume of the warning sound emitted from 14 speakers or earphones connected to the 15 PHONES jack If the control is minimised no alarm is audible 17 Parts and their Functions Audio output Function Section Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section G7REW STOP FF PLAY PAUSE l 20 21 22 23 1 CC FILTER ND FILTER filter switching controls These are used to select the filter in accordance with the subject s brightness and color temperature CC FILTER knob outside large diameter A 3200K B 4300K C 5600K D 6300K ND FILTER knob inside small diameter 1 CLEAR transparent 2 1 4 ND 3 1 16 ND 4 1 64 ND Shooting CC FILTER ND FILTER conditions Sunrise sunset A 3200 K 1 CLEAR inside a studio B 4300 K or C 5600 K or 2 1 4 ND or Outdoors under a clear sky D 6300 K 3 1 16 ND Outdoors under z 1 CLEAR or cloudy or rainy D 6300 K 2 1 4 ND skies Snowscapes high mountains B 4300 K or seashores or C 5600 K or j e ae 2i other perfectly D 6300 K clear scenery 2 USER MAIN USER 1 and USER 2 buttons These buttons can be assigned user selected functions using a menu option Each button when pressed performs the assigned function For more inform
24. dsu pue soueusjuley Maintenance and Inspections Inspections Before Shooting 143 6 Inspection of the clock time code and user bits 1 Set the user s bit as required Please refer to Setting of the user bits page 57 for the setting procedures 2 Set the time code Please refer to Setting the Time Code page 60 for the setting procedures Go Set the TCG switch to R RUN A Press the REC START STOP button Check that the counter display number changes as recording progresses 5 Press the REC START STOP button again Check that recording stops and the counter display number stops changing 6 Set the TCG switch to F RUN Check that the counter display number changes regardless of recording status 7 Set the DISPLAY switch to UB Each time the HOLD button is pressed make sure that the displayed value changes in the following sequence VTCG DATE TIME No display time zone gt TCG and also verify that the displayed value is correct If DATE TIME or time zone is not correct refer to Setting the Internal Clock s Date and Time page 59 for guidance on setting the correct values Note Note that date and time data set for DATE TIME and time zone is recorded in clips and affects the playback sequence etc at the time of thumbnail manipulations Maintenance E Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder Do not use thinner or other solvents to remove dirt Wipe the l
25. rere 4 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button The data written in the user area of the internal memory of the unit is read to complete the setting 5 To exit the menu press the MENU button The set user data may be also read without navigating the menu 1 Turn off the POWER switch 2 Position the WHITE BAL switch at PRST WHITE BAL Switch 3 With the AUTO W B BAL switch flipped up turn on the POWER switch This resets all settings for USER menu options to their defaults E How to Use Scene File Data It is possible to write the settings data into the scene file area of the internal memory of the unit or to read data written in this area Four types of scene files are available This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup state To change the settings go to the lt SCENE gt screen from the FILE page To write settings data for scene files 1 Navigate the menu to the SCENE screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the SCENE SEL option 3 Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers Then turn the dial button to select a desired scene file number lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL 1 READ WRITE RESET eRe TITLE1 eRe TITLE2 RRR TITLES tee TITLE4 4 Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file 5 Turn the JOG dial button to return the cursor to th
26. s internal time code REGEN For clips recorded on the recording target P2 card regenerate the time code as the time code of the clip that has the most recent date and time Notes Set the date and time accurately For guidance on setting see Setting the Internal Clock s Date and Time page 59 During operation in either 24P or 24PA mode regeneration of the value of the card recorded in drop frame is not permitted P OFF LCD DISPLAY ON OFF Select whether or not to display the time code setting and counter indication on the LCD monitor when the power is turned OFF ON Display setting and indication while the power is turned OFF OFF Power down LCD monitor while camera power is turned OFF Setting and indication disabled TC OUT U F ICG TCG TCR Select the time code to be output to the time code output connector TCG Always output time code generator value TCG TCR Display time code generator value in recording mode and time code reader value in playback mode TC DISP SEL SOF 24F U F Select the display format for the time code frame digits For 1080 59 94i or 480 59 94i only For details refer to Recording time code and user bits page 56 30F Display time code frame digits in 30 frames 24F Convert time code frame digits into 24 frames for display TC VIDEO SYNCRO U F
27. the rate for outputting camera images and playback images is 59 94i or 50i that are pulled down Example of 1080 24PN Native Camera recording LA Le T 9 A z D7 Ao JAS 80 Be 80 Se Co Be Oo bg Recording 2 3 pull down Ne Notes The recording will start from the top frame of a five frame cycle for 24P 24PA recording or a four frame cycle for 24P native recording respectively Therefore the time code may be discontinued when recording clips continuously in different modes during the recording cycle Even if a P2 card has just been inserted or the power has been just turned on you can start recording using the internal memory of camera recorder In this case recording cannot be stopped until the P2 card is recognised If the inserted card is not recognized as a recordable P2 card the record in internal memory is instantly discarded and the message CANNOT REC message is displayed on the viewfinder Press the MODE CHECK button to check P2 card status displayed in viewfinder Mode check button REC START STOP button yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Recording and Playback Normal Recording 35 PRE RECORDING function The internal memory of your unit is capable of storing several seconds of video and sound data coming from the camera This capability can be used to record video and sound several seconds before either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle
28. 00 09 44 03 00 00 00 00 I THUMBNAIL OPERATION PROPERTY THUMBNAIL OPERATION 7 PROPERTY gt META DATA DELETE OPERATION CARD STATUS DEVICES PROPERTY SETUP SAME FORMAT CLIPS BETYS SELECTED CLIPS J MARKED CLIPS i RE CONNECTION TEXT MEMO CLIPS SLOT CLIPS sreuquiny ym sdo Bulyejndiueyy iT TS 00 04 48 26 00 06 47 11 on i Jan iT 00 00 00 0 00 01 10 08 ieee ALL CLIP DELETE SAME FORMAT CLIPS FORMAT PROPERTY SELECTED CLIPS REPAIR CLIP 0001 MARKED CLIPS RE CONNECTION i Be 6 TEXT MEMO CLIPS COPY TEXTMEMO 1 AUDIO CLIP NAME 00018K ACCESS TEXT MEMO EXCH THUMBNAIL START TC 00 00 00 12 DEVICE STARTUB 940F3082 a op DEVICE SETUP DATE eMAY 2007 sHoor J TIME 15 38 06 GMT 09 00 SCENARIO b lt u EXIT DURATION 00 00 07 10 NEWS a V_FORMAT DV100_1080 59 94i MEMO FRAME RATE 59 941 THUMBNAIL REC RATE aT ie ui 00 00 55 11 00 06 47 11 00 00 00 00 CARD STATUS P2 REMAIN TEXTMEMO WI To2 T03 CUP 07 T01 04 00 04 53 10 _ 00 04 59 03 SLOT CLIPS 0 SETUP ALL HIDE se NO CARD EXIT MARKER IND TEXT MEMO IND WIDE IND PROXY IND DATA DISPLAY DEVICES DATE FORMAT THUMBNAIL SIZE lite SETUP THUMBNAIL INIT EXIT META DATA HDD LOAD EXPORT RECORD EXPLORE USER CLIP NAME FORMAT INITIALIZE SETUP PROPERTY EXIT EXIT Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Thumbnail Manipulations Overview 113 Thumbnail Screen P
29. 120 1 61 7 1 7200 HD 1080 29 97P 30P 00 ae 1 60 1 30 9 1 3600 1 250 1 500 1080 23 98P 24P 4 1000 1 2000 1 48 1 24 7 1 2880 1080 23 98PA 24PA HALF 1 48 1 24 7 1 2880 z z 180deg 172 8deg 480 59 94 60 1 120 1 61 7 1 7200 i i 144 0deg 120 0deg SD 480 29 97P 30P 90 0deg 45 0deg 1 60 1 30 9 1 3600 3 deg 350deg 480 23 98P 24P 1 48 1 24 7 1 2880 1 0deg step Hp 1080 50i 50i 1 60 1 120 1 100 1 51 4 1 6000 1080 25P 25P 1 250 1 500 1 50 1 25 7 1 3000 1 1000 1 2000 576 50i 50i HALF 1 100 1 51 4 1 6000 SD 180deg 172 8deg 576 25P 25P 144 0deg 120 0deg 1 50 1 25 7 1 3000 90 0deg 45 0deg Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the Electronic Shutter 49 E Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed The shutter speed in any shutter mode is set using the SHUTTER switch 1 Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at ON In SYNCHRO SCAN mode shutter speed can be switched towards SEL easily using the synchro scan adjustment switches on the side panel Note that the range of selectable shutter speeds may be pre defined whether or not to use the SYNCHRO SCAN mode may be determined through the lt SHUTTER SPEED gt and lt SHUTTER SELECT gt screens These screens are accessible through the menu on the CAM OPERATION page The selected shutter speed is retained even if the unit is turned off lt SHUTTER SPEED gt SYNCHRO SCAN ON SHUTTE
30. 22 23 24 F 27 20 26 For more information see the following pages Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Bulpsooey 104 sbuljas pue syu wzsnfpy 69 Information Item Indication Status System mode This indicates the mode that the unit operates in 1080 1080 interlace mode 480 480 interlace mode 576 576 interlace mode Camera mode This indicates the video system when signals output from CCD are recorded on a P2 card or output as video signals 60i 1080 59 94i or 480 59 94i 30P 1080 29 97P or 480 29 97P 24P 1080 23 98P or 480 23 98P 2 3 Pull down 24PA 1080 23 98P or 480 23 98P 2 3 3 2 Pull down 50i 1080 50i or 576 50i 25P 1080 25P or 576 25P REC mode This indicates the recording mode DVCPRO HD DVCPRO50 AVC I 100 AVC I 50 Shutter speed mode 1 gt gt gt gt 0d This indicates that the shutter speed is set to SYNCHRO SCAN 1 60 1 100 1 2000 HALF This indicates that a fixed shutter speed has been set P2 card remaining free space KK KMIN END WP LOOP INFO P2 The indication min stays illuminated under normal conditions or blinks when the remaining level is near zero When the card space is used up END blinks The P2 card is write protected The camera recorder is in LOOP REC mode When loop recording cannot be performed for example because the P2 card has no free space the indication blinks P2 card being recognised T
31. 55 11 00 0 m8 26 00 06 47 11 00 00 00 00 TEXT MEMO CLIP 07 T01 04 T01 J T02 P 00 04 50 14_ 00 04 53 10___00 04 59 03 The pointer moves down 4 With the pointer located in the lower part move the pointer to the desired text memo number using the cursor right and left buttons lt Then press the PLAY button 5 Playback will start from the time code position of the text memo where the pointer is located If the STOP button is pressed during playback or the playback has finished at the end of the clip then the thumbnail screen appears again with the pointer replaced with the text memo where the playback started 6 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select EXIT or press the EXIT button to return the pointer to the upper part of the thumbnail screen 1 Select the desired text memo by carrying out steps 1 3 for Playing back a clip at the position where a text memo is recorded page 120 2 Move the pointer to the desired text memo and then press the SET button 3 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select OPERATION DELETE from the thumbnail menu YES and NO appear to confirm deletion Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES The text memo is deleted 120 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Text Memo E Using a text memo to break a clip and copy the necessary portion 1 Select a desired text memo in a clip by carrying out steps 1 3 for Playing back a clip at the
32. ATW is being operated AWB cannot be performed because the AWB switch is position at PRE or the super gain is enabled Make sure the FILTER control is positioned correctly ABB being performed ABB action successful ABB action aborted by user ABB action failed Black shading accepted by holding down the ABB switch during ABB adjustment Black shading being adjusted Black shading adjustment successful Black shading adjustment aborted by user Black shading adjustment failed Switch changeover indication WHITE K AUTO KNEE ON OFF DRS ON OFF GAIN dB SS 1 6 KK or KKK Kdeg SS gt 1 6 KK or BK Od CC KK KKK The WHITE BAL switch has been switched is replaced with A B or PRST When A and B are set to VAR then it is indicated as VAR K When B is assigned ATW then it is indicated as ATW MODE Displayed when the AUTO KNEE switch is assigned to ON or OFF and the AUTO KNEE switch is turned ON OFF Displayed when the AUTO KNEE switch is assigned to DRS and the AUTO KNEE switch is turned ON OFF Gain has been switched with the GAIN selector switch or a user button When the shutter speed has been switched the shutter speed is indicated Shutter speed is in SYNCRO SCAN mode This appears when the CC filter setting has been selected functions UM USER MAIN button USER1 button USER2 button U1 U2 S GAIN gt gt dB OFF DS GAIN gt gt OFF S IRIS ON O
33. BOX SHUTTER SPEED VF INDICATOR1 SHUTTER SELECT VF INDICATOR2 USER SW VF INDICATORS SW MODE I MODE CHECK IND WHITE BALANCE MODE LED m USER SW GAIN Opening the Menus LENS IRIS USER MENU MAIN OPERATION BATTERY EZCARD BATTERY SETTING1 Displayed when the MENU FILE SD CARD READWRITE BATTERY SETTING2 button is pressed SDCARDRWSELECT MIC AUDIO 1 CAC FILE CARD READ ME RODI 2 LENS FILE L TC UB MAIN MENU LENS FILE CARD R W UMID SET INFO Displayed when the MENU L SCENE button is pressed for at least INITIALIZE 3 seconds MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK LENS ADJ OPTION MENU L USER MENU SELECT __ SYSTEMSETTING USER BLACK SHADING Displayed when the MENU t PAINT USER WHITE SHADING pray i VF USER LENS FILE ADJ button is pressed while CAM OPE USER __ CAC ADJ pressing the LIGHT button m MAIN OPE USER DIAGNOSTIC1 FILE USER DIAGNOSTIC2 MAINTENANCE USER HOURS METER Notes The items highlighted in grey cannot be selected by lt USER MENU SELECT gt The underlined items can only be selected as one whole page with all sub items Individual sub items cannot be selected separately About Menu Description Tables The following letters indicate whether the modified menu Items Adjustable Remarks data is saved to or read out from th
34. Battery Pack Battery packs from the following manufacturers can be used e Anton Bauer e IDX e PACO e Sony The type of the battery can be checked or changed through the viewfinder or menu screen on the monitor Pressing the MODE CHECK button on the side of the camera recorder displays the current type of the battery in the upper right corner of the viewfinder display Navigate the menu to open the BATTERY P2CARD screen from the MAIN OPERATION page Then through the BATTERY SELECT menu option you can check and change the battery type lt BATTERY P2CARD gt BATTERY SELECT DIONIC90 EXT DC IN SELECT AC ADPT BATT NEAR END ALARM OFF BATT NEAR END CANCEL ON BATT END ALARM ON BATT REMAIN FULL 70 CARD NEAR END ALARM ON CARD NEAR END TIME 2min CARD END ALARM ON CARD REMAIN 3min Notes Other batteries may be used by changing the menu setting but system compatibility is not guaranteed Charge the battery pack with the battery charger before using it Please refer to the battery charger s instruction manual for information about charging Preparation Power Supply 101 uolesedaid E Mounting the Battery and Setting the Battery Type Using an Anton Bauer Battery Pack 1 Mount the Anton Bauer battery pack Power supply output connector for lighting Anton Bauer Battery Pack Lighting control switch lt For your information gt The Ant
35. C U F TYPE B BATT NEAR JON Select whether or not to set the alarm to END ALARM OFF beep for BATT NEAR END ALARM CIU F BATT NEAR JON If set to ON the warning tone and END CANCEL OFF indication can be canceled by pressing the MODE CHECK button when BATT IC U FI NEAR END ALARM is triggered BATT END ON Select whether or not to set the alarm to ALARM OFF beep for BATT END ALARM C U F BATT REMAIN 70 Set the display of the remaining battery FULL 100 level indicator bar in the display window when a battery with this function is used 70 Indicate FULL at 70 capacity IclJulFl 100 Indicate FULL at 100 capacity Menu Menu Description Tables 181 BATTERY SETTING1 182 Menu Menu Description Tables preset mode Items Adjustable R marks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range PROPAC14 x Enable selection under BATTERY DIONIC160 x Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT Enable selection gt Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR MANUAL END voltage MANUAL END voltage AUTO Set voltage automatic
36. CTL count is being displayed only the playback CTL count is reset For playback in 24PN Native mode 30 frames are counted in accordance with the pull down images Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Bulpsooey 104 sbuljeas pue sjuewjsnipy 67 Viewfinder Screen Status Displays In addition to video images the viewfinder displays lamps and text that indicate the settings and operating status of the unit together with messages a center marker a safety zone marker and the camera ID E Lamps in the Viewfinder Screen 1 5 TALLY REC Bar O SAVE 2 3 4 The above viewfinder is the AJ VF20WBP for further information on your optional viewfinder model see the relevant instruction manual 1 TALLY REC recording Lamp This lamp stays illuminated during recording and starts blinking if any abnormal action occurs For more information see Warning System page 149 2 Abnormal Operating Status Warning Lamp This lamp comes on when the unit is in any of the abnormal operating statuses specified through the menu sub option LED For statuses that activate the lamp see the options in the lt LED gt screen in LED page 175 BATT battery Lamp This lamp starts blinking a few minutes before the battery charge starts to run out and stays illuminated after the battery is completely flat The battery should be replaced before it is nearly flat so that operatio
37. For the method of installation and the settings of the video NE oT encoder card refer to the operation manual of the video encoder card Note To use the proxy function in 24PN Native mode the FPGA version of the video encoder card firmware must be updated to B102 or higher For the method to confirm the FPGA ver sion of the video encoder card firmware refer to Video Encoder Card Status Display optional page 132 For instructions on updating refer to the P2 support page on the following website https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button 3 The following screen appears Use the cursor buttons The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor and the SET button to select YES 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION gt FORMAT from thethumbnail menu ay a The following screen appears Select the slot number for the P2 card you want to format BREE Select EXIT if formatting is not required EATA aa 2 03 te OPERATION SLOT1 FORMAT PROPERTY REPAIR META DATA RE CONNI copy a 4 a SLOTS The selected P2 card is formatted DEVICE S EXIT 126 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Setting of Proxy optional Formatting SD memory cards SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail screen With an SD memory card inserted into the camera recorder perform the following operation 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbna
38. Format the card with the AJ HPX3000 For more on formatting SD memory cards see Formatting SD memory cards page 127 menu select PROPERTY Note The indicated remaining memory capacity on the SD memory card PROXY REM can be an index of remaining memory capacity for the Proxy but may differ from the actual remaining capacity For SD or SDHC cards with Class indications the recording time may be reduced significantly compared with the actual capacity when images of short recording time are recorded repeatedly If the remaining memory capacity exceeds 999 min 999 min is displayed The remaining capacity is displayed only when set to record the Proxy record on the SD memory card For the setting method refer to the operation manual of the video encoder card the optional AJ YAX800G THUMBNAIL OPERATION HB Video Encoder Card Status Display optional Attaching the video encoder card AJ YAX800G optional select PROPERTY DEVICES PROXY from the thumbnail menu The slot in which the video encoder card is inserted and version information is displayed 132 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Properties Connection with external device Connection through the DVCPRO connector E Records of signals input to the DVCPRO connector 1 Refer to 32 DVCPRO connector page 22 to connect the 1394 cable DV cable Ensure that the signal format of the target device agrees with that of the camera reco
39. G B 2 signal components that provide the 2G R B 4 detail 3G R 4 R S C U F R G MASTER DTL 31 For revising the master detail level 00 C U F Rj 31 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode 168 Menu Menu Description Tables SKIN TONE DTL Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range MSKIN TONE OFF For selecting the skin color table for DTL A enabling the skin tone detail B The skin color table is provided in the AB SKIN TONE TABLE item By enabling the skin tone detail it is possible to shoot human skin more SIC UIFIR accurately MSKIN TONE ON For the setting to display the zebra ZEBRAVF OFF pattern in the skin tone area displayed in the viewfinder screen The zebra pattern is displayed when this item is turned ON and the lt SKIN TONE DTL gt screen is opened The zebra pattern is displayed on area A or B which is selected in the SKIN TONE TABLE item It is impossible to display both area A siclulFlir and B at the same time SKINTONE JA For selecting the skin color table for TABLE B subjects to which the skin tone table SIcC U FIR applies SKIN TONE For fetching the color information of A or GET B which is selected in the SKIN TONE TABLE item near the center marker When this function is executed data from CENTER to Q
40. LEVEL control to adjust the appropriate audio channel so that no excessive audio signals will be admitted 3 While checking the audio channel level meter in the display window or the audio level meter in the viewfinder adjust the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 CH2 control Note that if the level exceeds the top bar 0 dB the word OVER illuminates to show that the input level is excessive The adjustment made in such a way that the maximum level will not reach the O dB bar E Selecting Function for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control This function enables the recording level to be adjusted using the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control ass idea To select this function perform menu operations to open PRONT WVaTCAT ee the lt MIC AUDIO gt screen from the MAIN OPERATION ie ee an one page and set whether to enable or disable the FRONT ate coen em gt AUDIO LEVEL controls for the system selected as the LIMITER CH1 OFF input signals using the FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR he Rene TA Pai CH2 items o ee cus and CH4 Recording Levels The following table shows the effects on the recording level for Audio Channels 3 and 4 that depend on the settings and input levels specified through the menu options AUTO LEVEL CH3 and AUTO LEVEL CH4 Note that the recording level cannot be adjusted manually These options are found in the lt MIC AUDIO1 gt screen which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page AUTO LEVEL Input level CH3 CH4 LINE e
41. NO CARD No P2 card is inserted The mode check indication is shown in the viewfinder For more information see Viewfinder Status Indication Layout page 69 The access LED located on the display window blinks when reading or writing data from or to any of the P2 cards inserted in Slots 1 5 or stays illuminated when any of the cards are recordable It stays off when none of the P2 cards are recordable Recording and Playback P2 Cards 31 yoeq ejd pue Bulpiooey How to handle data recorded on P2 cards The P2 card is a semiconductor memory card that is used as the recording medium in the professional video production and broadcasting devices that make up the DVCPRO P2 Series Since data recorded in the DVCPRO P2 format or AVC Device Intra are in a file format they have excellent compatibility CONTENTS with PCs The file structure is a unique format which in AUDIO addition to video and audio data in MXF files contains bean All these folders are required various other important information items The folder L PROXY This is the file in which the structure links the data as shown on the right VIDEO information on the final clip __VOICE that was recorded with the P2 L LASTCLIP TXT device is written Changing or deleting just one information component could make it impossible to recognize the data as P2 data or use the card in a P2 device When transferring data from a P2 c
42. OFF detection flag to the SD SDI output C U F SAVE SW ON Select whether or not to forcibly disable AUD OUT OFF the audio output when the SAVE ON OFF switch is set to ON ON Disable audio output ClU F OFF Enable audio output SAVE SW ON Select whether or not to automatically LCD OFF turn off the LCD monitor when the SAVE ON OFF switch is set to ON ON Turn off LCD monitor IclulF OFF Do not turn off LCD monitor REC FUNCTION Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range INTERVAL ON Sets INTERVAL REC function PRE REC 1SEC Set PRE RECORDING REC MODE ONESHOT ON Uses internal memory to perform TIME 1 8SEC OFF interval recording 8SEC Set the length of time that can be ONE SHOT retrospectively recorded before the Performs one shot recording for the REC START button is pressed duration specified under REC TIME C U F and then stops LOOP REC JON Select whether or not to enable LOOP OFF INTERVAL REC is not performed MODE OFF REC Note This setting can be used with PRE This item cannot be changed when ON RECORDING features C U F is selected in LOOP REC MODE ON Enable LOOP REC INTERVAL JON Selects whether INTERVAL REC MODE OFF Disable LOOP REC REC HOLD OFF settings are retained or not when the Notes power is turned off once After the power is
43. ON AGC ON AGC ON OFF AGC LIMITER OFF LIMITER ON 54 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels Setting Time Data AJ HPX3000 supports time codes user bits date and time real time data which are recorded as data for the sub code area VIDEO AUX area and clip metadata files It also includes a CTL counter and camera ID A Description of time data Time code CTL counter The TCG switch can be used to switch between Rec run The CTL counter will measure total recording time after and free run resetting in the recording operation On the other hand Free run The time code always advances even when this value is the count time and sets the start point of a clip the power is turned off It can be handled as that can be played back This can be used to find the time It can be slaved to the time code input current playback position through the TC IN or DVCPRO connector Rec run The time code is recorded as sequential Camera ID values regenerated as the time code for a clip recorded on a P2 card The camera ID can be set with 10 characters x3 lines which can be superimposed on the color bar video It can User bits be also superimposed along with date and time data The camera recorder separately includes two types of user bits one UB is recorded in the sub code area and the other VITC UB in the VIDEO AUX area Each user bits can be recorded as any of
44. P2 TYPE2 REC START STOP marks are SLOT SIDE card access LEDs detected from VITC input LCD SIDE OFF Disables both LEDs above the through HD SDI for automatic BOTH slots and on the side panel recording SLOT SIDE Note Enables the LED above the slots Set the menu option REC SIGNAL to and disables the LED on the side SDI to input HD SDI signals to the SDI panel IN connector For information about user LCD SIDE bits frame rate information see Setting Enables the LED on the side panel of the user bits page 57 and disables the LED above the In INTERVAL REC mode and the LOOP slots REC mode the AUTO REC function is BOTH Enables both LEDs above the C UIF not available C U F slots and on the side panel POFF GPS HOLD Select whether or not to hold the UMID Hi DATA CLEAR GPS position information while the The _____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the power is turned off thereby keeping this preset mode information as status data holding the previous value until the power is turned on again which enables a new measurement to start HOLD Hold and save the data CLEAR Clear the data when the power is turned off and save zero No Info from the next power on until a new measurement is C U F completed SDI ON Used to specify whether or not to output METADATA OFF metadata UMID to SDI when the VIDEO OUT menu option is set to HD IclulFl SDI or SD HDI SDI EDH ON Select whether or not to add an error
45. PHASE are fetched automatically The fetched data will be the table data of A or B which is selected in the SKIN TONE TABLE item It is impossible to obtain color information of both A and B at the same ee as ee time SKIN DTL 0 For setting the effect level of the skin CORING tone detail s c u F R 7 Y MAX 000 For setting the maximum value of i90 brightness for enabling the skin tone s c uU F R 255 Y MIN 000 For setting the minimum value of 610 brightness for enabling the skin tone s c U F R 255 CENTER 000 For setting the center position on the axis for setting an area that enables 035 skin tone c U F R 255 WIDTH 000 For setting the area width for enabling the skin tone on the l axis of which the 055 center is the CENTER S c U F R 255 QWIDTH 00 For setting the area width for enabling the skin tone on the Q axis of which the 10 center is the CENTER s clu F R 90 Q PHASE 180 For setting phases of the area for enabling skin tone as setting the 000 standard to the Q axis s c u F R 179 Y MAX I CENTER direction B Y SKIN TONE AREA Y MIN 0 Note The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt screen The items without are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R W Please refer to SD CARD R W SELECT page 187 for more information The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the pre
46. SD memory cards page 127 1 2 Navigate the menu to the lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt screen Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the menu option CARD CONFIG Press the JOG dial button to display the following message CONF IG 84 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data 4 To format the SD memory card turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button When the SD memory card has been formatted the following message appears CONFIG OK The card will not be formatted if the following message appears when the JOG dial button is pressed Error message Remedy CONFIG NG Insert an SD memory card NO CARD No SD memory card inserted CONFIG NG The card may be defective ERROR Replace the card SD memory card cannot be formatted CONFIG NG Remove the card and cancel WRITE PROTECT the protect SD memory card is write protected CONFIG NG Example The SD memory card CANNOT ACCCESS is not accessible because it is SD memory card not being played back accessible After the operation in process format the card 5 To exit the menu press the MENU button The settings menu disappears and the status of the unit is indicated at the top and bottom of the viewfinder screen Note If an SD memory card is inserted or removed with the lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt screen open the data title cannot be edi
47. SD mode also support 4 channel digital audio recording with high quality sound 48 kHz 16 bits i Clip Thumbnailing Automatic generation of thumbnails AJ HPX3000 automatically generates a thumbnail for each recording cut clip It is possible to make use of this on the camera recorder as well as for non linear editing purposes and after uploading to a server Thumbnail display on the LCD monitor The 3 5 inch color LCD side of the your video camera recorder can provide a multi screen view of 12 clip thumbnails You can choose a desired clip to playback instantly Seamless playback of selected clips You can select more than one clip from the thumbnail view for continuous playback and output of seamless video Note During continuous playback of clips in different recording formats seamless playback is not available Display of clip information By selecting clips information added to clips such as the recording time Text Memo Shot Marks and metadata can be checked General Features of Recorder player unit 9 Q D 5 D D 2 Hi Text Memos amp Shot Marks Each clip can incorporate comments in the form of text memo added to the thumbnail associated with the time code together with shot marks which for example can help you distinguish OK cuts from reject cuts Both text memos and shot marks can be added to selected clips during and after a recording This is helpful for editing recorded video In add
48. Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the FILE NO item 3 Press the JOG dial button and the file number will flash Turn the JOG dial button to select the file 1 to 8 to be recorded lt LENS FILE gt gt FILE NO Iht READ WRITE RESET ALL APEERE TITLE Onan 1 2 3 i 4 Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number Give a title to the selected file 5 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the TITLE item lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO s1 READ WRITE RESET ALL gt TITLE ONDAN 1 2 3 4 J 6 When the JOG dial button is pressed the arrow cursor moves to the title input area and the input mode is established lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO f READ WRITE RESET ALL 4 TITLE oND 1 2 3 4 7 Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the character to be set is displayed When the button is turned the character displayed is switched in the following sequence Space o y Alphabetical characters y Numerals y Symbols AtoZ O0to9 gt lt X Press the JOG dial button to enter the character Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the next position right and repeat steps 7 and 8 to set the characters maximum of 12 10 When the title has been input turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the p
49. With combinations of the SYSTEM MODE and CAMERA MODE menu options on the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING menu you can select an image system from among 12 types including HD 1080i and SD formats In addition through the REC SIGNAL menu option you can record external input signals such as 1394 and SDI optional E Selecting a recording signal and method SYSTEM MODE menu option Allows you to select a combination of system frequency 59 94 Hz or 50 Hz and signaling system 1080i 480i or 576i When a change has been made to the SYSTEM MODE option the viewfinder indicates TURN POWER OFF Then turn the POWER switch of the camera recorder off and wait five seconds or longer before turning the camera recorder on again REC SIGNAL menu option CAM Signals from the camera are recorded The CAMERA MODE option allows you to select a camera operation mode frame mode Signals from the DVCPRO connector are recorded For information about the 1394 connection see Connection through the DVCPRO connector page 133 Signals from the GENLOCK IN connector are recorded when the camera recorder is in SD mode 480 59 94i or 576 50i SDI Signals from the SDI IN connector are recorded when the AJ YA350AG an SDI IN option is installed 1394 VIDEO Notes When VIDEO is selected video may produce noise if the signals from GENLOCK IN are non standard signals When SDI is selected the time code or UMID su
50. and then execute the operation again Menu Menu Description Tables 189 I MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK LENS FILE ADJ Items Adjustable Raimnairks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range COLOR ON ON OFF switching for checking proper RB GAIN ON ON The gains of Rch and Bch CHECK OFF operation of the camera recorder CTRL RESET OFF adjusted in lt RB GAIN The RGB level in the area around the CONTROL gt screen are reset center of the screen is indicated in the Furthermore the flare levels of viewfinder to show whether each signal Rch Gch and Bch that are is successfully communicated from the adjusted on lt RGB BLACK optical channel to the digital channel CONTROL gt screen are reset a eae a S and processed OFF The gains of Rch and Bch adjusted in lt RB GAIN CONTROL gt screen areenabled Furthermore the flare levels of LENS ADJ Rch Gch and Bch that are adjusted on lt RGB BLACK aelel CONTROL gt screen are enabled Items Adjustable Remarks f aoe DataSaved Range ae BAN iss eee ee Rch sensitivity of the F28AD ION The iris is only set to F2 8 when this item 000 ee OFF set to ON Adjustment to F2 8 will be _J_J_J_ _ executed on the lens F 200 FI6ADJ ION The iris is only set to F16 when this
51. be used by connecting an LED to this connector it is useful for shooting video when fixing the camera on a crane DC OUT connector Connector at the cable side O HR10A 7R 4P 73 Hirose Denki LED 4 Resistance Q Z Max 50 mA REC start stop 1 GND 2 TALLY OUT Open collector output on the unit side TALLY ON Low impedance TALLY OFF High impedance 3 REC start stop switch This is connected in parallel to the REC START button on the unit or the VTR button on the lens 4 12V 112 Preparation Connection of the external switch Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails A clip is a data group that includes the images and voices Playback delete copy or restore the clip created from one shooting session together with Add or delete a shot mark and a text memo on the clip additional information such as text memos and meta data thumbnail The following manipulations can be performed using the Copy part of a clip by using the test memo cursor and SET buttons while checking the images Change the thumbnail image displayed on the LCD monitor Format P2 cards and SD memory cards Uploading and editing clip metadata from the SD memory card Thumbnail Manipulations Overview Thumbnail screens are configured as follows T 00 00 55 11 00 01 28 07 00 02 08 07 osip o o7 a 00 02 33 26 00 03 51 04 00 04 48 26 Oy 3 1 a d iT 00 00 45 12
52. being updated the rotating icon amp is indicated Please refer to Switching the Thumbnail Display page 117 for more information Slot numbers and HDD status This section indicates on which P2 card the pointed clip is recorded The number of the slot that contains the appropriate P2 card is indicated in yellow If the clip is recorded on more than one P2 card then the numbers of all slots that contain the appropriate cards are indicated The numbers of the other slots are shown in white if they contain P2 cards When the following P2 card is inserted the slot num ber is displayed with a pink frame RUN DOWN CARD A P2 card on which the amount of data exceeds the limit defined in the standards DIR ENTRY NG CARD A P2 card on which the directory structure does not comply with the standards The USB HDD section is indicated as follows Other than the USB HOST mode gray Not connected in USB HOST mode gray HDD recognized and usable in USB HOST mode white HDD recognized and thumbnails shown in USB HOST mode yellow HDD recognized and data unable to be copied in USB HOST red Time Display You can set this to display the time code at the start of clip recording the user bits at the start of clip recording the shooting time the shooting date the shooting and date or USER CLIP NAME 10 11 12 13 Recording mode The recording mode for the clip on which the pointer is located i
53. characteristics for HD reduce the cross color for the SD mode FILM REC High Definition only SD nee etic Note The gain in the dark section is higher In PAL mode the 2 dimension LPF is than the HD gamma disabl i FILMLIKE1 SIC U FIR Isable The cinema gamma characteristics HIGH COLOR JON ON OFF switching for the HIGH COLOR for video applications are selected OFF mode which enhances the color FILMLIKE2 dynamic range The cinema gamma characteristics Note for video applications are selected While DRS operates selection of ON In this setting gradations in highlit in this item is not reflected in the areas can be expressed better than operation when FILM LIKE1 is selected S C U FIR FILMLIKE3 GAMMA ON For switching ON OFF of the gamma The cinema gamma characteristics OFF correction 2 for video applications are selected s clu FIR In this setting gradations in highlit z areas can be expressed better than TEST SAW JON Switch the test signal ON or OFF when FILM LIKE2 is selected OFF FILM REC SIC U FIR The cinema gamma characteristics FLARE ON Set the flare correction to ON or OFF sIclulFIR for film applications are used OFF DYNAMIC LVL 200 This is enabled when FILM REC is S C U F R 300 selected in GAMMA MODE SEL Set H F COMPE JON For switching ON OFF of the aperture 400 the BLACK STRECH position OFF correction S C U F R 500 S C U F R BLACK STR 00 This is enabled when FILM REC is LVL selected in GAMMA MODE SEL
54. connected settings made from the slclulF R menu are disabled The set value is displayed AWBBGAIN ON For setting the values of the Rch gain S C U F R OFFSET OFF and the Bch gain when the auto white B FLARE 100 For adjusting the flare level of the Bch balance is executed as the WHITE BAL Adjustment values in this item are switch is in the B position 000 added to the flare adjustment value that ON To retain the values set in the 4100 is adjusted on lt LENS FILE ADJ gt items of R GAIN AWB B and B screen GAIN AWB B if the remote control unit is OFF The values of the Rch gain and connected settings made from the siclulFEIR the Bch gain is set to O menu are disabled The set value is siclulFlir displayed The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the MATRIX COLOR CORRECTION Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range m MATRIX A For selecting the color correction table R 63 For performing the color saturation TABLE B for the linear matrix SAT 00 correction of red S C U F R Bo MATRIX
55. connector However the same value should commonly be set to the GL PHASE for all cameras If different values coexist in the system the shooting timing may not correspond to each other Reference video signal Setting of GL PHASE MON OUT VBS or COMPOSIT VIDEO OUT VBS Setting of GL PHASE Item variable Remarks range GL PHASE HD SDI For selecting the output signals that COMPOSIT lock phases to the signals that are input in the GENLOCK IN connector HD SDI For locking the HD SDI signals to the GENLOCK input For the down converter output signals the start position of the video delays by about 90 lines COMPOSIT For locking the down converter output signals to the GENLOCK input For the HD SDI output signals the start position of the video gains by about 90 lines Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data 61 gt 2 D a 3 D 5 a D 5 a ep D ot 5 a D uh fe s D D Q a 5 a In the unit there is a video signal delay in the camera which is required or the process of converting video images taken with the image shooting element from the progressive signals to the interlace signals Since time is required for making the 2 3 pull down from the 24P frame there is a video signal delay in the camera When recording from a device that can record images without a delay and the unit is connected in parallel it is necessary to synchr
56. gain from 3 0 3 6 GAIN 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 or 30dB OdB S C U F R 300B H DTL LEVEL 00 For performing the horizontal detail io correction level setting s clulF R 63 V DTL LEVEL 00 For performing the vertical detail i5 correction level setting s c u F R 31 DTL CORING 00 For performing the noise elimination 1 level setting for detail s c u F R 15 H DTL FREQ 00 For performing the horizontal detail ie frequency selection C U F R 31 LEVEL 0 For setting the LEVEL DEPEND DEPEND 1 When the Y detail is emphasized details of dark sections are compressed 5 If the numerical value is larger details of s clu FE IR bright sections are also compressed MASTER 0 30 For setting the master gamma 0 01 GAMMA step 0 45 C U F R 0 75 BLACK 3 For setting the gamma curve for the dark GAMMA portion OFF 3 to 1 43 The dark portion is compressed OFF Standard state 1 to 3 slclulF R The dark portion is extended mMATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table TABLE A for the linear matrix S C U F R B mCOLOR ON For switching ON OFF of the 12 axis CORRECT OFF independent color correction S C U F R Notes The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt screen The items without are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R W Please refer to SD CARD R W SELECT page 187 for more information f images are shot when the m
57. high sensitivity Use the S GAIN function and DS GAIN function in combination However exercise care during operation since image lag will become more conspicuous with moving subjects the more the gain is increased by using the DS GAIN function When shooting moving subjects keep the gain increase with the DS GAIN function to under 12 dB lt USER SW GAIN gt S GAIN 3 04B 3 6B DS GAIN 6dB 1T 1 04B f 1 24B f 1 54B f 2 04B f Settings Options and Usage S GAIN An analog gain increase with an asterisk is one that is valid One without an asterisk is invalid DS GAIN A cumulative gain increase with an asterisk is one that is valid One without an asterisk is invalid 52 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels AJ HPX3000 supports independent 4 channel sound recording in any recording format in HD 1080i and SD DVCPRO5O with 480i or 576i modes When the AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switch is positioned at AUTO the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2 are automatically adjusted To manually adjust the recording levels position the switch at MAN Note that the recording levels for Audio Channels 3 and 4 are selected through a menu option Notes Even in HD mode 1080i 4 channel sound is recoded on P2 cards When SDI input signals or signals i
58. in the following order Space o Alphabetical characters v Numerals v Symbols AtoZ 0to9 5 gt lt Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character 6 Turn the JOG dial button to move cursor to the next digit clockwise and repeat Steps 4 5 to set characters To change an input character turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the appropriate character and carry out steps 4 and 5 When all the characters are set turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to Pressing the JOG dial button brings the cursor back to the options ID1 ID3 9 To exit the menu press the MENU button Notes When the menu option CAMERA ID is set to BAR the camera ID is recorded together with color bar signals This menu option is accessible from the lt VF INDICATOR1 gt screen which is accessible from the VF page The ID POSITION menu option can be used to select a position where the camera ID is superimposed on the color bar The ID POSITION option can be accessed through the VF INDICATOR 1 screen on the VF page When the TIME DATE menu option is set to ON the camera ID along with the data and time information are superimposed on the color bar The TIME DATE option can be accessed through the VF INDICATOR 1 screen on the VF page When the TC ON COLOR BAR is turned ON the time code is displayed when the color bar is output but the time code is not rec
59. in the lt WHITE BALANCE MODE gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page When the menu option FILTER INH is set to OFF the adjusted value for each filter can be automatically stored in the memory that corresponds to the position of the WHITE BAL switch A or B Your unit has four built in filters it stores eight 4 x 2 adjusted values When the S GAIN super gain function is activated the AWB switch does not function and the value set for PRST is used 46 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance E Setting Color Temperature Manually The white balance can be manually adjusted by setting the color temperature Manual color temperature settings can be performed for each of the WHITE BAL switch positions PRST A and B The color temperature is set using the menu options COLOR TEMP PRE COLOR TEMP A and COLOR TEMP B These options can be found in the lt WHITE BALANCE MODE gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page There are two types of color temperature adjustment for COLOR TEMP PRE VAR or 3 2K 5 6K Switchable VAR Selectable within the range from 2300K to 8000K 3 2K 5 6K Switchable between 3200K and 5600K Refer to WHITE BALANCE MODE page 179 Note Even if the color temperature has been manually set automatic adjustment of the white balance AWB records the color temperature at the time of AWB at the position where
60. lamp behaves in the same way as the front tally lamp at the viewfinder BACK TALLY switch This switch controls the action of the 1 back and 8 rear tally lamps ON Back and rear tally lamps enabled OFF Back and rear tally lamps disabled WARNING lamp This lamp starts blinking or lights up if something unusual occurs in the memory USB lamp Stays on when the camera recorder is in USB mode Access lamp Blinks when the camera recorder is in recording or playback mode or when a P2 card is being accessed or stays on when a recordable P2 card is inserted LIGHT button Use this button to control illumination of the display window Alternately pressing this button toggles illumination of the 7 display window on or off Display window This window displays warnings battery remaining level sound volume time data and other information Note When the battery is installed the camera recorder indicates the data even if the power is turned off To turn off the data indications to keep the battery from being discharged specify OFF for the menu option P OFF LCD DISPLAY found in the TC UB screen on the MAIN OPERATION page Rear tally lamp When the 2 BACK TALLY switch is set on ON the rear tally lamp behaves in the same way as the back tally lamp Parts and their Functions Warning and Status Display Functions 25 suoloun 1194 pue Sed Display Window Functions P2 card battery remaining level indica
61. menu screen SELECT NTSC J standard other than Japan is ON Menu screen cannot be opened PAL selected Please consult your distributor to NTSC J Japan color TV standard is release the setting selected S a a a OFF Menu screen can be opened PAL PAL color TV standard is FRAME RATE FRM RATE For setting the user bits to record when a Nie eae selected UB MENU the video system is set to 24P or 24PA MAREASET The settings for the area selected in the For details refer to Recording time AREA SELECT item are applied For code and user bits page 56 details refer to Color TV Standard FRM RATE Settings Settings for frame frequency For recording the shooting information cl l page 13 frame rate etc of the camera MENU This follows the settings in the UB MODE item and the VITC The __in the Adjustable Range column indicates the UB MODE item of lt TC UB gt preset mode screen However the camera recording information is always recorded when recording in Cc Native mode 1394 CONFIG DFLT 000 This is the menu for expanding the 001 DVCPRO connector Use with DFLT in normal operation 255 eo 1394 GAP 0 For setting the interval between packets COUNT 40 c 63 AUDIO OUT DELAYED Select whether or not to delay audio DELAY THROUGH headphone and speaker outputs DELAYED Delay audio output in synchronisation with video output
62. no free space Playback position is at the start of all the clips Playback position is at the end of all the clips The P2 card is not recordable Detailed information is provided on the FUNCTION screen of MODE CHECK See the relevant section of the MODE CHECK indication area Clip cannot be played back perhaps because no P2 card is loaded or the P2 card contains no clips Displayed when disconnection between microcomputers continues for a specified period or longer Text memo has been added Text memo has not been successfully added Shot mark been added or deleted For information on shot marks see Shot Mark Function page 42 This is displayed when shot marks cannot be added Clip information is being updated Playback operation disabled AJ HPX3000 is in USB DEVICE mode When communication is disabled the indication blinks Indicates that the camera recorder is set to the USB HOST mode When the external hard disk is not successfully recognized then the indication blinks Thumbnail is being manipulated Displayed when the connection of the DVCPRO connector is abnormal Displayed when proxy recording on either the P2 card or the SD memory card starts when AJ YAX800G is attached the PROXY REC item on the VF INDICATORS screen is turned on Displayed when proxy recording on the P2 card starts when AJ YAX800G is attached the PROXY REC item on the VF INDICATORS screen is turned on When the remaining free space on the SD Me
63. nonlinear editing software or a personal computer the recording may be displayed as separate clips Continuous Recording method except for native recording time DVCPRO HD Approx AVC Intra100 5 minutes AVC Intra50 Approx DVCPROS50 10 minutes Approximate Proxy Recording Time optional on SD memory cards Except for 24P native mode Reference values when cards are used for continuous recording with our products Actual recording time depends Canin MPEG4 recording rate on the kind of scenes and the number of clips ard No Card Capacity 492 kbps 768kbps 1500 kbps The driver installed on the unit must be updated when A using SD memory cards other than as listed above To RP SDH256 Hanie Approx 35 Approx 19 update the driver refer to Updating the firmware 256 MB 17 minutes nutes minutes incorporated into the camera recorder page 193 RE Daaa Approx 69 Approx 38 For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory 512 MB 27 minutes Minutes minutes cards not available in the operating Instructions visit the P2 Support Desk at the following Web sites O RP SDQ01G Approx Approx Approx 77 D RP SDK01G 8 hour 2 hour pprox https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av D minutes p P P at 1 GB 56 minutes 19 minutes v RP SDQ02G Approx Approx Approx RP SDK02G 18 hour 4 hour 2 hour 2 GB 11 minutes 44 minutes 37 minutes Z Approx Approx Approx
64. priority indication will be triggered The WIRELESS RF however may not be indicated depending on the menu setting 1 System Errors 3 Battery Empty Display window indication The error code lights up Display window indication All 7 bar indicators for battery remaining capacity start blinking WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second WARNING lamp Lights up Tally lamp Blinks 4 times per second Tally lamp Blinks once per second Viewfinder The SYSTEM ERROR indication and the error code light up Warning tone Beeps continuously Viewfinder The BATT LED lights up Warning tone Beeps continuously Warning An error in the reference signal or the description communication Recording playback The operation stops operation Countermeasures Please confirm Error Codes page 152 and consult your distributor warning The battery has run out description Recording playback The operation stops operation Countermeasures Replace the battery 2 Card removal error 4 Write protect Display window indication Error code E 30 blinks Display window indication All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA capacity start blinking WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second Tally lamp Blinks 4 times per second WARNING lamp This lamp will illuminate continuously until an op
65. recording methods Refer to page 44 Wi Chromatic Aberration Compensation function The unit is equipped with a function to correct the magnification ratio chromatic aberration of lenses caused by the fact that the refractive index in lenses varies with the wavelength of light hereinafter referred to as chromatic aberration By using this function chromatic aberration around the lens can be corrected and high definition images can be obtained However a lens supporting chromatic aberration compensation is must be used Refer to page 97 H Scan Reverse function The Scan Reverse function as standard configuration cancels the image inversion that occurs when a lens adapter from Canon or Angenieux is used and it can be switched through the Menu settings Refer to page 159 H Film like Gamma function In order to obtain film tone in Varicam AJ HDC27 series the unit is equipped with the FILM REC gamma almost equivalent to Varicam Refer to page 171 i 2 disk 4 type configuration optical filters The unit is equipped with CC filters for 3200K 4300K 5600K and 6300K The 5600K filter for outdoor recording is standard Refer to page 18 E 14 bit A D conversion digital signal processing Analog video signals are processed into digital data by a 14 bit A D converter with sampling frequencies of 74 MHz It is possible to reproduce images that are more finely detailed i Storage type high sensitivity function DS GAIN The unit us
66. signals are output VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch This switch controls the superimposition of characters onto the video output from the VIDEO OUT connector ON Characters are superimposed OFF Characters are not superimposed For types of characters see Settings of signals output from VIDEO OUT connector page 80 VIDEO OUT video signal output connector This connector outputs video signals The video signals linked to the settings of 15 VIDEO OUT switch 16 VIDEO OUT CHARACTOR switch and 19 0UTPUT SEL switch are output from here For more details refer to Settings of signals output from VIDEO OUT connector page 80 REW STOP 20 21 18 19 FF naea 22 23 18 31 30 MON OUT monitor output connector Used to output down converted analog composite signals for the monitor The video signals linked to the setting of the OUTPUT SEL switch are output from here Through an internal menu option the characters can be superimposed independently of the VIDEO OUT connector For more information see Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector page 81 OUTPUT SEL output signal selection switch Used to switch the signals output from the VIDEO OUT and MON OUT connectors MEM Video from the camera is output during recording or when recording is paused or playback signals are output from the P2 card during playback Video from the camera is output constantly Video
67. strap Note Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached Press to open the mas e Secure with the surface fastener Secure with the surface fastener 110 Preparation Attaching the Shoulder Strap Connection of the remote control unit AJ RC10G It is possible to control some of the functions remotely by connecting the remote control unit AJ RC10G optional accessory When AJ RC10G is connected to the REMOTE connector on the unit and the power switches of both of the unit and AJ RC10G are turned on the unit automatically enters the remote control mode The remote control mode is released when AJ RC10G is removed or the power for the AJ RC10G is turned OFF 4 Switch functions in the remote control mode In the remote control mode the following switches and buttons on the unit are disabled SHUTTER switch MENU button JOG dial button GAIN switch OUTPUT AUTO KNEE switch WHITE BAL switch USER MAIN button USER 1 button USER 2 button Note In the remote control mode where AJ RC10G optional is connected it is impossible to apply skin tone detail to the VIDEO MON output by using the AJ RC10G SKIN TONE DTL menu If you use the Front Audio Level control frequently attach the accessory knob so that it can be easily operated Knob Accessory Front Au
68. terminates the menu option setting mode and returns the unit to normal operation mode Menu Menu Configuration 157 nue E Selecting Options for USER MENU Go to the USER MENU SELECT page from MAIN MENU Then open relevant options menu screens to select options to add to USER MENU Only the selected options are displayed as options in USER MENU For information about how to navigate this menu see Setting Menu Options page 157 lt USER MENU SELECT gt SELECT MODE SYSTEM SETTING PAINT VF CAM OPERATION MAIN OPERATION FILE MAINTENANCE Note Options with are effective The number of options that can be added to USER MENU is 14 x 3 42 three pages of options for camera related options and 14 one page of options for memory related options 158 Menu Menu Configuration Menu Description Tables IN SYSTEM SETTING SYSTEM MODE Items Adjustable Items Adjustable Data Saved Range nee Data Saved Range noes SYSTEM 1080 59 94i For setting the system frequency and the SCAN OFF Specify whether image correction is MODE 1080 50i recording format of the unit REVERSE JON used or not when an anamorphic lens 480 59 941 When this item is switched turn OFF or a lens for film applications is used 5
69. the LCD monitor In SD 1394 OUT CH 0 For setting the input channel of signals mode only output from the DVCPRO connector SQUEEZE Display images in the 63 0 63 To fix to the designated value squeeze size AUTO AUTO To follow the settings of the LT BOX Display images in the letter C U F externally connected devices box size 1394 OFF For setting the control for recording Note CONTROL BOTH start stop operations of external devices This item is enabled only when ASPECT that are connected to the DVCPRO _IclulFl_ oe in SYSTEM MODE is set connector OFF Do not control the externally connected devices BOTH To control both the unit and the GENLOCK IclulFl externally connected devices 1394 CMD SEL REC_P For setting the control of recording stop ltems Adjustable STOP operations of the external devices that Data Saved Range Remarks are connected to the DVCPRO connector GENLOCK JINT Switch the camera synchronising signal i s EXT INT Synchronise with the internal iae eee i i at recording reference signal regardless of the C U F Stopping Operation reference signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector ingi EXT Synchronise with the reference The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the signal input to the GENLOCK IN preset mode C U F R connector GLPHASE JHD S For selecting the output signals that lock COMPOSIT phases to the signals that are input in the GENLOCK IN connector
70. the WHITE BAL switch was located When the CC filter position is switched the value for the color temperature changes lt WHITE BALANCE MODE gt FILTER INH ON SHOCKLESS AWB NORMAL AWB AREA 25 TEMP PRE SEL SW 3 2K 5 6K COLOR TEMP PRE 3200K AWB A TEMP 2600K AWB B TEMP 3200K Viewfinder displays related to white balance See Viewfinder Screen Status Displays page 68 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy 47 Il Adjusting the Black Balance The black balance must be adjusted when You use your unit the first time Your unit has not been used for some time The ambient temperature has changed substantially The gain switchover value has been changed or S GAIN super gain has been set with the USER MAIN USER1 USER2 button 1 Set the switches as illustrated below AUTO W B BAL switch OUTPUT CAM Used to perform ABB 2 Tilt the AUTO W B BAL switch so that it is positioned at ABB then release it The switch returns to the central position with the black balance automatically adjusted 3 During adjustment the viewfinder displays the following message ABB ACTIVE Note During adjustment the lens iris automatically becomes CLOSE 4 The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds and the following message will appear ABB OK The adjusted value is automat
71. the light cable Lens cable microphone cable clamp This clamp secures the lens and microphone cables Tripod mount When you want to mount camera recorder on a tripod the optional tripod adapter SHAN TM700 is attached here LENS jack 12 pin The lens connection cord is connected here For a detailed description of your lens see the relevant manufacturer s instruction manual DC OUT DC power supply output socket This output socket is designed for 12 VDC It provides a maximum current of 1 5 A Connect an external switch to this socket to control REC starts and stops or an LED for use as a tally lamp For more information see Connection of the external switch page 112 Parts and their Functions Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section suOo oUN 1194 PUL Sed Audio input Function Section MIC IN microphone input jack XLR 5 pin A microphone optional accessory is connected here Power for the microphone comes from this jack A remote microphone may be connected When a microphone is used set the power to ON through the menu option FRONT MIC POWER These options are found in the lt MIC AUDIO2 gt screen on the MAIN OPERATION page AUDIO LEVEL CH1 CH2 audio channel 1 amp 2 recording level adjustment controls With the 3 AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switch positioned to MAN these controls can be used to adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 2 Note that the controls are designed
72. the target P2 card together with that card s remaining free space indicated in minutes Example fj 8min Indicated as LOOP The minimum guaranteed recording time is indicated in minutes Example 7min 1 The menu option P2CARD REMAIN can be found in the lt VF INDICATOR3 gt screen which is accessible from the VF page 2 If the remaining free space or memory capacity is 999 min or more 999min is displayed Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Bulpsooey 104 sbuljas pue sjuewjsnipy 15 Indications Available in the Viewfinder Screen Selectable between on and off through menu options Provided when the appropriate status is encountered Provided during MODE CHECK Selectable Provided during playback System mode Camera mode REC mode Shutter speed mode P2 card remaining free space OJOJOJOJ O SP a S 0N P2 card remaining free space MODE CHECK Camera recorder REC indication O Battery type MODE CHECK Battery remaining level voltage 10 MODE CHECK indication area 11 Camera warning and report area 12 User button functions 13 System information and warnings OIOJO 14 Time code indication 15 Chromatic aberration compensation 16 Extender 17 Color temperature OIOJO 18 Filter position 19 Dynam
73. the target value for the super iris Telulelr a Disable 80 Backlight correction function 15dBf x Select whether or not to enable 15 dB IclulelR 400 for DS GAIN i sc Enable IRIS GAIN CAM Select which unit controls IRIS GAIN IclUlFIR e Disable LENS Note Lenses with an extender such as x2 20 dB 1 Select whether or not to enable 20 dB x0 8 sold before FUJINON DIGI for DS GAIN POWER perform IRIS compensation Enable while enabling the extender Therefore if c u F R e Disable this setting is switched to CAM the camera s iris control will not operate z FIR properly S Yole IR A 1 Set the adjustabl lue for IRIS GAIN When the DS GAIN function is active the shutter mode is 0 s O ATIS a VASO P VALUE This setting is effective when CAM is set to OFF 10 selected for IRIS GAIN c u F R 20 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode 180 Menu Menu Description Tables I MAIN OPERATION BATTERY P2CARD Items Adjustable Items Adjustable Data Saved Range neomarks Data Saved Range Remarks BATTERY PROPAC14 Select the battery to use Remaining CARD NEAR ON Select whether or not to set the alarm to SELECT TRIMPAC14 capacity detection is also performed END ALARM OFF beep for P2 CARD NEAR END ALARM HYTRON50 Jjaccording to the selected battery clulFl HYTRON140 The variable range
74. the time the data on the partition was recorded ON FINISHED Verification was performed and the results agreed ON FAILED Verification was performed and the results did not agree OFF No verification was performed No verification information is available Notes Even for a FAT type hard disc drive the 1001st or later clips are not shown For a FAT formatted hard disc drive the information about only the first partition is shown For a P2 STORE AJ PCS060G that has an invalid partition that partition information is shown in gray NAME This section indicates the PARTITION NAME Formatting a hard disc drive Switch the mode to USB HOST For more information see Switching to the USB HOST mode page 136 Connect the hard disc drive via USB Press the thumbnail button to display the thumbnail screen Press the MENU button and select HDD gt EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu The display provides a screen that shows the information about the hard disc drive From the menu select OPERATION FORMAT HDD and select YES using the cursor buttons and SET button Then the confirmation message is displayed again Select YES The camera recorder starts formatting the hard disc drive Once formatted the hard disc drive can be treated as a TYPE S HDD Note Formatting a hard disc drive erases all contents of it Note that you cannot erase the contents of certain partitions by specifying the
75. turned off this item ON Retain will default to OFF the next time the OFF Do not retain The INTERVAL REC power is turned on MODE is OFF whenever the power This item cannot be changed when lclulel is turned on again ON or ONE SHOT is selected in REC TIME 00s04f Set REC TIME 1 cut F INTERVAL REC MODE z Note REC START ALL Select operating modes that allow D 59s29f However the settings can be made NORMAL recording to start 2 frame by frame and the numbers of the cut off unit frames for the shortest time period and the set time on the actual ALL Allow recording to start during stop recording pause and F F playback operation may vary with the recording NORMAL method For details refer to Interval Allow recording to start during stop IcJulFl Recording page 37 and recording pause Note PAUSE TIME ponapmioosati PE PAUSE time for recording Even if this is set to ALL the operation is NORMAL when ON or ONE h04m59s29f H the sett f i o0 04m59s29f However the settings can be made frame SHOT is selected in INTERVAL REG by frame and the numbers of the cut off MODE 23h59m59s29f unit frames for the shortest time period C U F and the set time on the actual operation PON REC HOLD Select the reco
76. type of stop recording command to be received by the external device 3 Through the REC TALLY menu option on the OPTION MODE screen select how the recording status of the camera recorder should be indicated Note that the recording status of the external device is indicated with a red tally LED 4 Open lt SYSTEM MODE gt on the SYSTEM SETTING page to set REC MODE to DVCPRO HD Notes When the Fire Store FS 100 is used as external storage the VITC UB MODE menu option on the TC UB screen on the MAIN OPERATION page can be set to FRM RATE to allow the FS 100 to indicate the shooting frame rate of the camera recorder on its display It is also possible to add the same USER CLIP NAME of the unit to the record clip of the FS 100 Note that when recording a backup with an external device connected to the camera recorder during REC RUN mode and there is insufficient storage space on the P2 card inserted into the camera recorder the time code output from the DVCPRO connector will not advance from that point When the AVC Intra format or INTERVAL REC mode is selected it is impossible to control any external devices through the 1394 connection fi Directions for using the DVCPRO connection When connecting the 1394 DV cable see 82 DVCPRO connector page 22 The AV signals may be disrupted by turning the power of the connected devices ON and OFF or by disconnecting and re connecting the I F cables it may ta
77. vae preset mode ViTCUB USER EXT Select the user bits mode for VAUX TC MODE TIME VITC DATE USER EXT TCG If UB MODE is set to EXT the EXT FRM RATE value is recorded If not USER value REGEN set by UB is recorded TIME Select local time hours minutes seconds DATE Select local date and time 2 last digits of year month date time TCG TCG value enters UB FRM RATE Select camera shoting information frame rate etc For more information see Frame rate information recorded in user bits page 58 REGEN Read out value stored in card and record value continuously Note When the camera recorder operates in 24P 24PA 30P AVC I or 25P AVC I IC U FI mode FRM RATE is always selected Menu Menu Description Tables 1 85 Items Data Saved Adjustable Range Remarks Items Data Saved Adjustable Range Remarks TCG SET HOLD U F ON OFF ON OFF switching for the feature that always starts recording when the power is turned ON again the TCG value that was set before the power is turned OFF FIRST REC TC u F PRESET REGEN For the first recording after the power is turned on a P2 card is inserted and then switching from this P2 card to another recording target P2 card is performed select whether or not to regenerate the time code as the value on the new P2 card PRESET Use the camera recorder
78. value is slclulF R displayed s c U F R displayed R PEDESTAL 100 For setting the pedestal level of the Rch B GAIN AWB 200 For setting the Bch gain when the if the remote control unit is PRE WHITE BAL switch is in the PRST 000 connected settings made from the 000 position 100 menu are disabled The set value is 200 lf the remote control unit is sic u F IR displayed connected settings made from the S pEDESTAL 100 For setting the pedestal level of the menu are disabled The set value is Gch S C U F R displayed 000 eif the remote control unit is R GAIN AWB A 200 For setting the Rch gain when the 100 connected settings made from the WHITE BAL switch is in the A position menu are disabled The set value is 000 if the remote control unit is SIC U FIR displayed 4200 connected settings made from the S pEDESTAL 100 For setting the pedestal level of the Bch menu are disabled The set value is ae if the remote control unit is S C U F R displayed 000 connected settings made from the B GAIN AWB A 200 For setting the Bch gain when the 100 menu are disabled The set value is 5000 WHITE BAL switch is in the A position slclulF R displayed oo S athe remote CONO ee ae PEDESTAL JON For setting the pedestal levels of the 4200 connected settings made Mom ARE GEESE IGE Rch the Gch and the Bch when the menu are disabled The set value is auto black balance is adjusted S C U F R displayed O
79. with this assigned function and then press the JOG dial button The color temperature indicated on the viewfinder display is highlighted and starts blinking indicating that the color temperature can be changed While the indication is blinking the JOG dial button can be turned to change the color temperature At this time the value set for the position PRST A or B to which the WHITE BAL switch is set is also changed Function of switching the input signal source for Audio Channel 1 assigned Pressing the button switches the input signal in the following order FRONT gt W L gt REAR Note that the AUDIO IN switch can also be used to change the input signal later specification takes precedence Function of switching the input signal source for Audio Channel 2 assigned Pressing the button switches the input signal in the following order FRONT W L gt REAR Note that the AUDIO IN switch can also be used to change the input signal later specification takes precedence Adjustments and Settings for Recording Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy 51 REC SW Function of the REC START STOP button assigned RET SW Function of the RET button at the lens assigned PRE REC PRE RECORDING switch ON switch OFF function assigned SLOT SEL Function of switching the target P2 card among multiple cards assigned PC MODE The function to turn on o
80. zooming ratio iris and focal distance in the main unit of the camera recorder and connect a lens suitable for these characteris tics Then perform the correction in accordance with the zooming ratio iris and focus distance of the lens The CAC data for the following four kinds of lenses are stored in the unit at the time of shipment from the factory Indication on the unit Supporting lens model No HA16x6 3BERM M58 HA16x6 3BERM M58 HA22 x7 8BERM M58 HA22x 7 8BERM M58 HJ17Ex7 6B IASE HJ17E x 7 6B IASE HJ22E x 7 6B IASE HJ22E x 7 6B IASE Note After the release of this camera visit our Web site at the address given below for details on new lenses compatible with this function and any changes in this function https eww pave panasonic co jp pro av Adjustments and Settings for Recording Chromatic Aberration Compensation CAC CAC operation For the four lenses listed on the left 1 2 3 2 Install the lens on the unit and connect the lens connector Open the CAC ADJ MENU on the MAINTENANCE MENU screen Turn ON the CAC CONTROL If the lens product number recorded on the unit coin cides with the product number of the connected lens the CAC data stored in the unit are read out automati cally lt CAC ADJ gt gt CAC CONTROL ON CAC FILE DELETE CAC FILE NO 01 TITLE SCROLL 01 01 HA22X7 8BERM M58 02 HA16X6 3BERM M58 03 HJ17EX7 6B IASE 04 HJ22EX7 6B IAS
81. 0 12 00 00 29 24 00 00 48 09 00 0 TEXT MEMO CLIP 11 T04 05 Notes Display clip properties by selecting PROPERTY CLIP PROPERTY on the thumbnail menu to confirm the position of the thumbnail the number of frames from the top of the clip Since thumbnails come generally from the top of the clip 0 is displayed 118 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Switching the Thumbnail Display Shot Mark A shot mark can be added to a clip thumbnail to distinguish this clip from the others 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip to which you want to attach a shot mark 3 Press the Shot Mark button 4 A shot mark will be attached to the clip thumbnail under the pointer To delete a shot mark reposition the pointer over the clip and press the Shot Mark button Notes A shot mark can be attached during recording Please refer to Shot Mark Function page 42 for more information When adding a shot mark to or deleting the shot mark from a clip recorded across multiple P2 cards do this with all these P2 cards inserted into P2 card slots Text Memo During recording or playback you can add text memos to clips Text memos can be used to play back clips at some point or break clips into chunks and copy the necessary portions E Adding a text memo Text memos can be added in one of the following way
82. 000 LENS B GAIN OFFSET 000 LENS R FLARE 2000 LENS G FLARE 2000 LENS B FLARE 2000 Example of the chart for flare adjustment i 92 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Adjustment of gain offset For correcting changes in white balance that may occur when replacing the lens 1 Mount the lens as standard on the unit 2 Shoot the grayscale chart with appropriate lighting 2000 Ix 3200 K are preferable Set the WHITE BAL switch to the A position Adjust the lens aperture so that the white window at the center of the grayscale chart is about 80 Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to AWB to adjust the white balance automatically Measure the signal level of RGB by using the waveform monitor WFM Replace the lens to one where a lens file is provided ON OQU RW Adjust the lens aperture so that the signal level of Gch isthe same signal level as the one obtained in 6 above Using the menu operations open the lt LENS FILE ADJ gt screen from the MAINTENANCE page and set the RB GAIN CTRL RESET to ON 10 Adjust the signal level of Rch to be the same as Gch in the LENS R GAIN OFFSET item 1 1 In the same way adjust the signal level of Bch to be the same as Gch in the LENS B GAIN OFFSET item E save the lens file into the built in memory Select the file No 1 Using the menu operations open the lt LENS FILE gt screen from the FILE page 2
83. 0003 0004 I l 1st card yl 2nd card af If the clip thumbnails are displayed as shown in the example above or their properties are indicated using a P2 device the thumbnail and COUNT value of clip 1 will be displayed Clear the uploaded metadata Select META DATA INITIALIZE from the thumbnail menu and press the SET button Select YES when the confirmation screen is displayed Notes The setting for the displayed language is available only when the area is set to NTSC J For details refer to Color TV Standard Settings Settings for frame frequency page 13 Japanese or Chinese characters indicated in English or other characters that cannot be indicated in English will not display properly they will be indicated as gt The letters which can be input with AJ HPX3000 are only the alphanumeric AJ HPX3000 cannot input Japanese and Chinese sjreuquiny ym sdo Bulyejndiueyy Setting of Proxy optional By attaching the video encoder card AJ YAX800G optional either to the optional slot or Slot 5 it is possible to specify the proxy recording setting The video encoder card is not recognized when inserted if THUMONAIE DELETE the power for the unit is turned ON Insert the video encoder EEI FORMAT card after turning off the power for the unit ETA DATA REPAIR C Select OPERATION DEVICE SETUP PROXY from n RE CONNECTION the thumbnail menu to specify the setting EXIT cony
84. 01 Maker part number HR12 14RA 20SC Hirose Denki LENS 1 RET SW ON OFF of the return video RETURN ON GND RETURN OFF OPEN 2 REC START STOP Control for recording start stop 5 V ov A A A START STOP START GND GND IRIS AUTO ON OFF of the forced iris servo SERVO ON 5V 0 5V SERVO OFF OPEN 5 IRIS CONT Control output for the lens iris F2 8 6 2 V F16 3 4 V CLOSE 2 5 V UNREG 12V 12V power supply for the lens Max 1 5 A IRIS POSI Iris position signals 3 4 V F16 to 6 2 V F2 8 8 IRIS G MAX IRIS REMOTE LOCAL AUTO signals REMOTE 5V 0 5V LOCAL AUTO GND 9 EXT POSI ON OFF of the built in extender EXTENDER ON GND EXTENDER OFF OPEN 10 ZOOM POSI Zoom position signals 11 FOCUS POSI Focus position signal 12 SPARE Standby not used GPS GPS TXA Transmission data from the GPS unit to the camera GPS RXA Transmission data from the camera to the GPS unit GPS VBAT Backup power supply connector for the GPS unit DC 3 3 V REC START SW Control signals of REC start stop GPS VCC Power supply connector for the GPS unit DC 3 3 V GPS GND GND Matsushita part number K1AY112JA001 Maker part number HR10A 10R 12SC 71 Hirose Denki Matsushita part number K1AY106J0001 Maker part number HR10A 7R 6SC 73 Hirose Denki suonoedsu pue soueusjuley Maintenance and Inspections Main
85. 1iy 3 7 4 o0 i 2 314 24P 24PA Oto 4 30P 308 k In all other modes Fixed at F 24P 248 Updated frame information 24PA 24C 10 10 00 10 10 10 01 00 10 50i 502 25P 25A Frame rate 30P Over 60i 2 2 25P Over 50i 2 2 Time code frame digit oo 01 02 Image AolAefBo Be Co Ce Updated frame information 10 10 The frame rate information of user bits in Native recording is as follows Kk 0F 24 Cx Tose management information REC START STOP mark Verification information Me tela Camera recording mode totheright Fixed value 24PN 24C 30PN 308 25PN 25A Note During playback of clips recorded in Native recording frame rate information of user bits is converted according to the image pull down and then output Example Recording Kk 0F 24 Cx Playback 4 xx 0 24 8x indicates sequence Nos 0 to 4 58 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data E Setting the Internal Clock s Date and Time 1 Position the DISPLAY switch at UB 2 Press the HOLD button to display a date in the display window 3 4 Position the TCG switch at SET Use the CURSOR and SET buttons to set the year month and day Y M D Note that any later than 2030 cannot be set button Shifts the target blinking digit to the right lt button Shifts the target blinking digit to the left A button Advances the blinking numbe
86. 76 50i the POWER switch on the unit and then OFF Images are not corrected turn it ON again ON Images are corrected The vertical Notes and horizontal orientations are When the remote control unit AJ IclulF R inverted RC10G is connected this item is not 7 displayed i VF TYPE HD Specify the type of viewfinder to be To switch this item operate the main SD attached to the camera recorder unit independently C U F R When the time code is in free run REC MODE AVC 1100 Select the recording mode mode and a change is made to the AVC 150 AVC I 100 SYSTEM MODE menu option the DVCPROHD Record in AVC I 100 format time may not be correctly recorded DVCPRO50 AVC I 50 After turning on the camera recorder Record in AVC I 50 format check the time code and make a DVCPRO HD change to the setting if required Record in DVCPRO HD format When USB DEVICE mode is selected DVCPROSO TelulFl no change can be made to this option Record in DVCPROS0 format In SD mode only REC SIGNAL CAM Select video input signals Notes VIDEO CAM Record the signal from the If 1394 is selected in REC SIGNAL 1394 camera AVC I 100 and AVC I 50 cannot be SDI VIDEO Record the signal from the oe edb bd selected GENLOCK IN connector In SD SETUP 0 Switch the setup For 480 59 94i only mode only 7 5 A 0 Setup is switched to 0 for both 1394 Record the signal from the 1394 bees ane output and the SDI PE A the SDI IN 7 5 A Set
87. AR END voltage in 0 1 138 V steps 132 V steps clulF 115 0 clulF 115 0 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the BATTERY SETTING2 Items Adjustable Items Adjustable Data Saved Range Remarks Data Saved Range nemarxs PAG L95 X Enable selection under BATTERY NiCd14 Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT x Enable selection x Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR NEAR END 11 0 Set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 V MANUAL END voltage 138 steps AUTO Set voltage automatically SS MANUAL Set voltage manually 15 0 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu END 11 0 Set the END voltage in 0 1 V steps above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 135 V steps 13 4 clulF 115 0 C U F 15 0 BP GL65 95 x Enable selection under BATTERY TYPE A Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT gt Enable selection Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR FULL 12 0 Set the voltage to display the FULL MANUAL END voltage i5 1 indication in 0 1 V steps AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually 17 0 J 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu NEAR END 11 0 Set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 V above set the NEAR END volta
88. ARD READ gt CARD FILE SELECT 1 READ DELETE TITLE READ TITLE SCROLL 01 01 HA22X7 8BERM M58 02 HA16X6 3BERM M58 03 HJ17EX7 6B IASE 04 HJ22EX7 6B IASE 05 NO FILE 06 NO FILE 07 NO FILE 08 NO FILE Select CARD FILE SELECT using the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button Select the TITLE NO to be read and press the JOG dial button Select READ using the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button The following screen is displayed FILE READ gt YES NO CANCEL MEM STORE NO EMPTY TITLE SCROLL 01 01 HA22X7 8BERM M58 02 HA16X6 3BERM M58 03 HJ17EX7 6B IASE 04 HJ22EX7 6B IASE 05 NO FILE 06 NO FILE 07 NO FILE 08 NO FILE If the following messages are displayed when the JOG dial button is pressed the data cannot be read out Error message Measures READ NG NO CARD No SD memory card is inserted Insert an SD memory card READ NG Select a file containing data and NO FILE perform the read operation No file is available again READ NG Insert an SD memory card ERROR again and then perform the Data cannot be read out read operation again READ NG It is impossible to access the CANNOT ACCESS SD memory card while the card It is impossible to access the data is in use After completion of the respective operations perform the read operation again READ NG FILE DATA INVALID File data are abnormal The writt
89. AT For a hard disc drive Thumbnail viewing with the first primary reading on a clip basis partition formatted in and formatting FAT 16 or 32 as seen Once formatted the on personal computers hard disc drive can be etc which requires a treated as a TYPE S CONTENTS directory at HDD its root OTHER Hard disc drives not Formatting described above Once formatted they They are hard disc can be treated as a drives that have no TYPE S HDD CONTENTS directory or use the NTFS and any other file system instead of FAT 16 or 32 2 VENDOR This section indicates the vendor for the hard disc drive MODEL This section indicates the model of the hard disc drive SIZE This section indicates the total storage on the hard disc drive USED This section indicates the used space on the hard disc drive in GB and the number of P2 cards in use REMAIN This section indicates the remaining free space on the hard disc drive in GB PARTITION This section indicates the partition number one P2 card is used as a unit on the hard disc drive Note The screen indicates up to 10 partitions When the number of partitions exceeds 10 scroll down the indi cation with the cursor button V to view the hidden partitions 914 p eUsJ9 X9 UIIM UOIO UUOD Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port 137 8 MODEL This section indicates the model of the P2 card that originally conta
90. ATE The frame rate for the playback REC RATE The recording frame rate is displayed This is indicated on the clip that data is recorded in a special way using the camera recorder Clip Meta Data Displays more detailed data about the clip Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer and press the SET button to check the detailed content The underlined items are automatically set during shooting For more information on displayed metadata see Setting of Clip Meta Data page 123 1 Display the window for detailed clip metadata that you intend to modify in the clip properties window 2 Place the cursor on the item to be modified using the cursor button The metadata that can be modified are shown like CREATOR in the following figure e2 E falls GLOBAL CLIP ID USER CLIP NAME PROPERTY 0008 CREATOR i CREATION DATE 16 MAY 2007 LAST UPDATE DATE 16 MAY 2007 LAST UPDATE PERSON V_FORMAT DV100_1080 59 94i FRAME RATE 59 94i REC RATE MEMO THUMBNAIL Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Properties 129 sreuquiny L ym sdo Bupendjuen 3 Press the SET button The input window soft keyboard for modifying metadata is displayed Use the keyboard to modify the metadata PROPERTY GLOBAL CLIP ID AE pa a CREATOR CREATION DATE LAST UPDATE DATE 16 MAY 2007 _16 MAY 2007 V_FORMAT FRAME RATE 59 9 REC RATE The keyboard operation is the same as Checking and modifyin
91. About Interference available from FCC local regional offices helpful FCC Warning To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance the user must use only shielded interface cables when connecting to host computer or peripheral devices Also any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user s authority to operate this device Declaration of Conformity Model Number AJ HPX3000G Trade Name PANASONIC Responsible Party Panasonic Corporation of North America One Panasonic Way Secaucus NJ 07094 Panasonic Broadcast amp Television Systems Company 1 800 524 1448 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation To assure continued compliance follow the attached installation instructions and do not make any unauthorized modifications Support contact CAUTIONS TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD REFER MOUNTING OF OPTIONAL INTERFACE BOARDS TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL indicates safety information A rechargeable battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased lt For USA California Only gt This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material special handling may
92. Blinks 4 times per second while recording continues Viewfinder The REC WARNING indicator lights up Warning tone Beeps 4 times per second while recording continues Warning There are abnormal conditions in the image description sequence of the 24P 30P or 25P mode Recording Images can be recorded and played back playback but some frames may be dropped or the operation sequences of TC and UB may shift Confirm the recording playback operation after turning OFF the power supply once and Countermeasures then turning it on again If the error is not corrected after executing this procedure contact the dealer 1 50 Maintenance and Inspections Warning System WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second During pause and recording Tally lamp Blinks 4 times per second while recording continues Viewfinder The WIRELESS RF indicator lights up while recording continues Warning tone Beeps 4 times per second while recording continues Warning This error indicates poor wireless audio description reception conditions oe Continues to operate without receiving the p ay z wireless microphone signal operation Countermeasures Check the microphone power supply and the reception status of the wireless receiver 9 1394 Error 12 P2 Card Error Display window indication The 1394 E gt indicator in the display window blinks For more informat
93. C IN jack at an appropriate sound source Then check that the level displays for both CH1 and CH2 change according to the sound level 3 Inspecting the Audio Level Manual Adjustment 1 Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to FRONT 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to MAN 3 Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls Check that the level display increases when the controls are turned to the right 4 Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker 1 Turn the MONITOR control to check that the speaker volume changes 2 Connect an earphone to the PHONES jack Check that the speaker is turned off and the microphone sound can be heard from the earphone 3 Turn the MONITOR control to check that the earphone volume changes 5 Inspection for Using an External Microphone 1 Connect an external microphone to the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors 2 Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to REAR 3 Set the LINE MIC 48V selector switches on the rear panel to MIC or 48V depending on the power supply type of the external microphone MIC For a microphone with internal power supply 48V For a microphone with external power supply 4 Aim the microphone at a sound source Then check that the audio level meter in the display window and the audio level display inside the viewfinder change according to the sound level The channels can also be checked separately by connecting a single microphone to each channel suo1 2
94. CHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons manual knee mode i BARS These buttons are enabled when the 3 shutter switch Color bar signal is output The AUTO KNEE circuit sepa easy te ee A one te i does not work ey are used to adjust the speed of the synchro You can select between four types of color bar signal a nee a ae apa For more information see SW MODE page 178 ce SERTER SAUCE SPS Gs Mer OULON increases shutter speed Auto Knee function If you shoot a PC monitor for example you should Ysually when you adjust levels to Shgot people or scenery adjust shutter speed so that the horizontal bars in the against a strongly lit background the background will be totally iewfind ill d whited out with buildings and other objects blurred In this case ESET WIS pPrOgUCe 16SS NOISE the AUTO KNEE function reproduces the background clearly This function is effective when 11 REC START STOP button eThe subject is a person positioned in the shade under a clear Pressing this button starts recording pressing again sky The subject is a person inside a car or building and you also stops recording want to capture the background visible through a window This button has the same function as the 24 REC The subject is a high contrast scene button on the handle and the VTR button at the lens 7 WHITE BAL white balance memory selector 12 SHOT MARK Menu cancel button switch Pressing this button while recording adds a shot mark Used to select the wh
95. CK gt screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page 5 Supply a phase relationship reference time code that conforms to the time code requirements and reference video signals to the TC IN and GENLOCK IN connectors respectively Now the built in time code generator is locked with the reference time code From about 10 seconds after locking the time code generator stays locked even if the supply of external reference time code is discontinued Notes When the time code generator is externally locked the time code instantly becomes locked with the external time code and the counter displays the external time code value Do not put the unit in recording mode before the sync generator stabilises Be sure to enter the non drop frame time code to externally lock the time code in the 24P 24PA or 24PN Native mode Externally locking the drop frame time code is not permitted Video quality may be degraded momentarily while externally locking to adjust the 5 frame cycle This is not abnormal While recording data in the 24P 24PA or Native modes it is impossible to lock the time code externally Lock it before recording When the unit PRE REC MODE is set to ON in these modes corrupt images or stopped time codes may be recorded if the time code is switched from REC RUN to FREE RUN immediately before recording or when using slave lock When 1394 is selected for the menu option REC SIGNAL it is not poss
96. CT READ W SELECT WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ J RRR SRR LR LR Re i J 10 Press the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the option TITLE 1 1 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the 5 Press the JOG dial button This moves the cursor to the entry area putting the unit in entry mode lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt option WRITE 12 Press the JOG dial button to display the following R SELECT READ W SELECT WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ message WRITE MES SNOT TFET TITLE gt Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy 85 The data will not be written if any of the following messages appears when the JOG dial button is pressed Error message Remedy FORMAT ERROR SD memory card not properly formatted WRITE NG Insert an SD memory card NO CARD No SD memory card inserted WRITE NG The card has not been formatted using the unit Replace the card WRITE PROTECT SD memory card write protected WRITE NG The card may be defective ERROR Replace the card SD memory card not writable WRITE NG Remove the card and disable the protect WRITE NG Example The SD memory card CANNOT ACCCESS is not accessible because it is SD memory card not being played back accessible After the operation in process format the c
97. D SDI 0 8 VP P 75 Q Compliant with the SMPTE259M C 272M A ITU R BT656 4 standards Composite 1 0 VP P 75 Q TC IN BNC x1 0 5 VP P to 8 VP P 10 kQ TC OUT BNC x1 low impedance 2 0 0 5 VP P DVCPRO 6 pins I O Transmission rate 400 200 or 100 Mbps selectable Transmission data compliant with IEEE1394 1995 1394a 2000 IEC 61883 1 and 2 and SMPTE 396M Control commands compliant with the AV C Command Set standards SDI OUT BNC x1 0 8 VP P 75 Q HD Compliant with the SMPTE292M 299M standards SD Compliant with the SMPTE259M C 272M A ITU R BT656 4 standards Accessories Shoulder Strap Front Audio Level control knob Control knob mounting screw x 1 CD ROM Operating Instructions Weight and dimentions when shown are approximately Specifications are subject to change without notice 196 Specifications SDI IN BNC x1 0 8 VP P 75 Q HD SD SDI input board AJ YA350AG option is attached HD Compliant with the SMPTE292M 299M standards SD Compliant with the SMPTE259M C 272M A ITU R BT656 4 standards AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 MIC IN WIRELESS IN XLR x 2 3 pins LINE MIC and MIC 48 V switch selectable LINE 4 dBu 3 dBu O dBu 4 dBu selectable with menu MIC 60 dBu 60 dBu 50 dBu selectable with menu MIC 48V Compatible with 48V phantom power supply 60 dBu 60 dBu 50 dBu selectable with menu XLR x 1 5 pins 48 V phantom ON OFF selectabl
98. E i ob oo o D a oO N A XK Information indication LOOP Stays illuminated in LOOP REC mode For information about the LOOP REC mode see Loop Recording page 37 OP SLOT Remains illuminated when a video encoder card is operated in the optional slot Time code indication NDF Stays illuminated when the time code is in non drop frame mode DF Stays illuminated when the time code is in drop frame mode SLAVE Stays illuminated when the time code is externally locked HOLD Stays illuminated when the time code generator reader value is frozen CTL Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at CTL to display the CTL count TCG Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at TC or UB to display the TC or UB generator value TC Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at TC or UB to display the TC or UB reader value VTCG Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB to display the VIUB generator value VTC Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB to display the VIUB reader value TIME Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB to display the real time hour minute and second DATE Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB to display the real time date No Indication The CTL VTCG TIME and DATE stay off when the DISPLAY switch is positioned a
99. E 05 06 07 08 Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy Confirmation of the CAC operation status When the MENU is not displayed on the VF screen press the mode check switch If letters of the CAC are indicated at the left top of the viewfinder screen the CAC is operating properly If the letters of CAC are not indicated the CAC is not operat ing Open VF INDICATOR2 MENU on the VF MENU screen and turn On the CAC indication and then the letters of CAC are indicated in the left top of the viewfinder screen 601 AVC I 1080 100 CAC 3 2K 1A P 0dB 97 To read the CAC FILE from an SD memory card 7 Select YES using the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button The CAC FILE for the lens selected in step 4 is recorded in memory on the unit If EMPTY is selected in MEM STORE NO EMPTY 1 2 at this time data are recorded in available space of the CAC FILE numbers on the unit If 1 is selected the data will overwrite the contents of CAC FILE No 1 1 Insert the SD memory card with the CAC FILE downloaded from our support website For downloading refer to the following URL https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av Open the lt CAC FILE CARD READ gt screen from the FILE page via the menu operation Select TITLE READ using the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button The lens product number is indicated in the TITLE col umn gt lt CAC FILE C
100. FF 1 OVR ON OFF S BLK OFF B GAMMA ON OFF AUDIO CH1 AUDIO CH2 REC SW Y GET ON RET SW SLOT SEL PRE REC USB HOST DEVICE OFF DRS ON OFF ASSIST ON OFF C TEMP ND This appears when the ND filter setting has been selected EXTENDER ON OFF Lens extender has been turned on or off IRIS xx F x x Indicated when the iris override correction value is to be changed Low light warning LOW LIGHT Brightness too low Y GET value KKK kK With the Y GET ON setting the output brightness level near the center marker is displayed as MARKER indication MKR A B OFF Current marker type 12 User button INH User buttons disabled Selected S GAIN Selected DS GAIN Whether S IRIS is ON or OFF Iris override can be set the IRIS OVERRIDE setting is ON Status of SUPER BLACK ON or OFF When it is ON the set value is also indicated Status of BLACK GAMMA shade correction for the black level ON or OFF Input signal to be recorded on Audio Channel 1 has been switched Input signal to be recorded on Audio Channel 2 has been switched USER button acts as REC switch Y GET function ON USER button acts as RET switch Switch that changes the target card is set Indicates that PRE RECORDING mode has been switched ON or OFF USB action status has been switched Indicates whether the dynamic range stretcher function is ON or OFF Indicates whether the focus assist function is ON or OFF Indicates the mode for c
101. G dial button lt AREA SETTING gt AREA SELECT PAL MBAREA SET J 4 Move the cursor arrow to Jf AREA SET by turning the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial but ton The following window appears AREA SET J 5 Move the arrow gt to YES and press the JOG dial but ton The settings selected in Step 3 above are reflected in FACTORY and CURRENT DATA on the screen 6 Turn off the power supply once and then turn on it again Notes The settings are not saved unless SET is executed even if NTSC NTSC J or PAL is selected in the AREA SELECT When AREA SELECT is revised the I AREA SET blinks When these items are set when the unit is used for the first time only the following 8 items are revised When the other settings of the unit are set in MAIN MENU the MENU setting values for items other than the following 8 are ones that were set at the factory Factory ntsc NTSC J PAL settings SYSTEM 1080 1080 1080 MODE 59 941 59 941 59 94 1080 501 Nabe 60i 60i 60i 50i SET UP 7 5 7 5 0 0 D C SET UP 2 7 5 7 5 0 0 iri EN 4dB 4dB 4dB OdB LO OUT 44dB 4dB44dB OB HEAD ROOM 20dB 20dB 20dB 18dB a R American American Japanese American ASH English English For Japan English Not Not ENDLISH Not LANGUAGE displayed displayed JAPANESE displayed DATA FORMAT MDY MDY YMD DMY 1 SET UP o
102. K When 3200K 5600K was selected in SPURS 4 eee TEMP PRE SEL SW RC CHECK R REVIEW For specifying what the camera recorder Since the range of color temperatures SW PLAY does when the REC check button on the that can be set will vary with the CC remote control unit is pressed filter position a numerical value can R REVIEW The camera recorder not be changed even if the color tem performs rec review perature is changed when a high color PLAY The camera recorder temperature is set clulFIR performs playback i fa Gal tL AWB A TEMP 2300K For setting the color temperature when 2 the WHITE BAL switch is set to the A 3200K position WHITE BALANCE MODE 5000K If the automatic adjustment of white balance is executed in the A position the color temperature at that time is Items Adjustable Remarks memorized in the position of the WHITE Data Saved Range BAL switch A If the white balance has FILTER INH JON For selecting independently whether been automatically adjusted or the CC OFF memory data for white balance Ach filter has been switched then up to Bch is retained or not for the respective Ea 9000K may be indicated CC filters ON Regardless of the CC filter data for AWBRTENT 2300K Fa re Crea aap ae n the memories 2 memories for Ach 3200K ne and Bch is retained eee position OFF The memory data 8 memories for 8000K If the automatic adjustment of white Ach and Bch is retained for the balance is executed in the B posi
103. LENS FILE gt screen from the FILE page Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the FILE NO item Press the JOG dial button and the file number will flash Turn the JOG dial button to select the file 1 to 8 to be read lt LENS FILE gt gt FILE NO P READ AE E E b WRITE RESET ALL TITLE oND 1 2 3 4 Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number 5 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the READ item lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO Mal gt READ WRITE RESET ALL TITLE DIAM 1 2 3 4 94 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data 6 When the JOG dial button is pressed the following message appears READ ae SENTIS a s 7 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to YES and press the JOG dial button The recorded correction values for the white shading flare and RB gain offset are read Press the MENU button The setting menu is cleared and the displays showing the unit s current statuses appear at the top and bottom of the viewfinder screen E write in and read out the lens file to from the SD memory card The contents of the eight lens files stored in the unit s internal memory can be saved onto an SD memory card as card files under a single title A total of eight titles can be saved on an SD memory card Furthermore the eight lens files saved under on
104. Lens 1 Raise the lens clamping lever and remove the mount cap Mount Cap 2 To mount the lens align the indentation at the top center of the lens mount with the center mark of the lens 4 Secure the cable through the cable clamp and plug it into the LENS connector LENS Connector 5 Adjust the lens flange back Notes Please refer to the lens instruction manual for guidance on lens handling When the lens is removed install the mount cap to protect the device E Adjusting the Lens Flange Back If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and wide angle positions during zoom operations adjust the flange back distance from the lens mounting surface to the image formation surface Once adjusted the flange back does not need to be re adjusted as long as the same lens is mounted on the camera Note Please also refer to the lens instruction manual for directions on adjustment and locations of individual lens parts uoleiedaid 1 Mount the lens on the camera Make sure you connect the lens cable 2 Set the lens iris to manual and fully open the iris Approximately 3m we 3 Place the flange back adjustment chart about 3 m from the lens and adjust the lighting on the chart to obtain an appropriate video output level If the video level is too high use the filters or the shutter 4 Loosen the F f Flange focus ring clamping screw Note F b Flange back may be i
105. MMENDED ACCESSORIES ONLY CAUTIONS In order to maintain adequate ventilation do not install or place this unit in a bookcase built in cabinet or any other confined space To prevent risk of electric shock or fire hazard due to overheating ensure that curtains and any other materials do not obstruct the ventilation CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a_ residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The user may find the booklet Something
106. N To retain the values set in the R GAIN AWB B 200 For setting the Rch gain when the respective items of R PEDESTAL WHITE BAL switch is in the B position G PEDESTAL and B PEDESTAL 000 if the remote control unit is OFF The pedestal levels of the Rch 4200 connected settings made from the the Gch and the Bch are set to menu are disabled The set value is slclulfFl 0 S C U F R displayed R FLARE 100 For adjusting the flare level of the Rch B GAIN AWB B 200 For setting the Bch gain when the f Adjustment values in this item are WHITE BAL switch is in the B position 000 added to the flare adjustment value that 000 if the remote control unit is 100 is adjusted on lt LENS FILE ADJ gt 200 connected settings made from the screen menu are disabled The set value is if the remote control unit is SIC U FIR displayed connected settings made from the AWBAGAIN JON For setting the values of the Rch gain Aol oe disabled ihe set value 15 OFFSET OFF and the Bch gain when the auto white S C U F R isplayed balance is executed as the WHITE BAL G FLARE 100 For adjusting the flare level of the Gch switch is in the A position Adjustment values in this item are ON To retain the values set in the 000 added to the flare adjustment value that items of R GAIN AWB A and B 4100 is adjusted on lt LENS FILE ADJ gt GAIN AWB A screen OFF The values of the Rch gain and if the remote control unit is the Bch gain is set to 0
107. NG Insert an SD memory card NO CARD No SD memory card is inserted DELETE NG It is assumed that the SD ERROR memory card is defective Data cannot be deleted Replace the card DELETE NG Eject the SD memory card and WRITE PROTECT The SD card is write protected release write protection DELETE NG CANNOT ACCESS It is impossible to access the data It is impossible to access the SD memory card while the card is in use After completion of the respective operations perform the read operation again DELETE NG NO FILE No file is available Select the FILE NO containing astigmatism files and perform the delete operation 7 Move the arrow cursor to YES by turning the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button When the write operation is completed the following mes sage is displayed When CAC FILE does not operate properly The following error messages are displayed in the viewfinder when CAC does not operate properly or CAC files cannot be read properly Error message Meanings Measures FILE MEMORY FULL When the CAC FILE is read from the SD memory card to memory in the unit in EMPTY mode the built in memory is full Read the CAC FILE in a mode other than EMPTY mode CAC FILE DATA NOT FOUND When the CAC function is set to ON and no CAC FILE applicable to the connected lens is available This is displayed when the power of the un
108. ODE MEM THUMBNAIL OUT OFF Notes When closing the LCD monitor make sure that it is shut tight in an environment with sudden temperature changes condensation may form on the liquid crystal surface of the monitor If this happens wipe off the moisture with a soft dry cloth When the camera recorder is very cold the video image in the LCD monitor will appear slightly darker immediately after the power is turned on Once the interior of the camera recorder warms up the LCD monitor delivers normal brightness Self portrait Shooting When shooting with the LCD display angled 180 degrees towards the lens you can set the menu option SELF SHOOT to MIRROR to horizontally flip the video image on the LCD display and allow you to view a mirror image while shooting Note that only the video image on the LCD monitor is horizontally flipped not the actual video being recorded The menu option SELF SHOOT can be found in the lt LCD MONITOR gt screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page Notes When the LCD monitor is angled 180 degrees towards you with the menu option SELF SHOOT to MIRROR the LCD monitor does not provide the same status indication as the viewfinder regardless of the setting for the menu option LCD MON CHAR Return signals from the GENLOCK IN connector cannot be output to the LCD monitor When the OUTPUT SEL switch is positioned to CAM in the HD mode playback c
109. P 24P Over 60i 24P Over 60i not out 480 24PA 24PA Over 60i 24PA Over 60i X a 4 5 put os 59 94 DVCPRO50 1394 50i 50i 480i 4ci 525i 4c 525i 525i VIDEO 60i 60i i SDI 60i 60i optional 50i 50i 50i 1080i Playback AM S 25P 25P Over 50i 25P Over 50i not output 576 50i DVCPRO50 1394 Z Tsoi 50i 576i 4ch 4 4 625i 4ch 625i 625i VIDEO 50i 50i SDI 50i 50i optional 1 The time code user bits and UMID are recorded 2 3 or user bits are not output 4 30P Over 60i This operates in the interlace mode in 60 fields This processes video signals of the same time into the odd field and the even field and records them on tape as video signals in the respective fields The SD SDI output is maintained 44 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Multi Format The time code user bits and UMID selectable between ON and OFF are output The EDH selectable between ON and OFF and UMID selectable between ON and OFF are output The time code Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance To record high quality video with the unit the black and white balances must be adjusted according to conditions For higher quality it is recommended that the adjustments should be made in this order AWB white balance adjustment ABB black balance adjustment gt AWB white balance adjustment E Adjusting the White Balance Whenever light conditions change the white balance must
110. PEED Items Adjustable R inarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range ID1 x Setting 1 for the CAMERA ID recorded SYNCHRO JON Allocate SYNCHRO SCAN as a shutter on color bars Up to 10 characters are SCAN OFF speed selectable by the shutter switch IclulFl allowed for this setting clulFl ID2 x Setting 2 for the CAMERA ID recorded POSITION1 JON Allocate the shutter speed set by on color bars Up to 10 characters are OFF POSITION1 SELECT in the lt SHUTTER IC U F allowed for this setting SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed D3 FEEF Setting 3 for the CAMERA ID recorded C u F selectable by theshutter switch on color bars Up to 10 characters are POSITION2 ON Allocate the shutter speed set by ICIU F allowed for this setting OFF POSITION2 SELECT in the lt SHUTTER SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed ICIU F selectable by the shutter switch Note POSTON TON Allocate the shutter speed set by This setting is canceled when READ FACTORY DATA is OFF POSITION3 SELECT in the lt SHUTTER selected SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed ClU F selectable by the shutter switch POSITION4 JON Allocate the shutter speed set by OFF POSITION4 SELECT in the lt SHUTTER SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed ICIU F selectable by the shutter switch POSITIONS ON Allocate the shutter speed set by OFF POSITIONS SELECT in the lt SHUTTER SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed ICIU E select
111. Panasonic Operating Instructions Memory Card Camera Recorder Model No AJ H PX3000G FaH Before operating this product please read the insructions carefully and save this manual for future use F0807T0 F D ENGLISH Printed in Japan VQT1K82 Read this first CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER TO SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance service instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD KEEP THIS EQUIPMENT AWAY FROM ALL LIQUIDS USE AND STORE ONLY IN LOCATIONS WHICH ARE NOT EXPOSED TO THE RISK OF DRIPPING OR SPLASHING LIQUIDS AND DO NOT PLACE ANY LIQUID CONTAINERS ON TOP OF THE EQUIPMENT CAUTIONS TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD AND ANNOYING INTERFERENCE USE THE RECO
112. R G 63 For performing the linear matrix S C U F R 63 adjustment red green R Mg 63 For performing the color est SAT 00 saturationcorrection between red and S C U F R 63 magenta MATRIX R B 63 For performing the linear matrix SIC U F R 63 og adjustment red blue Mg 63 For performing the color aa SAT 00 saturationcorrection of magenta S C U F R 63 e MATRIX G R 63 For performing the linear matrix SIC U F R 63 ot adjustment green red Mg B 63 For performing the color saturation al SAT 00 correction between magenta and blue S C U F R 63 Re MATRIXG B 63 For performing the linear matrix C U F R 63 p i adjustment green blue B 63 For performing the color saturation z SAT correction of blue D C U F R 63 2 c MATRIX B R_ 63 For performing the linear matrix S C U F R 63 a adjustment blue red B Cy 63 For performing the color saturation SAT 00 correction between blue and cyan S C U F R 63 con MATRIX B G 63 For performing the linear matrix S C U F R 63 Lot adjustment blue green Cy 63 For performing the color saturation ek SAT correction of cyan S C U F R 63 00 MLMATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table S C U F R 63 TABLE A when the GAIN switch is in the L Cy G 63 For performing the color saturation s c u F R B position SAT on correction between cyan and green UU mM MATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction tab
113. R button at the lens The REC lamp in the viewfinder goes out Operation Buttons During recording all operation buttons REW FF PLAY PAUSE STOP are disabled 34 Recording and Playback Basic Procedures Normal Recording REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens starts recording of video and sound on the P2 card A cluster of data that consists of video and sound generated through a shooting action together with such added information as meta data is called a clip Normal Recording and Native Recording In the unit the camera s recording method is selectable between the Native recording method with the frame rate unchanged and the normal recording method pulling the frame rate down to 59 94 or 50 frames Normal recording Pull down recording Images at 24P 23 98 referred to as 24P are pulled down in 2 3 mode Images at 30P 29 97 referred to as 30P are pulled down in 2 2 mode and recorded as 59 94i referred to as 60i Images at 25P are recorded as 50i with 2 2 pulled down 24PA 2 3 3 2 Advanced Pull down is supported as well AVC Intra does not support pull down recording Example of 24P Over 60i Camera recording 2 3 pull down 4 recording A Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De Native recoding This recording method extracts and records effective frames at the frame rates of the AVC Intra recording in 1080i Even in Native recording
114. R switch POSITION1 ON POSITION2 ON POSON TON 2 Once more press the SHUTTER switch towards POSITIONS N SEL Repeat this switchover until the desired mode or speed appears in the viewfinder screen If all modes and speeds are available the display changes in the following order NORMAL mode lt SHUTTER SELECT gt i POSITION1 POSITION2 POSITION3 POSITION4 POSITIONS POSITIONG POSITIONI SEL 1 100 POSITION2 SEL 17120 SYNCHRO POSITION3 SEL 1 250 SCAN mode POSITIONS SEL 1 500 POSITIONS SEL 171000 POSITION6 SEL 172000 r Viewfinder displays relating to the shutter See Viewfinder Screen Status Displays page 68 B Placing the Camera recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN Mode To place the camera recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN mode follow the steps below 1 Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at ON towards SEL to place the camera recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN mode 2 In the SYNCHRO SCAN mode it is possible to change the shutter speed continuously by operating the SYNCHRO SCAN buttons SHUTTER switch 3 The shutter speed display in synchro scan mode is switchable between second indication and angle indication For details refer to SYNCHRO SCAN DISP page 172 5Q Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the Electronic Shutter Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons The USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 buttons can be assigned use
115. RDING enabled TOTAL REC TIME 19m59s06f OFF PRE RECORDING disabled Note Specify the PRE RECORDING time by IelulFl using the menu option PRE REC TIME 1 This variable range is the numerical values for 59 94 Hz For 50 Hz the frame rate is up to 24f The frame rate is up to 23f in 24PN Native mode The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 161 OUTPUT SEL DOWNCON SETTING Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks DataSaved Range Data Saved Range OUTPUT ITEM MENU ONLY Set the character contents DOWNCON SQUEEZ For setting the mode of the down TC superimposed onto the output signals MODE LT BOX converter output signals STATUS for the VIDEO OUT connector Analog S CROP or SDI and MON OUT connector Iclulel r eter Whon the misni DETAIL ON For setting the detail function for the characters are superimposed No OFF down converter output signals ON OFF display appears when other characters The down converter output signals are superimposed contain detailed components that are TC Display the time code Displays the set during HD signal processing In this menu when menu characters are setting these signals overlap th
116. RDING mode is switched by pressing the USER switch SD If a video encoder card AJ YAX800G optional accessory is attached the Xxxh xxm remaining free space on the SD Memory card will be displayed when the MODE CHECK button is pressed during proxy recording END END is displayed when there is no remaining free space 30 FILM REC F Displayed when FILM REC is selected in GAMMA MODE SEL 74 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays P2 Card Remaining Free Space capacity Indication LOOP REC mode the P2 card slots are indicated in minutes Example 20 40 Status of Recording Menu option 5 P2 card remaining free space 6 P2 card remaining free space unit status P2 CARD REMAIN indication indication during MODE CHECK Under normal Other than LOOP TOTAL The total remaining free space of all Not provided conditions REC mode P2 cards loaded in the P2 card slots is indicated in minutes Example 30min ONE CARD The number of the P2 card slot Not provided holding the target P2 card together with that card s remaining free space indicated in minutes Example J 8min OFF Not provided Not provided LOOP REC mode TOTAL ONE CARD Indicated as LOOP Not provided OFF Not provided Not provided During MODE Other than LOOP TOTAL ONE CARD The total remaining free space and The number of the P2 card slot CHECK REC mode OFF capacities of all P2 cards loaded in holding
117. REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens and returns to ONE SHOT pause mode 4 Press the STOP button The video and sound stored in memory are generated as one clip d iREC time iREC STOP D start Axis start button gt Real time video y y Som A BI m m gt iti iti REC TIME Content on P2 card Previous clip ATs Recording m time t C One clip J To check the previous recording during a pause Press the RET button at the lens to put the AJ HPX3000 into REC REVIEW mode ONE SHOT operation continues after the REC REVIEW To divide clips or to change the P2 card used for recording Even during ONE SHOT mode clips will not be generated on the P2 card until the STOP button is pressed Press the STOP button and stop ONE SHOT mode operation To stop the ONE SHOT mode of INTERVAL REC Set the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE to OFP When INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to OFF the mode returns to ordinary recording mode if the POWER switch of the unit is turned OFF If INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to ON the ONE SHOT mode will not change even if the POWER switch is turned OFF During INTERVAL REC mode general notes Sound By selecting ON OFF for the menu option AUDIO REC in the REC FUNCTION screen it is possible to specify whether or not sound will be recorded during interval recording Record Playback Buttons During interval recording all operation buttons other
118. RONT Input Channel 1 TEST TONE OFF Select the test signal W L OFF The microphone low cut filter is NORMAL OFF Disable test tone output REAR disabled for any input ALWAYS NORMAL Test tone signals are output to FRONT The microphone low cut filter is CHSEL all of Channels 1 4 when the enabled when the front OUTPUT AUTO KNEE microphone is selected selector switch has been W L The microphone low cut filter is switched to BARS and CH1 of enabled only when the wireless the AUDIO IN switch has been microphone is selected switched to FRONT REAR The microphone low cut filter is ALWAYS Test tone signals are always enabled only when the rear output to all of Channels 1 4 clulFl microphone is selected when the OUTPUT AUTO MIC LOWCUT OFF Select the microphone low cut filter for KNEE selector switch nee been switched to BARS CH2 FRONT Input Channel 2 S W L OFF The microphone low cut filter is CHISELS COMPUT Stesti tones ao th i channels where the AUDIO IN REAR disabled for any input 5 FRONT The microphone low cut filter is SNCI Ori or CRETE eat FRONT when OUTPUT AUTO enabled when the front SA microphone is selected KNEE selector switch is set to W L The microphone low cut filter is CIUIF BARS Ne ESI tone le i output to CH3 and CH4 enabled only when the wireless microphone is selected REAR The microphone low cut filter is Note enabled only when the rear The frequency characteristics when the micro cut fil
119. S ON LED ON FUNCTION ON AUDIO ON P ON IND ON 68 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays E Selecting Viewfinder Display Information To select the information items you want to have displayed in the viewfinder screen go to the lt VF INDICATOR1 gt lt VF INDICATOR2 gt and lt VF INDICATOR3 gt screens from the VF page and turn on or off the appropriate options or specify desired values For directions on setting the options see Setting Menu Options page 157 lt VF INDICATORI gt EXTENDER ON SHUTTER ON FILTER ON WHITE ON GAIN ON IRIS S IRIS CAMERA ID BAR ID POSITION UPPER L DATE TIME OFF ZOOM LVL ON COLOR TEMP ON SYSTEM MODE ON CAMERA MODE ON I Viewfinder Status Indication Layout lt VF INDICATOR2 gt CAC OFF FILM REC MODE OFF lt VF INDICATOR gt P2CARD REMAIN ON BATTERY ON AUDIO LVL ON TC ON COLOR BAR OFF TC OFF SYSTEM INFO NORMAL SAVE LED SAVE REC STATUS OFF PROXY REC HORF The indications are arranged as illustrated below 4 n l Ai 4 11080 1 2880 fee 1stcace GAIN USER SW GAIN LOW 0 S GAIN 30736 10 MID 6 HIGH 12 DS GAIN 6171017121 1517 207 1H J UM S GAIN 301B yg 14 Tlut audio CHI U2 D8 GXIX 127 REC WARNING F 30 16 EX DRS TCG 00 00 00 00 MA 17 3 2 K A 24 BS E D alae Cy ii 28 19 21
120. SD memory card are displayed on the lt LENS FILE CARD R W gt screen but the titles of the lens files contained in the card files are not shown on this screen To display these titles load the files and check the titles on the lt LENS FILE gt screen The lens files in the unit s internal memory will be rewritten as the loaded lens files at this time For this reason save the lens files in the internal memory onto the SD memory card first to back them up before loading them on the SD memory card 96 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Chromatic Aberration Compensation CAC CAC is a function that automatically corrects registration errors mainly caused by slight chromatic aberration which cannot be corrected with lenses and minimizes color weepage on the images What is the chromatic aberration Chromatic aberration means magnification ratio chromatic aberration Magnification ratio chromatic aberration is caused by differences in the in red R green G and blue B refractive indexes of a lens The lens itself corrects chro matic aberration but the astigmatism remains in the sur rounding area in particular The zooming ratio iris and focal distance involves complicated chromatic aberration phenom ena in a zoom lens Images have registration errors Chromatic aberration compensation function To correct the chromatic aberration record the chromatic aberration characteristics of the lens for the
121. SELECT switch is synchronised with the audio signal output to the speakers and earphones and from the AUDIO OUT connector CH1 3 ST Signal on Audio Channel 1 or 3 is output Stereo audio signals on Audio Channels 1 and 2 or Audio Channels 3 or 4 are output The stereo signals can be changed to mixed signals using a menu option CH2 4 Signal on Audio Channel 2 or 4 is output MONITOR SELECT switch CH1 2 CH3 4 Monitor switch CH1 3 Audio Channel 1 Audio Channel 3 ST Stereo signals from Audio Channels 1 and 2 Stereo signals from Audio Channels 3 and 4 CH2 4 Audio Channel 2 Audio Channel 4 14 15 Speakers The speakers output EE sound during recording and reproduced sound during playback The speakers emit an alarm sound when the warning lamp blinks and or the indicator activates When the 15 PHONES jack is connected with earphones sound from the speaker is automatically muted PHONES earphones jack mini jack This connector is designed for audio monitoring stereo earphones When earphones are connected sound from the speakers is automatically muted Both the front and rear connectors output the same sound suolouNn Jay PUL Sed You can select between stereo and mixed signal types using the menu option MONITOR SELECT This menu option can be found in the lt MIC AUDIO2 gt screen on the MAIN OPERATION page 12 MONITOR volume control
122. SYSTEM SETTING page Pa Card1 Card2 Card3__ Before LOOP REC staris E Recording starts Recording Cycle 1 Recording Cycle 2 Y Data are recorded by connecting the unrecorded sections on the P2 card in the sequence of A to B to C When the remaining recording capacity is less than 30 seconds A is deleted and data are record on C up to FULL remaining memory capacity is 0 and then new data are recorded D Notes When the LOOP REC capability is used each P2 card must have at least one minute of free space During LOOP REC the P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs for all target P2 cards illuminate in orange Note that if any of the target P2 card is removed LOOP REC stops When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to ON the viewfinder and display window both show LOOP However when only one card is inserted or when each card has less than one minute of free space the LOOP REC capability does not work even if the option LOOP REC MODE is set to ON If this is the case the indication LOOP flashes in the viewfinder and on the display window When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to ON the P2 card remaining free space indicates the minimum guaranteed recording time The minimum guaranteed recording time means the guaranteed time or length of recorded data when LOOP REC stops immediately after deleting old data During recording of IEEE1394 input or INTERVAL REC operation LOOP REC is n
123. Set the AUTO KNEE LEVEL 107 s clu F R 109 A KNEE 1 Set the AUTO KNEE response speed RESPONSE The smaller the setting value the faster 4 the response speed s c u F R 8 CHROMA OFF For setting the chroma level of the PR LEVEL 99 signals and the Ps signals 6 If this is set to OFF the color elements of 00 video signals are eliminated c U F R 40 DRS EFFECT 1 Set the compression level of the high DEPTH 2 brightness component of DRS If the 3 numerical value is larger the compression level of the high brightness sicJulF R component increases Note The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt screen The items without are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R W Please refer to SD CARD R W SELECT page 187 for more information 170 Menu Menu Description Tables BCAMERA SETTING Items Adjustable Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Remarks Data Saved Range GAMMA DELT For selecting the gamma mode DETAIL ON For switching ON OFF of the detail MODE SEL IHD DFLT This will operate as SD gamma in OFF signals SD SD mode or HD gamma in HD SIC U F IR FILMLIKE1 mode 2D LPF ON For specifying whether or not to enable FILMLIKE2 HD _ OFF or disable the 2 dimension LPF which FILMLIKE3 Video gamma
124. T Video signals output to the remote control 7 RC VIDEO GND GND of the video signals to the remote control 8 INC Not used 9 UNREG 12V DC 12 V power supply AJ RC10G Max 0 75 A 10 GND GND VF 1 UNREG 12V DC 12 V power supply AJ HVF21G About 0 35 A 2 UNREG 12V DC 12 V power supply 3 A9 0V DC 9 V power supply not used 4 VF PB GND GND for the viewfinder Ps signals 5 VF PR GND GND for the viewfinder PR signals 6 VF Y Viewfinder Y signals output 7 VF Y GND GND for the viewfinder Y signals 8 VF CLK Serial data clock pulse signals 9 VF WR Pulse signals for reading serial parallel conversion data 10 VF DATA Serial data signals for serial parallel conversion 11 UNREG GND GND 12 ZEBRA SW ON OFF of the zebra signals 13 PEAKING Control of the peaking not used 14 SPARE Standby not used 15 VF PR Viewfinder PR signal output 16 VF PB Viewfinder PB signal output 17 MARKER SW ON OFF of the marker not used 18 FRONT VR FRONT AUDIO LEVEL adjustment not used 19 VR GND GND for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL not used 20 UNREG GND GND Caution Total amount of current from the respective connectors for DC OUT REMOTE VF and LENS should not exceed 2 5 A 146 Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance Matsushita part number K1AY110JA001 Maker part number HR10A 10R 10SC 71 Hirose Denki Connector at the cable side Maker part number HR10A 10P 10P 73 Hirose Denki Matsushita part number K1AB120H00
125. TIME Select local time hours IclulFl monitor output TCG minutes seconds FRONT MIC 40dB Select the front microphone input level FRM RATE DATE Select local date and time 2 last LEVEL 50dB REGEN digits of year month date time IclulFl EXT When CAM VIDEO or REARMIC 50dB Select the rear microphone input level SDI is selected in REC CH1 LVL 60dB SIGNAL on the SYSTEM MODE fo ew screen the user bits input to the CjU F TC IN connector are recorded REARMIC _ 50dB Select the rear microphone input level When 1394 is selected the 2 CH2 LVL 60dB user bits of signals input to the IC U F DVCPRO connector are REAR LINE IN 4dB Select the rear line input level recorded i LVL 0dB If reading fails USER value is lelulF 3eB retained TCG TCG value enters UB AUDIO OUT 4dB Select the audio output level FRM RATE LVL OdB Select the shooting information e g 3dB frame rate for the camera For more IC U F information see Frame rate HEADROOM 18dB Set the headroom standard level g recorded imuserbits c U F 20dB When clips recorded in Native mode WIRELESS JON Select whether or not to enable the are played back the frame rate WARN OFF alarm to trigger for poor wireless information recorded in users bits in C U F receiver reception the VAUX range is output REGEN Read out value stored in the The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the IelulFl ak regor
126. UAL CONNECT LENS TYPE sek KKK KK SELECT FILE TYPE FORK KK CAC WARNING The operating status of CAC is displayed Displays the operating mode for CAC AUTO CAC files are selected automatically MANUAL A CAC file number is selected from the menu Displays the lens ID of the connected digital lens Displays the file name of the currently operated CAC However when the MAINTENANCE page and CAC CONTROL on the CAC ADJ screen is set to OFF the CAC file currently selected is displayed Indicates that the CAC operation is in stop state Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays 71 Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy related to AWB ABB and switch settings AWB A OK K AWB B OK K AWB BREAK K AWB NG COLOR TEMP LOW COLOR TEMP HIGH LEVEL OVER LOW LIGHT TIME OVER ATW MODE AWB PRESET K CHECK FILTER ABB ACTIVE ABB OK ABB BREAK ABB NG B SHD READY B SHD ACTIVE B SHD OK B SHD BREAK B SHD NG Information Item Indication Status 11 Camera Warning and AWB A ACTIVE AWB being performed on Ch A Report Area AWB B ACTIVE AWB being performed on Ch B AWB successful on Ch A AWB successful on Ch B AWB action aborted by user AWB action failed The second line indicates the status Color temperature too low Color temperature too high Brightness too high Brightness too low Action timed out This is indicated when AWB cannot be executed since
127. UN position the timecode in the SBC area will be recorded on the P2 card in accordance with the timecode of the clip recorded on the P2 card When recording the user bits input from the DVCPRO connector on the P2 card open the lt TC UB gt screen on the MAIN OPEATION page from the menu and select the EXT at UB MODE Timecode and user bits in the VAUX area When the input from the IEEE1394 interface is being received regardless of the menu setting and or the switch position on camera recorder the timecode and the user bits in the VAUX area input from the DVCPRO connector are always recorded on the P2 card Recording of UMID Unique Material Identifier information When the input from the IEEE1394 interface is being received the UMID information input from the DVCPRO connector will be recorded on the P2 card If there is no UMID information it will be generated in the unit and recorded 914 p eUJ9 X9 ULIM UOIO UUOD Connection with external device Connection through the DVCPRO connector 1 3 3 Hi External device control through DVCPRO connection The DVCPRO connector can be connected with an exter nal device for recording backup copies to control the start and stop of recording 1 When connecting the 1394 DV cable see 32 DVCPRO connector page 22 Set the 1394 CONTROL menu option on the 1394 SETTING screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page to BOTH 2 Through the 1394 CMD SEL menu option select the
128. UT SEL gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Item Variable Remarks range MONITOR OUT ON Superimpose characters on the VBS CHARA OFF output signals from the MON OUT connector ON To superimpose OFF Not to superimpose Note This does not link with the VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch E Settings of signals output from the SDI OUT IN OP connector The SDI OUT IN OP connector outputs the same signal as the SDI signal output from the VIDEO OUT connector The output signals are switched depending on the settings of the signals output from the VIDEO OUT connector refer to page 80 However when the VIDEO OUT switch is set to VBS it depends on the settings of the SYSTEM MODE of the menu Position of the SDI OUT IN OP SYSTEM MODE VIDEO OUT switch connector output signal 10g0 so 94 SDI HD SDI 59 94i 1080 50i SD SDI SD SDI VBS HD SDI 480 59 94i HD SDI SD SDI 59 94i 576 50i SD SDI SD SDI VBS SD SDI Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selection of video output signals 81 Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy Handling data Set data file configuration The unit employs 6 sets for the file data area FACTORY data The area for storing factory settings Data cannot be revised with menu operations USER data The area for storing the data set by menu operations The FACTORY data is stored as the factory setting CURRENT data The area for storing t
129. UTPUT ITEM item on the menu lt OUTPUT SEL gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page switch Item Variable Remarks range OUTPUT ITEM MENU Set the characters to be ONLY TC STATUS superimposed on the output signals from the VIDEO OUT connector MENU ONLY The menu screen is superimposed only when the menu is accessed This normally displays nothing TC Time codes are superimposed when the menu is accessed the menu screen is superimposed STATUS The characters that are the same as the characters superimposed in the viewfinder screen are superimposed When the menu is accessed the menu screen is superimposed 80 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selection of video output signals E Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector The MON OUT connector outputs down converted analog signals Set the video signals output from the MON OUT connector by using the MONITOR OUT item on the menu lt OUTPUT SEL gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Item Variable Remarks range MONITOR OUT VBS Set video signals output from the VF MON OUT connector Y VBS Analog composite signals are output VF Y signals to be output to the viewfinder is output The status screen is also superimposed Y Analog HD Y signals are output Set to superimpose characters to the VBS signals output from the MON OUT connector in the MONITOR OUT CHARA item of the menu lt OUTP
130. VELED SAVE Set the SAVE lamp function CAMERA ON For selecting ON OFF of the CAMERA PeCARD SAVE MODE OFF MODE display The lamp lights up when the SAVE IclUlFIR ON OFF switch is set to ON and the output system assigned in OPTION MODE page 160 is in the save The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the mode preset mode PROBA ake The lamp blinks in synch with the warning message when the P2 card s remaining recording capacity is C U FIR getting low 174 Menu Menu Description Tables Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range REC STATUS JON Select whether or not to enable REC OFF indication in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor during recording ON REC indication enabled OFF REC indication not enabled Note This option is useful when camera recorder is used independently When the 1394 CONTROL menu option on the 1394 SETTING screen is set to BOTH then the setting of the REC TALLY menu lelulFlr option for SYSTEM MODE is used PROXY REC JON When a video encoder card AJ OFF YAX800G optional is attached proxy recording information is displayed when recording starts ON Display indicating whether proxy recording is to be performed on the P2 card only or on both the P2 card and the SD memory card OFF Proxy recording information is not
131. W If the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to PRESET if the time code has been set or reset or if the time code has been switched from free run to Rec run it is possible to regenerate the time code as the last time code of a clip recorded on the P2 card This action requires you to preset the RET SW menu option on the SW MODE screen to R REVIEW and the REC REVIEW REGEN menu option on the TC UB screen to ON 1 Make sure the P2 card to record the data To regenerate the time code of the last recorded clip when more than one P2 card is inserted press the Thumbnail button to open the thumbnail screen 2 Be sure a P2 card is inserted for recording the clip displayed at the end of the screen and then switch the slot with the USER button assigned the SLOT SEL function so that data will be recorded on the P2 card 3 Press the RET button on the lens The message TC REGEN is displayed in the viewfinder During the next recording the time code of the last recorded clip on the card will be regenerated Notes When a card with recorded data is changed the time code of the last recorded clip on the changed P2 card will be regenerated This function is disabled during recording or free run Time code function during battery replacement Even during battery replacement the backup mechanism functions allowing the camera recorder to operate continuously If SYSTEM MODE is changed a free run time code may shift After turn
132. W CTL ON COLOR BARS SMPTE S GAIN OFF L M H DS GAIN OFF DS GAIN RC CHECK SW R REVIEW 78 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor Using the LCD Monitor 1 Turn on the POWER switch of the unit 2 Slide the OPEN button in the arrow direction to open the LCD monitor in the arrow direction 3 Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for most convenient viewing The monitor can turn up to 180 degrees towards the lens and up to 90 degrees towards you Note To prevent camera recorder failure do not allow undue force to be applied to the monitor when it is open a We a A al ON 4 The options BRIGHTNESS COLOR LEVEL and CONTRAST show respectively the brightness color level and contrast of the screen These options can be found in the lt LCD MONITOR3 gt screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page lt LCD MONI TOR gt BRIGHTNESS 0 COLOR LEVEL 0 CONTRAST bat BACKLIGHT NORMAL SELF SHOOT MI RROR 5 Through the menu option LCD MON CHAR specify whether or not the LCD should display the same characters as the viewfinder This menu option can be found in the lt OUTPUT SEL gt screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page lt OUTPUT SEL gt OUTPUT ITEM MENU ONLY MONITOR OUT VBS MONITOR OUT CHAR OFF LCD MON CHAR ON VF M
133. a Bulpsooey 104 sbuljeas pue sjuewjsnipy 87 E How to Use the User Data It is possible to transfer settings and other data to the user area of the internal memory of the unit This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup state To write data go to the lt INITIALIZE gt screen from the FILE page To read the written user data go to the lt SCENE gt screen from the FILE page To write settings data in the user area 1 Navigate the menu to the lt INITIALIZE gt screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option WRITE USER DATA lt INITIALIZE gt READ FACTORY DATA WRITE USER DATA J 3 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message WRITE ER atii J 4 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button This writes the settings data into the user area of the internal memory of the unit 5 To exit the menu press the MENU button To read written user data 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SCENE gt screen 88 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option READ USER DATA lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL oi READ WRITE RESET TEETER TITLET eee RE TITLE2 TETTETETT TITLES wee TITLE4 3 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message READ YER
134. a malfunction of this camera recorder or the P2 cards used we will not assume liability for such failure If the unit is operated continuously with the fan stopped due to a failure camera images may not be output recorded or played back properly What to remember when throwing memory cards away or transferring them to others Formatting memory cards or deleting data using the functions of the unit or a computer will merely change the file management information it will not completely erase the data on the cards When throwing these cards away or transferring them to others either physically destroy them or use a data deletion program for computers commercially available to completely erase the data Users are responsible for managing the data on their memory cards p Contents General Parts and their Functions Recording and Playback Adjustments and Settings for Recording Read this first iniaenoi iaaa aaa ian ee 2 Features Of Camera UNit ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecseessessssssssieeeeeeeeees 8 Features of Recorder player Unit cccccsseeeeeeeeecsteeeeeeeessaaeeeeees 9 Features of the Input Output Unit cc eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 11 Other featurE S heata ar a E ENA a EEEE 12 DIMENSIONS da O ea ar aaa AE a AANE A 12 Color TV Standard Settings Settings for frame frequency sseessssssssrirrsssrrrrrrsssssrrrsssssrrrreses 13 System Configuration ec cceccccceecceecee cette eeeeeeeeeee
135. aaeeeeetee 110 Connection of the remote control unit AJ RC10G ee 111 Attaching the Front Audio Level Control Knob seeeeeeeeeeees 111 Connection of the external SWitCN 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeteee 112 Thumbnail Manipulations Overview cccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeetee 113 Thumbnail SCree n 0 0 ceeeccccececscceeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeenenaaaeeeeees 114 Selecting THUMDNAIS sisa iaiia o eisene ee useaa 116 Playing back ClipS eeeeseeseessssserrrrssssrrrtssssrrirrrrtssssrrnssssserrrenns 116 Switching the Thumbnail Display ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 117 SHOU Mark oratna a a e tee eee 119 Text Memo sissies Ae as ata 119 Deleting ClpS vised seceded eek eee i aaaea Sea eaa aeaa SKEE E EEEE 121 Restoring Clips iiis siaine niet taeka a kehe rar ED SE 121 Reconnection of Incomplete ClipS eeeeeeeesesereerrreeesrrresses 122 Copying Clips E k oe ae in A ed 122 Setting of Clip Meta Data ceceee eee eeneeeeeeteeenaaeeeeeeenaaaes 123 Setting of Proxy Optional ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeesaaaes 126 Formatting a P2 Card cccccccsecee eee eeeecceeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeseentesneeeeees 126 Formatting SD memory Cards 0 eee ee eeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeettaaaeeeeees 127 Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode l a 128 Propertie Sirs aaa aimus aderare ae ented 129 Connection with external device Connection through the DVCPRO connector 133 Connectio
136. able as an optional accessory Refer to page 28 While the AJ VF20WBP 59 94 Hz E 50 Hz can also be connected you cannot view video in formats with different frequencies H User button On the side panel of the unit three user buttons USER MAIN USER1 USER2 are available Each button can be assigned the on off function for any frequently used feature selected from among the many features of the unit such as P2 card slot select Refer to page 51 Dimensions drawing Unit mm inch 137 5 3 8 318 12 1 v 12 General Other features CLN O 270 5 10 58 209 8 114 Color TV Standard Settings Settings for frame frequency The unit is delivered with the color TV standard not yet specified To revise the settings for frame frequency according to the preferred standard refer to the procedures described below 1 After connecting the unit to the power supply and then turning on the power press the MENU SW button while pressing the LIGHT SW button to open OPTION MENU Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor arrow to the AREA SELECT item on the AREA SETTING screen in OPTION MENU and the press the JOG dial button OPTION MENU OPTION AREA SETTING J 3 Select the area among NTSC NTSC J and PAL After selecting the area by turning the JOG dial button press the JO
137. able by the shutter switch POSITION6 JON Allocate the shutter speed set by OFF POSITION6 SELECT in the lt SHUTTER SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed ICIU F selectable by the shutter switch The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode 176 Menu Menu Description Tables SHUTTER SELECT Items Adjustable Romarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range POSITION1 For setting the shutter speed for POSITION5 For setting the shutter speed for SEL POSITION 1 SEL POSITION 5 1 100 1 100 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 100 59 94 Hz 1 120 1 60 50Hz 1 120 1 60 50Hz 1 250 1 250 1 500 1 500 1 1000 1 1000 1 2000 1 2000 HALF HALF 180 0deg 180 0deg 172 8deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 90 0deg C U F 45 0deg clu f 45 0deg POSITION2 For setting the shutter speed for POSITION6 For setting the shutter speed for SEL POSITION 2 SEL POSITION 6 1 100 1 100 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 100 59 94 Hz 1 120 1 60 50Hz 1 120 1 60 50Hz a 1 250 1 250 1 500 1 500 1 1000 1 1000 1 2000 1 2000 HALF HALF 180 0deg 180 0deg 172 8deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 90 0deg clu fF 45 0deg clu f 45 0deg POSITIONS For setting the shutter speed for SEL POSITION 3 1 100 1 100 59 94 Hz Note 1 120 1 60 50Hz In remote control mode when t
138. age 113 EXIT button Used to return the display to the previous state when the thumbnail menu or the property screen is displayed Parts and their Functions LCD Monitor 27 suoloun 1194 PUL Sed Viewfinder You can use any of the following viewfinders extra cost options on AJ HPX3000 HD Viewfinders AJ HVF21G selectable between 59 94 and 50 Hz SD Viewfinders AJ VF20WBP 59 94 Hz AJ VF15BP 59 94 Hz AJ VF20WBE 50 Hz and AJ VF15BE 50 Hz Use the VF TYPE menu options on the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page to adjust the appropriate settings for the viewfinder that will be used We recommend using a HD viewfinder when the camera recorder is used in HD mode or an SD viewfinder when it is used in SD mode Depending on the mode some types of video are unavailable as shown below the finder shows nothing on a black screen Mode Video Seen through HD viewfinder SD viewfinder viewfinder Video from camera O gr TE Playback O On Return video HD Y O e 1394 HD SDI input HD O o Video from camera O O sp Playback O Return video VBS e O 1394 HD SDI input SD O Each viewfinder shows return signals and 1394 and SDI input signals in the recording formats assigned to the camera recorder 1 Down converted signals 2 When the OUTPUT SEL switch of the camera recorder is set to CAM a black screen is displayed 28 Parts and their Functions V
139. ail If your unit is not set to turn on the P2 CARD ACCESS LED before removing the card ensure that PRE RECORDING have finished after stopping recording or playback f a P2 card being accessed is removed the viewfinder displays TURN POWER OFF and camera recorder gives a warning using an alarm and the WARNING LED In addition all P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs blink rapidly in green If this is the case turn the power off For more information on warning indications see Warning System page 149 If a P2 card is removed while being accessed clips on it may become irregular Check the clips and restore them if required For more information about how to restore clips see Restoring Clips page 121 f a P2 card being formatted is removed it may be not be formatted properly In this case the viewfinder displays TURN POWER OFP If this message appears turn off the power then restart camera recorder to reformat the card if a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played back the inserted P2 card is not recognised and the P2 CARD ACCESS LED for that card does not come on Card recognition starts when the playback ends Even if a P2 card is inserted in a vacant slot while recording the media may not be recognized during the following times Immediately after PRE RECORDING Immediately before or after switching from the first P2 card for recording to the second one when data are recorded on multiple car
140. al time code generator Lin oo AJ HPX3000 1st unit Settings of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item 1 AJ HPX3000 2nd unit and later Settings of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item 0 Settings of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item 0 Example 5 When an external device is locked to the time code generator of the unit Example 6 When an external device is locked to the time code generator of camera recorder which is connected in a cascade configuration Reference video signal To be connected if necessary Reference video signal To be connected if necessary orl re L a TC OUT eee i i H Settings of the TC i AJ HPX3000 1st unit VIDEO anche e Settings of the TC item 3 z J ie VIDEO SYNCRO I 0 item 1 A device that synchronizes with the TC IN input and capable to record without delay DAT etc Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy A device that synchronizes with the TC IN input and capable to record without delay such as DAT or a camera recorder Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data 63 To externally lock the time code Follow the steps below 1 Turn on the POWER switch Position the TCG switch at F RUN Position the DISPLAY switch at TC WG KN Set the menu option GENLOCK to EXT This option can be found in the lt GENLO
141. ally AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually MANUAL Set voltage manually 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the above 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu menu set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 13 8 V steps 132 V steps clu F gt clu F 5 TRIMPAC14 Pk Enable selection under BATTERY NP L7 Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT gt Enable selection gt Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR MANUAL END voltage MANUAL END voltage AUTO Set voltage automatically AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually MANUAL Set voltage manually 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 13 6 V steps 132 V steps cJu F 5 cJulF 15 HYTRON5O x Enable selection under BATTERY ENDURA7 Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT gt Enable selection gt Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR MANUAL END voltage MANUAL END voltage AUTO Set voltage automatically AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually MANUAL Set voltage manually 11 0 When MANUAL is select
142. alue in Memory A or B For more information see Adjusting the White Balance page 45 A or B 5 Gain selector switch 8 MODE CHECK button Use this switch to select video amplifier gain Each press of this button changes the screen type in according to lighting conditions under which you are the viewfinder in the following order STATUS LED shooting FUNCTION AUDIO CAC The values for L M and H can be preset using menu This does not affect the signal output from the camera options These are factory set to 0 dB for L 6 dB for M and 12 9 MARKER SELECT button dB for H This button selects the marker information indicated on the viewfinder screen It switches between two OUTPUT AUTO KNEE selector switch marker information indications which can be selected Used to select the video signals sent from the camera using a menu option Pressing this button once unit to the memory viewfinder and video monitor switches the indicated marker information from A CAM AUTO KNEE ON Marker A to B Marker B and pressing again Video being recorded through the camera is sent switches B to OFF no marker When the power is with thea to knee cifcuitactivated P AR last selected indication before power It is also possible to assign the DRS Dynamic Range For lass OHNO Soa Marker Chak Saen ee Tuneren need orient NEE Displays MARKER SELECT button function page CAM AUTO KNEE OFF 9 Video being recorded through the camera is sent in 10 SYN
143. ame rate information for camera shooting is recorded For more information see Frame rate information recorded in user bits page 58 REGEN The user bits last recorded on the current target P2 card is read and recorded as is USER EXT VITC UB MODE only The included user s value is recorded as the user bits for the VIDEO AUX area It is the same value as the user bits indicated when the option UB MODE is set to USER or EXT Inputting a user value HOLD switch Display window TCG switc CURSOR and SET buttons 1 Position the DISPLAY switch at UB 2 Position the TCG switch at SET When the left digit starts blinking you can change the value 3 Use CURSOR buttons to set the user bits button Shifts the target blinking digit to the right lt button Shifts the target blinking digit to the left A button Advances the blinking number by one digit V button Winds back the blinking number by one digit A Position the TCG at F RUN or R RUN 5 Go to the lt TC UB gt screen from the MAIN OPERATION page and set the menu option UB MODE to USER Notes When the TCG switch is positioned at SET thumbnails cannot be manipulated To confirm VICT UB press the HOLD switch to display VTCG on the display window Retaining the user bits The data set for the user bits are automatically saved and retained even if the camera recorder is turned off Adjustments and Settings fo
144. ances the blinking number by one digit V button Winds back the blinking number by one digit 5 Change the position of the TCG switch F RUN steps the time code in free run mode and R RUN set it in recording run mode Notes When the unit is in the 24P or 24PA mode time code settings are adjusted to the five frame unit For 24PN Native mode it is adjusted for counting by the four frame unit The time code cannot be set when recording in the 24P 24PA and 24PN Native formats When the TCG switch is positioned at SET thumbnails cannot be manipulated Regeneration of Time Code When the TGC switch is positioned to R RUN the time code recorded on the last frame of the last recorded clip with the latest recording date on the P2 card is read and this time code can be used again When the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to REGEN and a P2 card is removed or inserted or the target recording card is changed with the USER button for the SLOT SEL function the same time code is added to the last recorded clip on the target P2 card When there is no recorded clip the time code is recorded on the new recording target P2 card from the value generated by the TC generator built into the camera recorder The menu option FIRST TC REC can be found in the lt TC UB gt screen which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page 60 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Regeneration function using REC REVIE
145. annot be output to the LCD monitor The HD viewfinder must be used to view play back Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy 79 Selection of video output signals The unit employs the VIDEO OUT connector and the MON OUT connector as connectors for outputting video signals a Settings of signals output from VIDEO OUT connector The signal modes for outputting signals from the VIDEO OUT connector are switched with the VIDEO OUT switch HD SDI To output the HD SDI signals When the camera recorder is set to the SD mode SD SDI signals are output SD SDI To output the SD SDI signals Signals are down converted in HD mode VBS To output the composite video signals Signals are down converted in HD mode VIDEO OUT switch The signals output from the MON OUT connector or VIDEO OUT connector are switched with the OUTPUT SEL switch However the switching operation is not acknowledged during the recording operation MEM During EE such as recording video images taken by the camera are output Meanwhile signals on the P2 card are output during playback CAM The camera images are output at all times OFF No signal is output from the VIDEO OUT or MON OUT connector OUTPUT SEL switch Set the characters to be superimposed on the signals output from the VIDEO OUT connector by using the VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch and the O
146. apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Caution regarding laser beams The CCD may be damaged if it is subjected to light from a laser beam When using the camera recorder in locations where laser irradiation equipment is used be careful not to allow the laser beam to shine directly on the lens Attention Attentie Batteries are used for the main power source and memory back up in the product At the end of their useful life you should not throw them away Instead hand them in as small chemical waste NERDERLAND Voor de primaire voeding en het reservegeheugen van het apparaat wordt gebruikgemaakt van een batterij Wanneer de batterij is uitgeput mag u deze niet gewoon weggooien maar dient u deze als klein chemisch afval weg te doen TO REMOVE THE BATTERY Main Power Battery Ni Cd Ni MH Li ion Battery To detach the battery please proceed in the reverse order of the installation method described in this manual If a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used check the Operating Instructions accompanying the battery Back up Battery Lithium Battery For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end of its service life please consult your dealer PLEASE NOTE When preparing to record important images always shoot some advance test footage to verify that both pictures and sound are being recorded normally Should video or audio recording fail due to
147. ard WRITENG The card is not writable CARD FULL because it has no free space SD memory card has no free Delete unwanted files or space replace the card with a new one 13 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES To read data on an SD memory card 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt screen To select a file number 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the menu option R SELECT Then press the dial button lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt gt R SELECT IHSE READ W SELECT 1 WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ vyrrys RRR RE RRR ERE tee RE RRR RE 3 Turn the JOG dial button to select a desired number 1 8 Then press the dial button To read data on a selected file Then press the dial button When the data has been written the following message appears 4 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option READ lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt WRITE OK 14 To exit the menu press the MENU button The settings menu disappears and the status of the unit is indicated at the top and bottom of the viewfinder screen Notes The SD CARD R W SELECT screen can be used to select the type of the menu to be written on the SD memory card It is possible to overwrite the setup file on the unit with a setup file from another device Note that if the file is overwritten the origi
148. ard to a PC or when rewriting data saved on a PC to a P2 card to prevent data loss be sure to use the special P2 Viewer software Download it from the following website Compatible with the Windows Vista Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av When using regular IT tools such as Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer data to a PC follow the instructions below However be sure to use the P2 Viewer when returning data to a P2 card Transfer the corresponding CONTENTS folder and LASTCLIP TXT file together as a set Do not transfer individual files from the CONTENTS folder When copying copy the LASTCLIP TXT file at the same time as the CONTENTS folder When transferring multiple P2 cards to a PC create a folder for each P2 card to prevent clips with the same name from being overwritten Do not delete data from the P2 card Before using a P2 card be sure to format it with a P2 device Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Inc in the USA and other countries 32 Recording and Playback How to handle data recorded on P2 cards Basic Procedures This section describes the basic procedure for shooting and recording Before you embark on a shoot pre inspect your system to ensure that it works properly For directions on inspectin
149. ardless of the menu settings frame rate information is always recorded During playback the information is out put after being converted into pull down frame rate information When the UB MODE is set to FRM RATE the pull down frame rate information read out from the UB in the VAUX area is output during playback 10 For details on this item refer to Recording formats and output connector signal formats page 44 56 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data E Setting of the user bits The user bits UB to be recorded in the sub code area are selected through the menu option UB MODE The user bits VITC UB to be recorded in the VIDEO AUX area are selected through the menu option VITC UB MODE USER UB MODE only The included user value is recorded A user value is input through the display window For more information about how to input a user value see Inputting a user value page 57 The recorded user value is retained even if the power is turned off TIME The time kept by the built in clock is recorded DATE The hour digits for date and time kept by the built in clock are recorded EXT UB MODE only The user bits value input through the TC IN connector is recorded When the menu option REC SIGNAL is set to 1394 then the value is slaved to the user bits value from the DVCPRO connector The included user s value will also be this input value TCG The time code value is recorded FRM RATE The fr
150. ario L4W 2T3 905 624 5010 Panasonic de Mexico S A de C V Av angel Urraza Num 1209 Col de Valle 03100 Mexico D F 52 1 951 2127 Panasonic Puerto Rico Inc San Gabriel Industrial Park 65th Infantry Ave Km 9 5 Carolina Puerto Rico 00630 787 750 4300 Professional amp Broadcast IT Systems Business Unit Europe Panasonic AVC Systems Europe a Division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Hagenauer Str 43 65203 Wiesbaden Biebrich Deutschland Tel 49 611 235 481 2007 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd All Rights Reserved G
151. ass storage device Procedures for establishing a connection with a PC 1 Connect the USB cable to the USB 2 0 port Notes The USB 2 0 cable is not included with the camera recorder Please use a commercially available USB 2 0 cable shield with a ferrite core t is recommended that the USB cable which is within length 3 meters is used USB 2 0 port DEVICE 2 Navigate the menu to open the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Then set the PC MODE SELECT menu option to USB DEV and the PC MODE option to ON lt SYSTEM MODE gt SYSTEM MODE 1080i 59 94i REC SIGNAL CAM CAMERA MODE 60i VF TYPE HD PC MODE SELECT USB DEV PC MODE ON Note The function of the menu option USB may be assigned to a desired user button by using any one of the menu options USER MAIN SW USER1 SW or USER2 SW These options can be found in the USER SW screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page When you establish the USB connection for the first time install the accessory P2 software for AJ HPX3000 on the PC Refer to the Installation Manual for the details Notes A USB driver must be installed on the PC AJ HPX3000 is only applicable to USB 2 0 Use a personal computer that supports USB 2 0 Only one unit at a time must be connected to the PC via USB The P2 card must not be removed when it is connected via USB While a USB co
152. aster gain is set to 3dB some coloring phenomena may occur on images in very bright sections The color phenomena become more significant as the difference in the color temperature of the subject incident to the unit from 3200K becomes larger In order to suppress the coloring phenomena switch the OUTPUT AUTO KNEE switch to CAM AUTO KNEE OFF set the MANUAL item on the KNEE LEVEL screen to ON and then set a smaller value for the KNEE SLOPE item and WHITE CLIP LVL item on the KNEE LEVEL screen After executing these settings confirm that there are no coloring phenomena and then start shooting MID SETTING HIGH SETTING Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Reniarke Data Saved Range Data Saved Range mMASTER 3dB Select the master gain from 3 0 3 6 mMASTER 3dB Select the master gain from 3 0 3 6 GAIN 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 or 30qB GAIN 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 or 30dB 6dB 12dB s c u F soas s c u F soas H DTL LEVEL 00 For performing the horizontal detail H DTL LEVEL 00 For performing the horizontal detail g correction level setting 66 correction
153. ation see Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons page 51 18 31 30 SHUTTER switch Used to enable or disable the electronic shutter OFF Electronic shutter disabled ON Electronic shutter enabled SEL Used to change the speed of the electronic shutter This dial switch returns to its original position Each turn of the switch alters the shutter speed For more information see Setting the Electronic Shutter page 49 AUTO W B white black BAL switch AWB White balance is automatically adjusted When the WHITE BAL switch on the side is positioned at A or B the adjusted value is stored in the memory Note that when the switch is positioned at PRST this function does not work ABB Back balance is automatically adjusted The automatic adjustment function of the black shading can be assigned to this switch by turning on the SHD ABB SW CTL item on the lt SW MODE gt page through menu operation Refer to page 178 Note To stop automatic adjustment of the white or black balance in progress set the switch to either AWB or ABB If automatic adjustment is cancelled the value in effect before automatic adjustment will be used 18 Parts and their Functions Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section page 47 Pressing the 4 AUTO W B BAL Switch toward AWB automatically adjusts the white balance saving the adjusted v
154. ators disappear and cards are not inserted yet then add shot marks CANNOT CHANGE PERSON will be entered while the text Enter TEXT before entering PERSON Soft memo is not available keyboard CANNOT SET The entered value is incorrect Change the value suo1 2 dsu pue soueusjuley Maintenance and Inspections Warning System 153 because the P2 card contained recorded data Item Message Description Measure HDD CAPACITY Not enough space left on the hard disk There is not enough space on the connected hard FULL disk Use a new hard disk or formatted hard disk TOO MANY There are too many partitions Hard disks can handle up to 23 partitions Use a PARTITIONS new hard disk or formatted hard disk HDD The unit is not connected to a hard disk Reconnect the USB cable If the hard disk does DISCONNECTED not operate normally turn it off and turn it back on again CANNOT FORMAT The hard disk cannot be initialized Connect another hard disk drive TOO MANY Multiple devices are connected Disconnect devices turn off the unit and turn it TARGETS back on again UNKNOWN DEVICE The connected DVD drive is not compatible Disconnect devices turn off the unit and turn it CONNECTED back on again CANNOT ACCESS _ An error occurred during hard disk access Check hard disk status and connection TARGET HDD CANNOT The destination target cannot be properly Reboot the har
155. ats The table below shows the formats used to record signals from the CCD and externally input signals along with the formats for signals output from the output connectors Menu setting Recording Output VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT VBS SYSTEM REC REC CAMERA E i or P2 card HD SDI and SD SDI and MONOUT When VF When VF MODE MODE SIGNAL MODE RA ih i utpu 7 recording SDI OUT SDIOUT jand paler romero item item item item rame mode trame moqe connectors connector REMOTE HD VE SD VF connectors Video Sound Video Sound Video Sound Video 60i 60i 60i CAM 30P 30P Over 60i 30P Over 60i DVCPRO 24P 24P Over 60i 24P Over 60i 24PA 24PA Over 60i 24PA Over 60i HD 1080i 1394 60i 60i 1080 SDI s h A 2 1 2 59 94i optional 60i 60i 4ch 1080i 4ch 525i 4ch 525i 080i 525i 60i 60i 60i AM P PN Nati P i AVC 100 C 30 30PN Na ive 30P Over eoi 1080P AVC 50 24P 24PN Native 24P Over 60i 2p 60i 60i 1080i optional 50i 50i 50i AM C 25P 25P Over 50i 25P Over 50i eee 1394 50i 50i HD 1080i SDI 50i 50i 1080 50 optional 4ch 10801 4ch 625i 4ch 625i 1080i 625i CAM 50i 50i 50i AVC I 100 25P 25PN Native 25P Over 50i 1080P AVC I50 SDI 50i 50i 1080i optional 60i 60i 60i 1080i CAM 30P 30P Over 60i 30P Over 60i Playback 24
156. aybacks When playback is paused the FF button locates the beginning of the next clip while maintaining the pause mode When playback is paused the REW button locates the beginning of the current clip while maintaining the pause mode Notes The camera recorder cannot play back clips where the SYSTEM MODE differs If this is the case set the SYS TEM MODE of camera recorder to the format of the desired clip before playing it back When a P2 card has been just removed or inserted or when the power has been just turned on for playback it may take some time for camera recorder to read clip information If this is the case the viewfinder displays UPDATING If data is played back when the P2 card is being recognized the message CANNOT PLAY will be displayed f a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played back the clips on the inserted P2 card will not be played back A P2 card inserted during playback will be recognised after playback ends if you perform variable speed playback on a clip split across more than one P2 card sound may disappear for a moment This is not a fault Text Memo Function Text memos are time coded thumbnails added to any video point when a clip is being recorded or played back The Text Memo button adds text memo information at the appropriate point You can edit added text memos using the P2 viewer Through a thumbnail display you can choose and play back the t
157. be re adjusted To adjust the white balance follow the steps below 1 Set the switches as illustrated below CC ND FILTER control OUTPUT CAM AUTO W B BAL switch GAIN Under normal conditions set to 0 dB Used to perform If it is too dark an appropriate gain AWB should be set 2 Adjust the CC ND FILTER control according to the light conditions Note For examples of CC ND FILTER adjustments see Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section page 18 3 Place a white pattern at a point where the light conditions match those for the light source of the subject Then zoom in on the white pattern so that white color appears in the screen A white object cloth or wall may be used instead of a white pattern The illustration below shows the required size for the white space 4 Adjust the lens iris Notes Do not include a high intensity spot in the screen The white object must appear at the center of the screen 1 4 or more of the screen in width 1 4 or more of the screen in height 5 Flip up the AUTO W B BAL switch so that it is positioned at AWB then release it The switch returns to the central position with the white balance automatically adjusted Note To cancel automatic white balance adjustment in process the viewfinder displays AWB ACTIVE re position the AUTO W B BAL switch at AWB If automatic adjustment is cancelled the value in
158. bits it is recorded as 48 kHz 4CH 16 bits on the P2 card It is not possible to use the GENLOCK IN connector to achieve synchronization with the external reference signal In SD mode the thumbnail button is prerssed thumbnail screen are output to the viewfinder and the MON OUT and VIDEO OUT connectors The signals which are output from the VIDEO OUT connector MON OUT connector or AUDIO OUT connector differ from the actual input signals Use them for monitoring purposes The condition indicator character is not shown in the viewfinder screen and the output images The following functions are not available PRE RECORDING function Loop recording Interval recording function Proxy recording function Time code and user bits When input from the IEEE1394 interface is being received the time code and or the user bits input from the TC IN connector cannot be recorded on the P2 card When input from the IEEE1394 interface is being received the time code output from TC OUT will not be synchronized with the images output from the MON OUT connector Timecode and user bits in the subcode SBC area When input from the IEEE1394 interface is being received the timecode in the SBC area which is input from the DVCPRO connector is recorded on the P2 card by turning the TCG switch to the F RUN position and it will also be output from the TC OUT connector of camera recorder By turning the TCG switch into the R R
159. city is sufficient Please refer to P2 Card Remaining Free Space capacity Indication page 75 for information about P2 card remaining recording capacity N Set the TCG switch to R RUN Go Set the DISPLAY switch to TC A Press the camera s REC START STOP button to check the following items The P2 access LED blinks in orange The REC lamp inside the viewfinder lights up System warnings do not appear inside the viewfinder 5 Press the camera s REC START STOP button again This step confirms that the P2 access LED is on and showing orange and the REC lamp in the viewfinder is turned off 6 Using the REC button on the handle repeat Steps 4 to 5 to check the same operation Check the VTR button on the lens in the same way 7 Press the LIGHT button to check that the screen brightness in the display window increases 8 Press the PLAY button to check that the clip that has just been shot is played back from the beginning Check that recording and playback operate properly 9 When multiple P2 cards are inserted into the P2 card slots press the USER MAIN button to select the P2 card used for recording Repeat the operations in Steps 4 to 5 and 8 to check that recording and playback operate properly 2 Inspecting the Audio Level Automatic Adjustment 1 Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to AUTO 2 Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to FRONT 3 Aim the microphone connected to the MI
160. ck CTL During playback mode PLAY FF REW PLAY PAUSE playback CTL count is displayed Whenever the playback order of clips is altered clips are sorted by shooting dates previous playback CTL count is disabled The first frame of the first clip is used as a reference value for recalculation and the new playback CTL count is displayed Example D First frame Current value Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 03 00 00 Delete Clip 2 Current value v V Clip 1 Clip 3 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 Ne A The playback order of clips is altered when either of the following occurs Clips are deleted copied or restored or the P2 card is formatted The thumbnail display is switched for more information see Switching the Thumbnail Display page 117 A P2 card is inserted or removed The reference value value of the first frame of the first clip is changed when either of the following occurs The power is turned on the first frame becomes 0 When the playback CTL count is reset the current playback position is set as O and the previous reference value becomes a negative value Example gt First frame 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 03 00 00 Reset First frame gt Current value Y Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 00 03 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 Notes f the RESET button is pressed while the playback
161. cording continues Warning tone It does not sound warning The battery is about to run out description Recording playback Continues to operate operation Countermeasures Replace the battery as required 11 P2 Card Nearly Full Warning The fan is at rest because something is description wrong with it If the camera recorder operates with the fan Recording stopped then the temperature inside rises playback While the camera recorder continues to operation operate clips may not be recorded or played back properly Immediately stop using the camera recorder Countermeasures and consult your distributor Display window indication One of the bars for remaining MEDIA capacity starts blinking WARNING lamp Blinks once per second while recording continues Tally lamp Blinks once per second while recording continues Viewfinder The P2 card remaining capacity indicator blinks Warning tone Beeps once per second while recording continues Warning The total remaining capacity of all the P2 description cards is two minutes or less Recording playback Continues to operate operation Co ht rmeas res Replace the cards If there is an empty card slot insert a new card suo1 2 dsu pue soueusjuley Maintenance and Inspections Warning System 151 i Error Codes The following error codes are displayed i
162. creen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Use the cursor and SET button to select incomplete clips to reconnect Usually thumbnails of incomplete clips clips with B marker are displayed in line 3 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION RE CONNECTION from the thumbnail menu 4 The confirmation window appears Use the cursor buttons and SET button to select YES Notes e I indication stays illuminated until all the incomplete clips that comprise the original clip are reconnected The incomplete clips that were produced by removing the P2 card during LOOP REC cannot be connected unless all clips comprising the original clip are available Copying Clips Selected clips can be copied to the P2 card or SD memory card in the desired slot 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the desired clip and press the SET button 3 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION COPY from the thumbnail menu Select Slot 1 5 or SD memory card as the destination 2 THUMBNAIL DELETE FORMAT REPAIR CLIP RE CONNECTION PROPERTY META DATA 4 The confirmation window appears Use the cursor buttons and SET button to select YES PROPERTY META DATA Notes Do not turn off the power or remove a P2 card while data is being copied Doing so may cause the P2 card to fail If you should accidentally perform
163. d by a USB conversion cable may not be recognized When copying data a hard disc drive must have sufficient free space Do not remove the cable or the target P2 card or turn off the camera recorder or hard disc drive during formatting or copying Doing so requires the camera recorder and the hard disc drive to be reactivated Since hard disc drives are high precision devices there is a high possibility that they may become incapable of writing data depending on the conditions of use Take note that we will not be liable for loss of data caused by failed hard disc drives or any other problem as well as direct or indirect damages resulting from the loss of data We do not guarantee that hard disc drives will operate properly with the camera recorder or that the data on them will be properly retained if data copied to them from the camera recorder has been replaced with other data using a PC By using the drive mount converter distributed on the following URL the hard disk drive can be mounted in the designated folder when connected https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av 140 Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port Connection using the SDI IN connector when AJ YA350AG attached 1 Confirm that the HD SD SDI input board AJ YA350AG optional accessory is attached to the unit and that the wires are connected properly For details refer to the installation manual f
164. d disk or connect a different hard USB HOST RECOGNIZE recognized disk MODE HDD CANNOT ACCESS _ An error occurred during P2 card access Check P2 card CARD MISMATCH Copying cannot be made because the Use a P2 card with appropriate capacity COMPONENT destination card is in the wrong format P2 CARD IS The P2 card is not formatted Use a formatted P2 card UNFORMATTED CARD IS EMPTY The P2 selected for copying is empty Copying is not performed since the card is empty CANNOT COPY VERIFICATION The compare check after copying failed Copy the data again FAILED PLEASE FORMAT This warning indicates that data could not be You cannot copy to a P2 card that contains data P2 CARD imported from a hard disk to a P2 card Format the card on a P2 device and copy again 1 54 Maintenance and Inspections Warning System Menu Configuration MENU USER MENU MAIN MENU SYSTEM SETTING SYSTEM MODE OPTION MODE PAINT RB GAIN CONTROL REC FUNCTION OPTION MENU m RGB BLACK CONTROL OUTPUT SEL MATRIX DOWNCON SETTING OPTION IL COLOR CORRECTION LCD MONITOR L AREA SETTING LOW SETTING GENLOCK MID SETTING L 1394 SETTING HIGH SETTING ADDITIONAL DTL SKIN TONE DTL L KNEE LEVEL GAMMA z L CAMERA SETTING D VF VF DISPLAY g VF MARKER CAM OPERATION CAMERA ID WFUSER
165. data and proxy recording optional lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt Use the unit by inserting an SD memory card that is compliant with the SD standard or the SDHC standard MultiMediaCards cannot be used Bear in mind that taking pictures may no longer be possible if you do use them If you intend to use miniSD cards in camera recorder always install the adapter specially designed for miniSD cards The unit will not work properly if only the miniSD card adapter is installed Make sure that the card has been installed in the adapter before using it Use of Panasonic s SD memory cards and miniSD cards is recommended Be sure to format cards using camera recorder To format SD memory cards using a_ personal computer download the dedicated software from the support site Any SD memory card with the following capacities 8 MB to 2 GB and any 4 GB SDHC memory card can be used with the unit 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1GB 2GB 4GB SDHC To record proxy optional use an SD memory card with a capacity of 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB or 2 GB labeled High Speed or use a 4 GB SDHC memory card For the latest information not available in the operating Instructions visit the P2 Support Desk at the following Web sites https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av The SDHC card conforms to a new standard for memory cards with a large capacity of more than 2 GB which was establ
166. data beforehand On how the time data is set see Setting Time Data page 55 1 EJECT button Turn on the POWER switch wr EA S m f e ae 7 A The card must be inserted with the logo right way up 4 Tilt up the popped up EJECT button to lock in the P2 card POWER ON ss P2 CARD 2 While pressing down the slide lock button slide the o slide out door to the left AA The door opens S Ni g lt 4 Slide lock 5 Insert a P2 card into camera recorder The P2 CARD Ry f puto ACCESS LED for the appropriate slot indicates the a status of the P2 card For how the P2 card status is indicated see P2 Slide out door CARD ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards page 31 6 Close the slide out door Note Do not leave the slide out door open when moving camera recorder 30 Recording and Playback P2 Cards Removing P2 Cards 1 While pressing down the slide lock button move the slide out door to the left The door opens Tilt down the EJECT button Then depress the EJECT button to release the P2 card so that you can remove it a B Depress the tilted down EJECT button to release the P2 card Tilt down the EJECT button Notes After insertion do not remove the P2 card while it is being accessed or recognized the P2 card access LED flashes orange or the P2 card may f
167. de section of the HD format EN display window indicates the Incorrect audio signals are being input to the Continues with no sound appropriate error code that 1394 E 87 Pprop DVCPRO connector blinks every two seconds No signal is supplied to the DVCPRO While the recording mode connector continues no data is recorded on 1394 E 90 cards unless the abnormal condition is corrected If an error has occurred before recording then recording does not start The DVCPRO connector is not properly No recording in 1394 input mode 1394 E 92 connected The viewfinder indicates the can be performed message 1394 INITIAL ERROR g Card Warning Code Code No Description Recording nection n eispiay window The directory organization on the inserted P2 Although different kinds of recording E 70 card does not comply with the standards operations will function data may not be DIR NG CARD Slot No is indicated on the recorded properly Use the unit to format the A warning code blinks once viewfinder card immediately every 2 seconds on the time A P2 card was inserted where the number of Although different kinds of recording code display section of the E 71 rewrites exceeds the limit of the standards _ operations will function data may not be display window RUN DOWN CARD Slot No is indicated recorded properly It is recommended to on the viewfinder replace it 1 5 Maintenance a
168. der player unit Hi Multiple Slots AJ HPX3000 is equipped with five slots for P2 cards Up to five cards may be inserted in these slots for continuous recording They also provide new recording capabilities specific to memory cards Hot Swap recording The Hot Swap capability allows cards not in use to be replaced without interrupting recording This facilitates continuous recording LOOP REC AJ HPX3000 can retain a certain amount of previously recorded material by continuously loop recording data into a specified recording area INTERVAL REC ONE SHOT REC The AJ HPX3000 features interval recording at minimum one frame intervals This function is particularly suited to shooting science and nature programs Frame by frame shooting is simple with the one shot recording function PRE RECORDING function In standby status AJ HPX3000 always stores video and sound input to the camera for up to 8 seconds This means that the PRE RECORDING function when turned on records the video and sound for a preceding duration preset by the user This feature recovers critical moments that you might have missed Proxy recording when AJ YAX800G attached By installing the optional video encoder card AJ YAX800G MPEG4 format video and real time metadata such as time code data can be recorded simultaneously on the P2 card and the SD memory card together with the video and sound recorded by the camera This function is useful for confir
169. dio Level Control Recording and playback Operations in the remote control mode When the remote control is connected recording and playback can be controlled through both the camera recorder and the AJ RC10G Notes The state that was adjusted by connecting AJ RC10G is stored in the unit Not to store the adjusted state in the unit open the FUNCTION MENU of AJ RC10G to set the RC DATA SAVE item to OFF When the dedicated cable is connected or removed ensure that the POWER switches on both the main unit and AJ RC10G are turned OFF For software of the AJU RC10G use Version 1 10 00 000 or higher For instructions on updating of the AJ RC10G refer to the support page on the following website https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av Dedicated cable AJ RC10G ooeddooo Boo gaa 000 Remove the screw in the center of the Front Audio Level control and attach the accessory knob using the screw included When attaching the knob be sure to align the marks on the control with the marks on the knob uoeiedald Preparation Connection of the remote control unit AJ RC10G 111 Connection of the external switch It is possible to draw 1 5 A current from the DC OUT connector of the unit REC start stop can be controlled by connecting an external switch to this connector Since a tally lamp can
170. ds spanning from one to the other hot swap recording lt For Your Information gt The P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs may be set to stay off using the menu option ACCESS LED This option can be found on the lt OPTION MODE gt screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page To Prevent Accidental Erasure of P2 Card Content To prevent the content of a P2 card being accidentally erased position the write protect switch on the P2 card at Protect Note Write protect switchover can be performed while the card is being accessed during recording or playback but does not take effect until access to the card ceases Protect E Write protect switch P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards P2 CARD MODE CHECK ACCESS LED indication Status of P2 Card Stays on in ACTIVE Writing and reading green enabled Stays on in ACTIVE Writing and reading orange enabled The card is recordable LOOP REC also enabled Blinks in orange ACCESSING Writing or reading being performed Blinks rapidly in INFO READING Recognaising the P2 card orange Blinks slowly in FULL The P2 card has no free green space Only reading is enabled PROTECTED The write protect switch on the P2 card is positioned at PROTECT Only reading is enabled Stays off NOT The card is not supported SUPPORTED by your unit Replace the card FORMAT ERROR The P2 card is not properly formatted Reformat the card
171. e with menu 40 dBu 50 dBu 40 dBu selectable with menu 25 pin D SUB 40 dBu AUDIO OUT CH1 CH2 Headphones DC IN DC OUT LENS EVF REMOTE GPS USB version 2 0 XLR x 1 5 pins 4 dBu 3 dBu O dBu 4 dBu selectable with menu Balanced low impedance output Stereo mini jack x 2 XLR x 1 4 pins DC 12 V DC 11 V 17 V 4 pins DC 12 V DC 11 V 17 V Maximum rated current 1 5 A 12 pins 20 pins 10 pins connector for AJ RC10G 6 pins connector for AJ GPS910G HOST 4 pin Type A connector DEVICE 4 pin Type B connector Software information for this product 1 Customer advisory This product includes software licensed under the GNU General Public License GPL and GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL customers have the right to download modify and redistribute source code for this software Descriptions of the GPL and LGPL are stored on the installation CD included with this camera recorder See the folder named LDOC The description is the original written in English To download the relevant source code visit https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av Please note that we cannot answer any questions you may have about the content etc of any source code you may obtain from the above Web site 2 This product includes software licensed under the MIT License A description of the MIT is stored on the installation CD included with this camera recorder See the folder named LDOC The de
172. e R PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for red 00 s c u F R 63 R Mg PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between red and magenta 00 s c u F R 63 Mg PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for magenta 00 g s c u F R 63 Mg B PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between magenta and blue 00 S C U F R 63 B PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for blue 00 s c U F R 63 B Cy PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between blue and cyan 00 S C U F R 63 Cy PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for cyan 00 y S C U F R 63 Cy G PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between cyan and green 00 y g s c u F R 63 G PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for i reen 00 g s c u F R 63 G YI PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between green and yellow 00 s c u F R 63 YI PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for ellow 00 yi s c u F R 63 YI R PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between yellow and red 00 S C U F R 63 mCOLOR ON For switching ON OFF of the 12 axis CORRECT OFF independent color correction of the position selected with the GAIN switch slc u F R L M H The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode 166 Menu Menu Description Tables Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range MMASTER 3dB Select the master
173. e Writing data back to P2 cards page 139 To return to normal mode from USB HOST mode turn OFF the PC MODE item or press the USER button so that the PC MODE ON OFF function is assigned to a state where the thumbnail screen is closed sable hard disc drives a Hard disc drives connectable via USB 2 0 P2 STORE AJ PCS060G Notes While the USB HOST mode supports USB bus power 5V 0 5 A some hard disc drives may not activate If this is the case power must be supplied in a different way Do not connect more than one drive even through a hub or any other device Even with devices other than a hard disk drive do not connect to the drive together with the hard disk drive through a hub The unit does not support a hard disk drive of 2 TB 2048 GB or more 136 Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port E Viewing hard disc drive information You can view the information on the hard disc drive connected via USB 2 0 with the following steps 1 2 3 4 Switch the mode to USB HOST For more information see Switching to the USB HOST mode page 136 Connect the hard disc drive to the camera recorder via USB 2 0 Press the thumbnail button to display the thumbnail screen Press the MENU button and select HDD gt EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu The screen provides the information about the hard disc drive For Type S or P2 STORE 7 8 9
174. e next digit clockwise and repeat Steps 4 to 5 to set characters To change an input character go back to step 3 7 When the last character is set press the JOG dial button to bring the cursor back to the option USER 66 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data E CTL Count Setting and Display By setting the DISPLAY switch to CTL CTL count is displayed on the time count indication of the LCD display window The CTL count is displayed in 12 hours with non drop frame The playback order of clips recorded on a P2 card is not linear as for VTRs It is organized according to thumbnail operations or exchanging P2 cards and the priority of recorded clips will be altered Therefore different CTL counts are displayed for recording mode and playback mode respectively CTL count for recording mode recording CTL Recording CTL count is displayed during recording mode REC REC PAUSE STOP and REC REVIEW and the count continues from the end point of the previous recording Recording CTL count is retained even if the power is turned off When the power is next turned on the count continues from the previous value Notes f the RESET button is pressed while the recording CTL count is being displayed only the recording CTL count is reset Note that reset is disabled during the REC REVIEW operation 24 frames are counted in the 24PN Native mode CTL count for the playback mode playba
175. e option WRITE lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL gil READ gt WRITE RESET eee TITLE1 RRR TITLE2 RRR RE TITLES wR TITLE4 6 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message WRITE y a hb Pryrys TITLE 7 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button This writes the setting data into the scene file area of the unit internal memory 8 To exit the menu press the MENU button Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Bulpsooey 104 sbuljeas pue sjuewisnipy 89 To read settings data for scene files 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SCENE gt screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option SCENE SEL 3 Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers Then turn the dial button to select a desired scene file number lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL i1 READ WRITE RESET TITLE ooe TITLE ooo TITLES oo TITLE4 t rra 4 Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file 5 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the READ option lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL zA READ WRITE RESET TITLE1 tooo TITLE tooo TITLES 14o TITLE4 teeters J 6 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message READ XES gt S ArT E J 7 Turn the JOG dia
176. e superimposed detailed components dedicated to the Note down converter outputs The TC display position moves up Even if this setting is turned off it is and down depending on the camera impossible to turn off the detailed ID position components set during HD signal ae x _IclulFIR processing isplay the same characters superimposed on the VF signal H DTL LEVEL 00 For setting the horizontal detail Displays the menu when menu s correction level for the down converter ClU F characters are superimposed az output signals MONITOR VBS Select the output signal on the MON OUT I OUT VF connector C U F R y VBS Output a regular composite signal V DTL LEVEL 00 For setting the vertical detail correction VF Output a VF Y signal The status level for the down converter output display is also superimposed 04 signals e ls signal IclulFIR 31 The VBS signal is output in playback DTLCORING 00 For setting the noise elimination level of mode 01 the details C U F MONITOR ON Select whether or not to superimpose lcJujF R 15 OUT CHAR OFF characters on the MON OUT connector signal independently of the camera s H DTL FREQ i 2 selecting the horizontal detail VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch The 3 SAMENESS 1 2 5 MHz 4 4 MHz character content is the same as the i 5 2 3 MHz 5 4 5 MHz video output signal 3 3 5 MH ON Enable superimpose C U FIR ae a IclulFl OFF Disable superimpose 2D LPF ON For s
177. e 157 lt VF MARKER gt MKR A TABLE A CENTER MARK sa SAFETY MARK 2 SAFETY AREA 190 FRAME MARK OFF FRAME SIG 14 3 FLAME LVL 215 Note The indication MKR A at the upper right of the screen shows the current indication status To view TABLE B press the MARKER SELECT button This changes the indication to MKR B allowing you to view the settings E Marker Check Screen Displays MARKER SELECT button function The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to view the marker settings of the unit Pressing the MARKER SELECT button on the camera recorder switches the marker indication as follows Marker A Marker B No marker If the menu option FRAME SIG is set to 16 9 as the information of Marker A and 4 3 as the information of Marker B then the 16 9 and 4 3 view angles can easily be checked with the button as required I Checking Return Video Signal in the Markers Center marker Safety zone The view angle specified through the menu option FRAME SIG is displayed The viewfinder displays the return video signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector while the RET button at the lens is held down To enable this capability select CAM RET for the menu option RET SW This option can be found in the lt SW MODE gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page Viewfinder lt SW MODE gt RET SW R REVIEW S BLK LVL 10 AUTO KNEE SW ON SHD ABB S
178. e JOG dial button The value starts blinking lt USER SW gt Suvueruyveven USER MAIN SW S GAIN gt USER1 SW TTUSUIGATN USER2 SW DS GAIN To increase the value Turn the JOG dial button clockwise as seen from the front of the camera To decrease the value Turn the JOG dial button anti clockwise as seen from the front of the camera Each turn of the dial switches the value by one step A quick turn changes the value rapidly a slow turn makes a fine adjustment To turn an option on or off To select ON turn the JOG dial button clockwise as seen from the front of the camera To select OFF turn the JOG dial button anti clockwise as seen from the front of the camera To return the changed set value to the previous one Press the shot mark menu cancel button to display the message PUSH CANCEL BACK TO PREV Press the shot mark menu cancel button again to return the set value to the value before the change Note The following menu items cannot be cancelled using the shot mark menu cancel button Pages on the USER MENU SELECT screen Pages on the FILE screen CAMERA ID USER SW GAIN Part of the WHITE BALANCE MODE pages BATTERY SETTING1 2 UMID SET INFO Press the JOG dial button The value stops blinking and is accepted To change the settings for other options on the same page repeat Steps 4 6 When the settings are finalised press the MENU button This
179. e arrow Align the holes in the bottom part metal part of the cover with the holes in the case and secure the cover with the screw Note When mounting the battery holder take care not to pinch the connection cord When using a V mount type battery pack Mount the V mount adapter plate Insert the plate and slide it in the direction of the arrow uolesedaid 3 Setting the battery type Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT Select BATTERY SELECT from the lt BATTERY P2CARD gt screen on the MAIN OPERATION page When using another battery which cannot be selected using the BATTERY SELECT item setting select TYPE A or TYPE B and set the items that correspond to the characteristics of the battery Please refer to BATTERY SETTING2 page 183 for more information Note For information about the V mount adapter plate please contact the store where you purchased the camera recorder Preparation Power Supply 103 E Use of the external DC power supply 1 Connect the external DC power supply to the DC IN socket on the unit External DC power supply 2 Turn ON the power switch of the external DC power supply If the power switch is available on the external DC power supply 3 Turn ON the POWER switch on the unit Inrush current is generated when the power of the unit is turned on Insufficient power supply when turn
180. e environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling Please contact your local authority for further details of your nearest designated collection point Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste in accordance with national legislation For business users in the European Union If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment please contact your dealer or supplier for further information Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union This symbol is only valid in the European Union If you wish to discard this product please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal Panasonic Panasonic Broadcast amp Television Systems Company Unit Company of Panasonic Corporation of North America Executive Office One Panasonic Way 4E 7 Secaucus NJ 07094 201 348 7000 EASTERN ZONE One Panasonic Way 4E 7 Secaucus NJ 07094 201 348 7196 Southeast Region 201 348 7162 WESTERN ZONE 3330 Cahuenga Blvd W Los Angeles CA 90068 323 436 3500 Government Marketing Department One Panasonic Way 2E 10 Secaucus NJ 07094 201 348 7587 Broadcast PARTS INFORMATION amp ORDERING 9 00 a m 5 00 p m EST 800 334 4881 24 Hr Fax 800 334 4880 Emergency after hour parts orders 800 334 4881 TECHNICAL SUPPORT Emergency 24 Hour Service 800 222 0741 Panasonic Canada Inc 5770 Ambler Drive Mississauga Ont
181. e green frames are deleted by this operation Note Pressing the SET button stops the deletion operation in the middle Restoring Clips Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden powering down during recording or removal of the P2 card being accessed Note Only those clips with yellow corrupt clip markers can be restored Delete the clips with red corrupt clip markers If the clip cannot be deleted format the P2 card During restoration of the clips however the defective clip indicator may change from yellow to red resulting in inability to restore the clips 1 2 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip you want to restore defective clips are indicated by corrupt clip marks Press the SET button to select the clip Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION REPAIR CLIP from the thumbnail menu The confirmation window appears Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES sreuquiny ym sdo Bupendjuen Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Deleting Clips 121 Reconnection of Incomplete Clips Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded on multiple P2 cards connected clips are separately copied to different cards Reconnection function generates one clip the original connected clip from incomplete clips 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail s
182. e memory Data Saved Range The indicates that the data cannot be saved or read REC SIGNAL Select video input signals CAM Record the signal from the S Can be saved and read as scene data file camera H C Can be saved or read using SD CARD READ WRITE VIDEO Record the signal from the U Can be saved and read as user data GENLOCK IN connector In aa oe to SCENE page 189 and INITIALIZE SD mode only i 1394 Record the signal from the F Can be read using READ FACTORY DATA co a caneri Please refer to INITIALIZE page 189 SDI Records input to the SDI IN R Can be saved using RC DATA SAVE IclUIFIR connector optional Please refer to Connection of the remote control unit AJ RC10G page 111 This section shows the adjustable range of the set value and available options for this item About the settings available for this item Menu Menu Configuration 155 USER MENU USER MENU is factory set The menu can be configured to suit your preferences by specifying each option according to your purposes and frequency of use through the lt USER MENU SELECT gt screen which is accessible from the MAIN MENU page For more information see Selecting Options for USER MENU page 158 To display USER MENU press the MENU button MAIN MENU Allows you to set all options on the settings menu This menu has a category by category structure layered according to purposes and freq
183. e reader value V UBG AB CD EF 00 UBG VUBG User bits generator value V UBR 12345678 UBR VUBR User bits reader value CTL 1 59 59 20 Displays CTL count 15 Chromatic aberration CAC Displayed when chromatic aberration compensation is activated compensation 16 Extender EX Lens extender used Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays 73 Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy Information Item Indication Status 17 Color temperature KKK Color temperature assigned to A B and PRST of the WHITE BAL switch this is a value stored at AWB performance or a value set through the menu option The indication is not provided in ATW mode 18 Filter position 1 4 This indicates the position of the ND filter A D This indicates the position of the CC filter This indicates that the filter has not been set to a proper position 19 Dynamic range DRS This appears when the video level of a part with high brightness is stretcher mode compressed and the function stretching the dynamic range is selected 20 WHITE BAL switch A WHITE BAL switch positioned at A position B WHITE BAL switch positioned at B P WHITE BAL switch positioned at PRST 21 Stored gain 6 1 10 1 12 1 15 1 20 Storage gain DS GAIN value when active indication 22 Gain value dB Current gain value 23 Audio input channel m Selected channel together with its audi
184. e setting for menu option MONITOR OUT CHAR The options MONITOR OUT and MONITOR OUT CHAR can be found in the OUTPUT SEL screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page FUNCTION TOTAL Total remaining free space capacities of the P2 cards loaded in P2 Card P2CARD STATUS Slots 1 5 SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 Remaining free space capacity of each card The numbers denote the P2 SLOT4 SLOT5 card slot numbers The card status is indicated as ACTIVE ACCESSING INFO READING FULL PROTECTED NOT SUPPORTED FORMAT ERROR NO CARD PROXY For details of statuses see P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards page 31 OP SLOT Indicates optional slot status The card status is indicated as PROXY NO CARD NOT SUPPORTED AUDIO Enabling or CH1 ON OFF If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for Channel 1 then ON is disabling the FRONT indicated If not OFF is indicated AUDIO LEVEL CH2 ON OFF If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for Channel 2 then ON is control indicated If not OFF is indicated AUDIO Phantom power status for the microphone FRONT ON OFF REAR ON OFF Phantom power status of the front microphone Phantom power status of the rear microphone For more information see MIC AUDIO2 page 185 AUDIO Input signal and level for each channel FRONT W L REAR CH1 2 3 4 Input signal and level for each channel CAS information Operating status of CAC CAC CONT STOP CAC MODE AUTO MAN
185. e time code Alternatively a composite signal can be input as the reference signal Note that the subcarriers for the down converter composite signal output from the camera recorder cannot be externally locked Notes When HD Y signal is input and CAM RET is selected you can check return video on the viewfinder screen The menu option RET SW can be found in the SW MODE screen on the CAM OPERATION page When the mode is set to SD you can record original signals by specifying VIDEO for the menu option REC SIGNAL SDI OUTI IN option connector The default setting outputs the same SDI signals as the SDI signals from the VIDEO OUT connector When the VIDEO OUT switch is set to VBS HD SDI signals are output in the HD mode while SD SDI signals are output in the SD mode If installed the optionally available HD SD SDI input board AJ YA350AG optional accessory acts as an input connector for HD SD SDI signals You can record signals from this input connector by specifying SDI for the menu option REC SIGNAL For details refer to Connection using the SDI IN connector when AJ YA350AG attached page 141 Parts and their Functions Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section 21 suoloun Jay PUL Sued 32 DVCPRO connector This is an in output connector for video voice and data that comply with the IEEE1394 standard It is impossible to input output the DV signal Notes Power is not supplied from th
186. e title on an SD memory card can be loaded into the unit s internal memory The correlation between the lens files stored in the internal memory and lens files saved on an SD memory card is shown below Internal memory Up to 8 sets of the lens file 8 lens files canbe stored in the built in memory N The contents of 8 lens files can be saved onto an SD memory card as card files under one title or they can f be loaded from the SD Card files memory card Title 1 Title 2 Title 3 Title 4 OG x x N N Title 5 Title 6 Title 7 Title 8 iS J A total of 64 lens files 8 lens files x 8 titles can be saved on an SD memory card Saving lens files on the SD memory card Select the card file No 1 Using menu operations open the lt LENS FILE CARD R W gt screen from the FILE page When the message FORMAT ERROR appears in the upper right corner format the SD memory card with the camera recorder SD cards can be formatted through the CARD CONFIG menu option on the READ WRITE screen For more information see Handling SD memory cards page 83 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the CARD FILE SELECT item Press the JOG dial button and the card file number will flash Turn the JOG dial butto
187. e unit Be absolutely sure to bear the following points in mind when connecting the IEEE1394 cable DV cable Ensure that the connections with other devices are made on a 1 1 basis When an IEEE1394 cable has been connected to the DVCPRO connector do not apply any strong external force as this may damage the connector When error code 1394 E 92 1394 INITIAL ERROR appears disconnect the connecting cables and re connect them or turn off the camera recorder s power and turn it back on Ensure that the unit and all of the connected devices are each grounded or connected to a common ground before use If it is not possible to ground the unit and devices turn off the power of the unit and of all the connected devices before connecting or disconnecting the IEEE1394 cable When the unit is to be connected to a device equipped with a 4 pin type of connector connect the unit s connector 6 pin type first When connecting the unit with a PC equipped with a 6 pin type ofconnector connect the IEEE1394 cable as dictated by the shapes of the 1394 connectors Bear in mind that inserting a plug the wrong way round may damage the unit When the unit is used in AVC Intra format image voice signals cannot be output input through the DVCPRO connector 4 pin type 35 SD memory card insertion slot An SD memory card optional accessory is inserted here SD memory cards are used for uploading meta
188. e white balance has not been successfully adjusted the viewfinder displays an error message If one of the error messages listed below appears take the appropriate steps then adjust the white balance again If the error message appears after For more information contact your distributor repeated readjustments the interior of the unit must be inspected light Error message Description Remedies COLOR TEMP The color Select an appropriate HIGH temperature is too _ filter high COLOR TEMP The color Select an appropriate LOW temperature is too _ filter low LOW LIGHT There is insufficient Increase the light level light or gain LEVEL OVER There is too much _ Decrease the light level or gain CHECK FILTER The FILTER control is displaced Check the FILTER control TIME OVER AWB was not completed within the time allowed Shooting conditions may be unstable If flicker occurs press the shutter and readjust the AWB under stable conditions Retaining white balances Each value in memory is retained even if the camera recorder is turned off it will not be lost until the white balance is re adjusted White balances are stored in either of two systems A or B When the menu option FILTER INH is set to ON default each system stores only one value If this is the case the values are not synchronised with the filters This option can be found
189. ead in and TYPE2 has been selected as the recording method The COUNT value can be reset using the following procedure Select PROPERTY DEVICE META DATA from the thumbnail menu then select USER CLIP NAME to display the menu shown below Select COUNT RESET with the cursor and press the SET button to reset the COUNT value to 1 META DATA e2 mee HDD REC META DATA REC ON CREATOR 1 D META NAME e LOAD DATA TEST CLIP COUNT 0001 REC DATA TEST CLIP0001 OK COUNT RESET Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Setting of Clip Meta Data 125 Note When a P2 card with a memory capacity of 8 GB or more is used in camera recorder and a one time continuous recording exceeds the prescribed duration DVCPRO HD and the AVC Intra 100 about 5 minutes DVCPRO50 and the AVC Intra 50 about 10 minutes or when a one time recording extends over more than one P2 card the recording concerned will automatically be undertaken as a separate clip At this time each clip will be provided with its own COUNT value Example of recording DVCPRO HD a clip on one P2 card REC start recording start REC PAUSE recording pause l l Recording duration Approx 7 min R Clip 1 Clip 2 COUNT value COUNT value 0001 0002 l 5 min gt t amn Example of recording a clip on two P2 cards REC start recording start REC PAUSE recording pause 4 Y Clip 1 Clip 2 COUNT value COUNT value
190. ect a filter according to light conditions 2A When the white balance is saved Position the WHITE BAL switch to A or B 2 B When the white or black balance is not saved and you have no time to adjust the white balance Position the WHITE BAL switch to PRST This adjusts the white balance against the filter according to the position of the FILTER control 2 C If the white balance is adjusted on the spot Position the WHITE BAL switch to A or B and shoot a white test subject so that it appears at the center of the screen Then follow the steps below to adjust the white balance 1 Press the AUTO W B BAL switch toward AWB to adjust the white balance 2 Press the AUTO W B BAL switch toward ABB to adjust the black balance 3 Press the AUTO W B BAL switch toward AWB to adjust the white balance again For directions on making adjustments see Adjusting the White Balance page 45 and Adjusting the Black Balance page 48 3 Point the camera at your subject to adjust the focus and zoom 4 To use the electronic shutter set the shutter speed and operation mode For more information see Setting the Electronic Shutter page 49 5 Press either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens to start recording During recording the REC lamp in the viewfinder stays illuminated 6 To stop recording press either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VT
191. ector switch on the rear panel to LINE LINE MIC 48V Selector Switch AUDIO IN Switch When mounting the camera on a tripod use the tripod adapter supplied with the camera 1 Mount the tripod adapter on the tripod Tripod Adapter a EO Note Select an appropriate hole in the adapter taking into account the center of gravity of the camera and tripod adapter combined Also make sure that the diameter of the selected hole matches the diameter of the pan head screw 2 Mount the camera on the tripod adapter Slide the camera forward along the grooves until you hear a click 2 Removing the Camera from the Tripod Adapter Tripod Adapter 1 amp 6 Ss Black Lever Red Lever While holding the red lever down move the black lever in the direction of the arrow and slide the camera backward to remove it Note If the tripod adapter pin does not return to its original position after the camera has been removed hold the red lever down and move the black lever in the direction of the arrow again in order to return the pin to its original position Please note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin remains in the center uolesedaid Preparation Mounting the Camera on a Tripod 109 Attaching the Shoulder Strap To detach the shoulder strap first open the hooks then Shoulder Strap detach the
192. ed as a separate drive by the PC If data on a P2 card that contains a defective clip must be written to a hard disc drive then we recommend fixing that clip before copying the data When the process is discontinued during verification the data on the P2 card has been written to the hard disc drive Writing data back to P2 cards You can select clips on the hard disc drive to be written back to P2 cards 1 Aa Q N Q 7 8 Switch the mode to USB HOST For more information see Switching to the USB HOST mode page 136 Connect a hard disc drive via USB Insert the target P2 card in a slot Press the MENU button and select HDD EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu Move to the appropriate partition and select it with the SET button From among the thumbnails select the clips to be written to the P2 card Press the MENU button and select OPERATION gt IMPORT SELECTED CLIPS Then specify the slot that contains the target P2 card Select YES to start writing data back to the P2 card When the writing is completed the message COPY COMPLETED is displayed Note When only selected files are written no verification is per formed For a Type S or P2 STORE hard disc drive you have the choice of writing data on a card basis The target P2 cards must be preformatted 1 WG No QO Switch the mode to USB HOST For more information see Switching to the USB HOST mode page 136 C
193. ed in the menu 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 13 8 V steps 13 2 V steps lcju F 15 0 JcJu Fl 15 0 HYTRON140 Enable selection under BATTERY ENDURA10 Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT gt Enable selection gt Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR MANUAL END voltage MANUAL END voltage AUTO Set voltage automatically AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually MANUAL Set voltage manually 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 1o93 V steps 132 V steps e u F 150 e u F 150 DIONIC90 Enable selection under BATTERY ENDURA D Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT gt Enable selection gt Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR MANUAL END voltage MANUAL END voltage AUTO Set voltage automatically AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually MANUAL Set voltage manually 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 above set the NE
194. eeteeccaeeeeeeenecaaaes 14 Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section cccccccees 15 Audio input Function Section c cece eectteteeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeneaes 16 Audio output Function Section cccccccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeecsceeeeeeeens 17 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section 00 18 Menu Operation Section 0 ecccecceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeessaaeeeeees 23 Time Code Section cece ieee etter eeecceeeeeeettecaaeeeeeeee 24 Warning and Status Display Functions 0 ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeetee 25 Display Window Functions ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaees 26 LEG DIMOMMOF 2 cc8c cirri iol eel thee ie aici os sheath eka T 27 VICWIINGSE icicle BAe alienated 28 P2 CardS AE EE EEE EA E TA A E E AA E EEE 30 How to handle data recorded on P2 Cards ccc eeeeeesesssteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 32 Basic Procedures neeem estes tenei niiae aa h uea aK araa ane 33 Normal ReCOrding assos e ee ee ee eaaaaaaaaaaaaaaeeeaaaaeeeeeeees 35 PRE RECORDING function 00 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 36 MoXe 0m 1670 66 816 Penne ee 37 Interval Recording a adadad aa NAAA 37 Recording Review Function sessssssesessessrrrrrrrrrrnrrnneeeeeseeeeeenene 40 Normal and Variable Speed Playback ccccecseceeeeeeeeeseseetaeees 41 Text Memo FUN ction neoan renerne naiean a a aE E aeai Sotia 41 Shot Mark FUNCHON au N nnn news 42 Recording Se
195. effect before automatic adjustment will be used During an adjustment the viewfinder displays the following message AWB ACTIVE The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds and the following message will appear The adjusted value is automatically stored in the memory specified in Step Z A or B AWB A OK 3 2K For the 3200K CC ND filter if the subject s color temperature is lower than 2300K or higher than 9900K the following message appears If the arrow points down the actual color temperature is lower than the temperature indicated If the arrow points up 7 the actual temperature is higher than the temperature indicated AWB A OK 2 3K Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance 45 Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy Detection area for the white balance The detection area for the white balance is selectable between 90 50 and 25 using the menu option AWB AREA This option can be found in the lt WHITE BALANCE MODE gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page The detection area is factory set to 25 50 25 D 90 When you have no time to adjust the white balance Position the WHITE BAL switch at PRST This adjusts the white balance for the filter according to the position of the CC ND FILTER control When the white balance has not been automatically adjusted When th
196. en file data have errors Use the proper file data READ NG FILE MEMORY FULL Memory is full The memory card is full and new data cannot be written on it Delete unnecessary CAC data and then perform the read operation again 8 9 To store multiple CAC files in the unit repeat Steps 3 to 7 To close the menu operation press the MENU button The setting menu disappears and the current state of the unit is displayed Notes The unit is capable of recording 32 CAC files When the CAC FILE is full delete any of the CAC Files While the SD memory card is inserted the BUSY lamp for the SD memory card blinks which is normal and not a malfunction 98 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Chromatic Aberration Compensation CAC 1 Q AR W ND To delete the CAC FILE from the unit Open lt CAC ADJ gt from the MAINTENANCE page using the menu operation The following screen is displayed lt CAC ADJ gt gt CAC CONTROL ON CAC FILE DELETE CAC FILE NO 01 TITLE SCROLL 01 01 HA22X7 8BERM M58 02 HA16X6 3BERM M58 03 HJ17EX7 6B IASE 04 HJ22EX7 6B IASE 05 06 07 08 Select OFF in CAC CONTROL Select the lens product number to be deleted in CARD FILE NO using the JOG dial button Press the JOG dial button to fix the selected operation Select CARD FILE DELETE using the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button When the following screen is d
197. ens with a commercially available lens cleaner Do not wipe the mirror If dirt or rubbish is sticking on the mirror remove it with a commercially available air blower H Phenomenon Inherent to CCD Cameras Smears Smears may appear when shooting an object with very high brightness This phenomenon becomes more obvious as the electronic shutter speed becomes faster i Replacing the Backup Battery The camera is shipped from the factory with a backup battery already mounted When the battery runs out the BACK UP BATT EMPTY display appears on the viewfinder screen for 5 seconds after the power switch is turned ON The internal clock stops operating when the battery runs out Also the TCG time code value returns to 00 00 00 00 and the time code backup is disabled The battery must be replaced Please consult your distributor for replacement with a new battery CR2032 The backup battery is visible when the panel on the LCD monitor side is removed right side when viewed from the front Note Please contact the store where you purchased the camera when replacing the battery 144 Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance B Connector Signals DC IN Matsushita part number K1AA104H0038 Maker part number HA16RX 4P SW1 1 GND Hirose Denki 2 NC 3 INC 4 12V 4 O2 30 O O Note Ensure that the polarities are used correctly for a power supply from an externa
198. era Note that in a system using both interlaced and progressive scanning there may be breaks in the video and time code When using the MON OUT or VIDEO OUT connector to output reference signals position the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side panel at CAM Superimpose of time codes To display the time code in the viewfinder or the LCD monitor when recording or during playback set TC in lt VF INDICATOR2 gt to TCG TCR or TCG TCR To display the time code indication on the MONITOR OUT or VIDEO OUT outputs set MONI OUT CHARA in lt OUTPUT SEL gt to ON and the VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch to ON To display the time code while the color bar is displayed set TC ON COLOR BAR in lt VF INDICATOR2 gt to ON E Providing an ID to the Camera The camera ID is specified through the lt CAMERA ID gt screen The ID can include up to 10 alphanumeric characters symbols and or spaces Note When the settings menu is displayed outputting color bar signals does not indicate the camera ID 1 Go to the lt CAMERA ID gt screen from the CAM OPERATION page lt CAMERA ID gt ID1 ABCDEFGHIJ ID2 ABCDEFGHIJ ID3 ABCDEFGHIJ 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to options ID1 ID3 3 Press the JOG dial button The cursor moves to the ID entry area allowing you to enter an ID 4 Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears The characters that appear are switched
199. eration is made after recording Viewfinder The TURN POWER OFP indicator lights up Tally lamp This lamp will flash 4 times every second until an operation is made after recording Warning tone Continues to beep Viewfinder The WP indicator lights up The P2 card being accessed has been Warning tone This tone will sound continuously until an operation is made after recording Warning Ls ae removed resulting in an error in the internal description memory of the camera recorder Recording playback Cannot be performed operation Turn off the power to the camera recorder If Countermeasures there is an error in a clip on the removed P2 card repair the clip warn g The inserted P2 cards are write protected description Recording playback Recording is disabled operation Disable the write protect or replace the P2 Countermeasures card suonoedsu pue soueusjuley Maintenance and Inspections Warning System 149 5 P2 Card Fully Recorded 7 Recording Error Display window indication All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA capacity start blinking WARNING lamp This lamp will illuminate continuously until an operation is made after recording Display window indication 00 00 00 11 appears in the time code display field Even after recording is stopped this display continues to blink until the next ope
200. es the storage type gain increase function by driving the CCD progressively With this function it is possible to obtain brighter pictures without increasing noise under low light conditions This is a function that makes it possible to achieve higher sensitivity of up to 20 dB above the regular gain increase Furthermore this function can also be used as picture effects Refer to page 180 Hi DRS Dynamic Range Stretcher function With this function the dynamic range of high brightness areas that may be skipped with white blanks in an ordinary recording method can be expanded by compressing images and maintaining the contrast Refer to page 51 General Features of Camera unit Hi Lens file function The unit has 8 lens files By using an SD memory card 64 lens files can be stored Refer to page 92 H Focus assist function The unit will display a marker to help with focusing when shooting videos This function provides a visual cue for focusing Refer to page 51 i Data management function Within the unit one user data file and four sets of scene file data can be saved By using an SD memory card as the setup cart up to eight sets of setup data can be stored Refer to page 82 H Color bar The unit employs the SMPTE color bar ARIB color bar Split color bar for SNG Satellite News Gathering as well as the conventional color bar which is useful for adjusting the color monitor Refer to page 178 Features of Recor
201. etting the 2 D low path filter LCD MON ON Select whether or not to superimpose OFF reducing cross colors i ON Cross colors are reduced CHAR OFF characters on the LCD monitor The OFF Gi ss colors are not reduced character content is the same as the C U F R i video output signal SETUP 0 For setting the setup level for the down ON Enable superimpose 7 5 converter output signals Not interlocked with the VIDEO Only for 1080 59 94i OUT CHARACTER switch Note OFF ee sree t UDEG When the system frequency is set to 50 ot interlocked wi e Hz th tup level will be 0 OUT CHARACTER switch C U F R E EARE ee C U F VF MODE MEM When the REC SIGNAL menu option on Note CAM the SYSTEM MODE screen is set to CAM select the image to display in the The lt DOWNCON SETTING gt screen is displayed when viewfinder SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080 59 94i 1080 50i HD MEM Display the playback image in the mode playback mode z CAM Always display the camera image i as C UF eerie i I The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the THUMBNAIL ON Select whether or not to output clip preset mode OUT OFF thumbnails displayed on the LCD monitor to the video output and monitor output signals ON Enable output OFF Disable output Note HD SDI signals are being output from the VIDEO OUT connector thumbnails _Iclulel are not output 162 Menu Menu Description Tables LCD MONITOR
202. ext memo point or copy any portion For more information see Text Memo page 119 Notes One clip can have up to 100 text memos Text memos can also be recorded when the LCD monitor is in thumbnail mode In this case the text memo is added to the position on the clip where the cursor is set normally at the beginning only Text memos cannot be recorded when the color bar is output or the unit is in LOOP REC mode and INTERVAL REC mode For a clip with voice memos added through the AJ SPX800 or any other camera recorder you can record up to 100 text and voice memos in combination For information about voice memos see the instruction manual for the AJ SPX800 yoeq ejd pue Bulpiooey Recording and Playback Normal and Variable Speed Playback 41 Shot Mark Function A shot mark is added to the thumbnail of a clip to distinguish that clip from others With the LCD monitor only clips that have shot marks can be viewed and or played back Adding Shot Marks To add a shot mark during recording press the SHOT MARK button The viewfinder displays MARK ON and adds a shot mark to the thumbnail of the appropriate clip Another press of the button erases the shot mark SHOT MARK button Shot marks may also be added or erased using clip thumbnails For more information see Shot Mark page 119 Notes When the color bar is output or the unit is in LOOP REC mode and INTERVAL REC mode it is i
203. f the DOWN CON SETTING menu Enabled only for 1080 59 94i 2 SET UP of the SYSTEM MODE menu Enabled only for 480 59 94i 3 Select THUMBNAIL SETUP DATA FORMAT from the thumbnail menu For details refer to Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode page 128 General Color TV Standard Settings Settings for frame frequency 13 jesouey system Configuration Unislot wireless Note microphone receiver All of the devices and accessories other than the unit Sennheiser EK3041 Video encoder card which are shown in this system configuration are option AJ YAX800G ally available To use these devices and accessories refer to the r tiv ration manuals Stereo microphone OMe ee peeve Operaton manuais AJ MC900G Remote control cable Remote control unit AJ C10050G AJ RC10G Microphone holder AJ MH800G DIONIC90 160 HYTRON50 100 140 2 type HD Viewfinder AJ HVF21G PROPAC14 TRIMPAC14 Viewfinder AJ VF15B AJ VF20WB V mount type ENDURA7 10 Battery plate BP GL65 95 NP 1 type NP L7 Battery case Memory Card External DC Camera Recorder power supply AJ HPX3000G Lens Bayonet type Fujinon Canon GPS unit AJ GPS910G Tripod adapter SHAN TM700 Rain cover SHAN RC700 HD SD SDI input board AJ YA350AG Soft carrying case AJ SC900 P2 Cards AJ P2C004HG Hard carrying case AJ P2C008HG AJ HT901G SD Memory cards AJ P2C016RG For the latest information o
204. frames 24PN Native 4 frames SD mode 60i 50i 30P 25P Pull down tiame 24P 24PA Pull down 5 frames Recording and Playback Loop Recording 37 yoeq ejd pue Bulpiooey Shooting procedures when INTERVAL REC is ON 1 Following basic operations of shooting and recording according to Basic Procedures lock the camera securely 2 Check that i is blinking in the display and that the interval recording mode is selected 3 Press either REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens Interval recording starts Recording automatically stops after the specified TAKE TOTAL TIME and the entire recording is generated as one clip P starts blinking in the display when the internal recording mode is selected iREC illuminates after recording starts iREC blinks during a pause The display in the viewfinder is the same as that in the display window The tally lamp illuminates during recording If PAUSE TIME is set at 2 minutes or longer the tally lamp illuminates at 5 second intervals to indicate that it is paused The tally lamp also blinks 3 seconds before recording starts iREC start Time Axis REC TIME gt Recording Real time video Yi a is ig Bie Big time t1 two Sound pe a IN 1 N IPAUSE TIME Lo m m gt i lt gt Recording L f te 2 time t2 TAKE TOTAL TIME l Time necessary for shooting Content on P2 card HADNA gt
205. g read metadata page 124 I P2 Card Status Display 4 Press OK on the keyboard to write the modified metadata on the clip and return to the metadata window The input window soft keyboard for modifying metadata is displayed Use the keyboard to modify the metadata Note Deleting only the respective items of LOCATION recording location data in SHOOT is not possible By setting ALTITUDE to empty other LONGITUDE LATITUDE items are collectively deleted The metadata for a clip with the o incomplete clip indicator cannot be modified For the clips recorded on multiple P2 cards modify the metadata while all P2 cards are inserted Any MEMO with 100 characters or more cannot be modified n P2 Card Status Display Settings Select PROPERTY gt CARD STATUS from the thumbnail menu to set the desired indication mode remaining free space or used memory capacity for the P2 card status display 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Press the MENU button and select PROPERTY gt PROPERTY SETUP gt P2 CARD CAP from the thumbnail menu The following screen appears Select the P2 card status display settings from the P2 CARD CAP menu option ALL THUMBNAIL aaa OPERATION CLIP PROPERTY pryereryerys mrg CARD STATUS ee v REMAIN PROPERTY SETUP gt USED EXIT HDD META DATA 3s 09 EXIT 00 00 56 29 a O F TSi 00 01 10 08 00 01 17 18 00 01 28 23
206. g your memory card camera recorder see Inspections Before Shooting page 142 Battery Set up to P2 card Insertion 1 Insert a charged battery pack 2 Turn on the POWER switch and ensure that more than four segments of the battery remaining amount indication bar are illuminated if the number of illuminated segments is fewer than five first check the battery placement If placement is not the problem replace the battery with a fully charged one Insert a P2 card and ensure that the P2 CARD ACCESS LED stays on in orange or green Then close the slide out door When more than one P2 card slot contains a P2 card the card in the slot with the lowest number is used first However regardless of slot number a P2 card inserted later will not be accessed until the other cards have been used Example If all five slots contain P2 cards the cards are used in order of slot numbers 1 gt 2 3 4 5 However if the P2 card in Slot 1 is removed and then re inserted the cards will be used in the following order 23 451 Note that the recording order is retained even if the power is turned off When the power is next turned on the last card written before powering down will be the target card Note When SLOT1 is selected for the menu option PON REC SLOT SEL recording starts from the P2 card inserted in the smallest slot number after the power is turned on This option is found in t
207. ge in 0 1 steps 13 5 V steps 13 6 lcju Fl 15 2 15 0 END 11 0 Set the END voltage in 0 1 V steps 12 9 C U F 15 0 TYPE B Enable selection under BAT TERY SELECT Enable selection e Disable selection FULL 12 0 Set the voltage to display the FULL indication in 0 1 V steps 15 5 17 0 NEAR END 11 0 Set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 V steps 13 5 15 0 END 11 0 Set the END voltage in 0 1 V steps 13 1 C U F 15 0 The remaining battery level is indicated in percentage when a battery with this function is installed on the unit The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 183 MIC AUDIO1 184 Menu Menu Description Tables Items Adjustable R imarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range FRONTVR JOFF Select whether or not to enable the MIC LOWCUT OFF Select the microphone low cut filter for CH1 FRONT FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control for the CH4 FRONT Input Channel 4 W L signal selected as the input signal to W L OFF The microphone low cut filter is REAR AUDIO CH1 REAR disabled for any input ALL OFF Disabled for any input selected FRONT The microphone low cut filter is Recording leve
208. hanging the color temperature with the JOG dial button is ON or OFF 72 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Information Item Indication Status 13 System information and warnings SYSTEM ERROR TURN POWER OFF CARD ERR REC WARNING BACKUP BATT EMPTY FAN STOP WIRELESS RF EOM BOS EOS CANNOT REC CANNOT PLAY COMM ERROR TEXT MEMO TEXT MEMO INVALID MARK ON OFF SHOT MARK INVALID UPDATING USB DEVICE USB HOST THUMBNAIL OPEN 1394 INITIAL ERROR PROXY REC P2 amp SD PROXY REC P2 NEAR END SD EOM SD PROXY CARD ERROR SD CARD WRITE ERR CANNOT DISP IN VF TC REGEN SLOT SEL SLOT SEL INVALID DIR NG CARD SLOT 1 2 3 4 5 RUN DOWN CARD Something abnormal is happening to the internal computer communications or reference signal No further recording or playback can be performed is replaced with an error code For more information see Error Codes page 152 P2 card has been removed while being accessed recorded played back or formatted and subsequent operation is disabled An error has occurred while recording data to or playing data from a P2 card In the actual indication the is replaced by the slot number of the P2 card that triggered the error Something abnormal is happening to video and or audio being recorded Backup battery needs replacing The fan is locked and halted RF signal from the wireless receiver is degraded P2 card has
209. he SYSTEM SETTING page and the settings on the OPTION MENU page 3 TAAA when data is read or written from or to TITLE READ Read out the title of the data recorded _ FJ SD memory cards Sahe SD mernory card PAINT MENU JON Select whether or not to include the A AAS LEVEL R W OFF adjusted values on the PAINT page TITLE1 8 KKK Up to 8 letters can be set for the title when reading out or writing to the SD OK name fF memory card TEE PAINT MENU JON Select whether or not to include the set SW m RW OFF values on the PAINT MENU page when reading out or writing to the SD memory Note g g S S ee card For a USB DEVICE mode errors occur even if the F respective items for SD CARD READ WRITE are VF MENU ON Select whether or not to include the set a si itd SD d OFF values on the VF page when reading out executed since it does not access an memory car lFl or writing to the SD memory card Set PC MODE to OFF and then execute the operation f F CAM OPE ON Select whether or not to include the set again MENURW OFF values on the CAM OPERATION page when reading out or writing to the SD F memory card MAINTE ON Select whether or not to include the set MENU RW OFF values on the MAINTENANCE page when reading out or writing to the SD FI memory card MAINOPE JON Select whether or not to include the set MENU RW OFF values on the MAIN OPERATION page when reading out or writing to the SD FI memory card The
210. he Sens 50i Ba 4 As per the UB 576 50i 25P Over 50i 25 25 25 mode VITC UB mode 1080 59 94i As per the TC As per the TC 30 30 30 24 Spit or 480 59 94i mode 4 mode 4 switchable As per the UB ema VIDEO 1080 50i P wi E ma Pa mode made 576 50i 1080 59 94i As per the TC Regardless of the 30 30 30 24 Regardless of the 480 59 94i mode 2 setting TC in the switchable setting TC in the VIDEO AUX area UB area input 1394 AVC Intra is not input through the ade UB through the 1080 501 selectable _2 DVCPRO 25 25 25 DVCPRO 576 501 connector is connector is recorded recorded It will not be slaved to a TC or UB value that is input in the SDI IN connector Can be slaved to values input through the DVCPRO connector but not to the TC for TC IN connector If the option menu FRAME RATE UB is set to MENU then recording is performed as per the UB or VITC UB mode If this is the case however edit tools e g PC edit software cannot record the required information For free run the time code is slaved to the time code input through the TC IN connector For free run the time code is slaved to the time code input through the TC IN connector if it is a non drop frame When the option UB MODE is set to EXT then the bits are slaved to the user bits input through the TC IN connector If the option UB MODE is set to EXT then the bits are slaved to the user bits input through the DVCPRO connector Reg
211. he AJ RC10G is connected 1 250 the settings for the shutter are set to the value recorded on 1 500 the AJ RC10G 1 1000 1 2000 fas HALF The ___ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg clulF 45 0deg POSITION4 For setting the shutter speed for SEL POSITION 4 1 100 1 100 59 94 Hz 1 120 1 60 50Hz 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg clu F 45 0deg Menu Menu Description Tables 177 USER SW SW MODE Items Adjustable Reniarke Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range USER MAIN INH Allocate the USER MAIN button For RET SW R REVIEW For setting the function when the USER SW S GAIN descriptions of the functions see CAMRET button on the unit to which the RET DS GAIN Assigning Functions to USER MAIN button of the lens or the RET SW S IRIS USER1 and USER2 Buttons page 51 function is allocated is pressed OVR R REVIEW S BLK REC view function B GAMMA It is possible to check a last few Y GET seconds of the records taken DRS CAM RET Return video function saat It is possible to confirm the return i video signals HD analog HD Y AUDIO CH1 signals SD VBS signals supplied to AUDIO CH2 the GENKLOCK IN connector on the REC SW unit by usi
212. he REC FUNCTION screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Switch Setting When a battery and P2 cards are installed set the switches as detailed below before starting to use your unit Setting the switches before shooting and recording USER MAIN AUDIO SELECT This switch is factory set to CH 1 CH 2 perform slot selection AUTO CAM AUTO KNEE ON GAIN Normally this should be set to 0 dB If conditions are too dark an appropriate gain level should be set Iris Auto Notes The USER MAIN button is factory set to perform the slot selection function which selects the target card from among several P2 cards When a new target P2 card is selected the appropriate slot number appears on the P2 card remaining amount indicator in the viewfinder For more information about the indications in the viewfinder see Viewfinder Status Indication Layout page 69 SLOT SEL function is enabled during recording Until the P2 card on which images are recorded has been switched completely SLOT SEL blinks on the viewfinder If the SLOT SEL operation cannot be executed for any reason for instance immediately after starting recording or switching the P2 card on which images are recorded SLOT SEL INVALID is displayed Recording and Playback Basic Procedures 33 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Shooting White Black Balance Adjustment to Recording Comple tion For shooting follow the steps below 1 Sel
213. he operating status of the unit The set value in this area is revised by menu operations SCENE file Four sets of scene files are provided LENS file Eight sets of lens files are provided CAC file 32 chromatic aberration compensation data area sets are provided sp memory card It is possible to write eight SET UP data For menu items that can be read from or stored in the respective areas refer to Menu page 155 Notes For information about how to navigate through the menu for this section see Setting Menu Options page 157 Access the respective data settings files after switching the PC MODE to OFF If the respective data settings files are accessed when the unit is in USB DEVICE mode an error may occur The PC MODE can be operated from the lt SYSTEM MODE gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page CAC FILE CARD READ 7 aan DELETE K setup files on the SD memory card i No of files 8 Menu operations CAC ADJ CAC FILE DELETE CAC file SD CARD READ WRITE READ To revise the set WRITE SD CARD READ WRITE No of files 32 value CAC CONTROL SCENE file No of files 4 SCENE READ CURRENT data DT Operating status of the unit WRITE USER READ USER No of fi
214. highlights the black gradations Regardless of the value set in the BLACK GAMMA item on the menu lt LOW SETTING gt screen lt MID SETTING gt screen and lt HIGH SETTING gt screen on the PAINT page the BLACK GAMMA is set to 3 Function of indicating the brightness level of the center marker assigned DRS ASSIST C TEMP AUDIO CH1 AUDIO CH2 The function of the dynamic range stretcher is allocated The function is allocated to compress the video level with high brightness and stretched the dynamic range The compression level is variable on the lt KNEE LEVEL gt screen on the PAINT page Notes Since the DRS function compresses the video levels of sections with high brightness there are slight differences in color development when the DRS function is turned on off When the DRS function is turned on the Knee function and the BLACK GAMMA function are not available The function to turn on or off the assigned focus assist indication Note When the ASSIST button is turned on a graph is displayed on the viewfinder and the bottom right of the LCD monitor Adjust the focus ring on the lens so that the graph comes further right The function to switch to the mode that allows the JOG dial button to change the assigned color temperature It is useful for intentionally changing the color temperature after adjusting the white balance To change the color temperature press the user button
215. iaeei 35 hour 9 hour 5 hour 42 minutes 18 minutes 12 minutes Features of the Input Output unit Wi Features USB2 0 port HOST DEVICE WIHD SD SDI input function when the AJ By connecting with a PC via USB2 0 a P2 card inserted in AJ HPX3000 can be used as a bulk storage device It is also possible to store data on a P2 card onto a USB 2 0 connected external hard disk equipped with USB host capability as well as view clips stored on hard disks and write them to P2 cards Refer to page 135 HE DVCPRO IEEE1394 input output provided as a standard configuration Data can be input output to an external device through the IEEE1394 digital interface Use a 6 pin type connector The unit does not support the bus power While operating AVC Intra it is impossible to input output data with IEEE 1394 Refer to page 133 WE HD SD SDI output featured as standard Video can be output as HD SDI signals down converted SD SDI signals or analog composite signals SDI output includes embedded audio etc Refer to page 44 Note that the SD mode does not output HD SDI signals Hi Down converter output provided as a standard configuration In HD mode the MON OUT output connector and the VIDEO OUT connector in setting VBS mode output down converter analog composite signals It is optimum for confirming shot images on the SD monitor Refer to page 44 YA350AG is attached The camera recorder with the AJ YA350AG ex
216. ible to synchronize with the time code entered via TC IN connector The menu option REC SIGNAL is found in the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page 64 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Setting the user bits when the time code is externally locked When the TCG switch is positioned to F RUN only the time code is locked to an external time code To lock the user bits to an externally input value the UB MODE and VITC UB MODE menu options must be set to EXT and USER EXIT respectively The menu option UB MODE and VITC UB MODE can be found in the lt TC UB gt screen which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page To unlock the externally locked time code Discontinue external time code supply then position the TCG switch at R RUN Cautions in switching the power source from battery to external power supply Connect the DC IN socket with the external power supply before removing the battery pack in order to keep the time code generator energised If the battery pack is removed first there is no guarantee that the time code will stay externally locked External synchronisation of the camera when the time code is externally locked When the time code is externally locked the reference video signals input through the GENLOCK IN connector gen lock the camera Notes To externally lock the unit as the master device with more than one unit the mode must be the same as that of the cam
217. ic range stretcher mode 20 WHITE BAL switch position 21 Stored gain indication 22 Gain value 00 0000 Eeee OOO 23 Audio input channel and level meter All 4ch input information 24 Super black ON 25 Super iris ON 26 Iris override indication 27 Iris F value 28 Zoom indication OJOJOJOJO O IOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOI OO OJOJOJOJO O JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOIOJOJsOJOJOJOJO O JOJOJOJOJO 29 INTERVAL REC PRE RECORDING indication SD memory card remaining free space 30 FILM REC O O O 1 O Not provided when the menu option STATUS is set to OFF which can be found in the lt MODE CHK IND gt screen accessible from the VF page Provided regardless of the menu option setting 76 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays a Display Modes and Setting Changes adjustment Result Messages The messages that appear on the viewfinder screen to indicate changes to settings and adjustment results may be limited or set not to appear through the menu option DISP MODE This menu option can be found in the lt VF DISPLAY gt screen which is accessible from the VF page For directions on navigating the menu see Setting Menu Options page 157 lt VF DISPLAY gt DISP CONDITION NORMAL DISP MODE 13 VF OUT ay VF DTL 13 ZEBRA1 DETECT 070 ZEBRA2 DETECT 085 ZEBRA2 SPOT
218. ically stored in the memory Notes Ensure that the lens connector is connected and the lens iris is CLOSE e During a black balance adjustment light is automatically cut off During a black balance adjustment the gain switchover circuit is automatically switched The viewfinder screen may flicker and or display noise this is not a failure lf you find the black shading annoying after performing an auto black balance adjustment adjust the black shading To do so go to the menu option DETECTION move the cursor gt then press the JOG dial button The menu option DETECTION can be found in the lt BLACK SHADING gt screen which is accessible from the MAINTENANCE page By turning on the SHD ABB SW CTL in lt SW MODE gt page 178 and then continuously pressing the ABB switch for 8 seconds or longer black shading can be automatically adjusted after the Auto Black Balance operation While the black shading is being adjusted ensure that the lens iris is closed completely until the B SHD OK message is displayed in the viewfinder However when the remote control unit AJ RC10G optional accessory is connected automatic black shading cannot be executed even if the ABB switch is held down To cancel the automatic black balance adjustment in process the viewfinder displays ABB ACTIVE flip the AUTO W B BAL switch down to ABB again If automatic adjustment is cancelled the value in effect before aut
219. idual information such as the serial number and the user ID P2 Card memory capacity Total Capacity Displays the used memory capacity on a P2 card and the total capacity in minutes Because fractions are truncated the figure shown for used memory capacity on a P2 card may differ from the figure for total capacity The used memory capacity of a write protected P2 card is displayed as 100 Total used memory capacity for all slots Displays the total used memory capacity for all 5 slots Warning symbol When the following P2 card is detected the fj symbol is displayed RUN DOWN CARD The volume of data on the card exceeds the limit defined in the standards DIR ENTRY NG CARD The directory structure on the P2 card does not com ply with the standards The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card detailed information indication in 2 P2 Card Status remaining free space sreuquiny ym sdo Bulyejndiueyy Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Properties 131 E SD memory card Status Display The status display enables a confirmation of the SD memory card formatted condition available memory capacity etc From the thumbnail DEVICES SD CARD If the format is compatible with SD standards the message SD STANDARD SUPPORTED is displayed If the format is not compatible with SD standards the message SD STANDARD NOT SUPPORTED is displayed If this is the case writing or reading will not be successful
220. iewer to enter correct characters CANNOT REPAIR IN Some of the selected clip could not be SELECTION repaired NO SD CARD No SD card is inserted Insert an SD card NO COPY TO SAME A clip cannot be copied to the card storing Copy the selected clip to a card that does not CARD the original clip contain the original clip SAME CLIP IS f Confirm the selected clip and release either the Images cannot be copied since the clip has H SELECTED i B source clip or the destination clip and then execute already been copied from the original clip the copy operation USER CLIP NAME Characters in the clip name had to be The user clip name plus the counter value can only MODIFIED deleted in adding the counter value contain up to 100 bytes Characters in the clip name are automatically deleted when the total exceeds 100 bytes TOO MANY CLIPS Too many clips are selected Reduce the number of selected clips LACK OF REC There is not enough recording capacity left Insert a card with sufficient recording capacity CAPACITY on the card UNMATCHED RE The format of the clip which is playing back Set the format in the SYSTEM MODE item The FORMAT and the selected format of this unit are not SYSTEM MODE is selected from the SYSTEM matched SETTING page MISSING CLIP A shot mark will be added to the clips Insert all P2 cards with recorded clips and confirm recorded on multiple P2 cards when all P2 that the i incomplete clip indic
221. iewfinder 13 14 117 9 Eyepiece Note Do not leave the eyepiece aimed at the sun Doing so may damage the internal components 10 Diopter adjustment ring Use this to make adjustments in line with your diopter in order to obtain optimum clarity in the viewfinder image The adjustable range of the viewfinder view angle is i Y Viewfinder optional accessory shown in the following table D During recording or playback the viewfinder displays Product Number Adjustable range the video image in monochrome It also displays AFAVERIG warnings messages zebra patterns markers safety AJ VF20WBP jo bie tad m zone and center markers etc AJ VF20WBE D AJ VF15BP a ZEBRA zebra pattern switch AJ VF15BE A ie aoe 5 This switch is used to display the zebra pattern in the For an eyepiece for presbyopia consult the dealer viewfinder 2 ON Zebra pattern displayed 11 Connecting plug OFF No zebra pattern displayed 12 Locking ring TALLY switch Used to control the 7 front tally lamp 13 Microphone holder HIGH Front tally lamp brightly illuminated 14 Viewfinder stopper OFF Front tally lamp stays off LOW Front tally lamp dimly illuminated Used to attach or remove the viewfinder PEAKING control Used to adjust the outlines of the video image in the viewfinder for easier focusing This does not affect the signal output from the camera
222. il screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION FORMAT from the thumbnail menu The following screen appears Select SD CARD Select EXIT if formatting is not required ALL oz THUMBNAIL OPERATION gt PROPERTY META DATA HDD EXIT FORMAT REPAIR C RE CONN COPY EXCH TH DEVICE 3 The following screen appears Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES ALL as 12 THUMBNAIL OPERATION PROPERTY META DATA HDD EXIT a a SD CARD EXIT 4 The SD memory card is formatted Note SD memory cards can also be formatted from the menu screen For more information see To format an SD memory card page 84 sreuquiny ym sdo Bulyejndiueyy Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Formatting SD memory cards 127 Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode The thumbnail display mode can be customised to suit THUMBNAIL SIZE your preferences For the size of thumbnails displayed on one screen either LARGE 3 x 2 thumbnails displayed or 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button NORMAL 4 x 3 thumbnails displayed can be The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor selected The factory default value is NORMAL THUMBNAIL INIT 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select Return the above thumbnail display settings to THUMBNAIL gt SETUP from thethumbnail menu default Move the cursor to this option and press the The following screen appears SET b
223. in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 1 87 CAC FILE CARD READ LENS FILE Items Adjustable Reniarks Items Adjustable Remark Data Saved Range Data Saved Range CARD READ 1 For selecting the number for performing FILE NO 1 Select the lens file number SELECT the color astigmatism correction data h 32 operation READ DELETE that is F 8 ne ef recorded on the SD memory card READ Readthe lens file data READ For reading the CAC FILE from the SD memory card When this is selected the pie a Pied a SEMER display moves to the FILE READ WRITE Write the lens file data screen DELETE For deleting the CAC FILE on the SD memory card TTT PTT eee RESET ALL For resetting the all data of the lens file TITLE READ For reading the name of the CAC FILE on the SD memory card Slee lalele TITLE1 8 kxx X Up to 12 letters can be set for the title TITLE 1 For scrolling the CAC files on the SD RAEAN NAME SCROLL memory card Select this with the 25 cursor press the JOG dial button and then turn the JOG dial button to scroll the CAS files LENS FILE CARD R W 01 32 For indicating the file names of 01 to 32 up to 27 characters Items Adjustable Ss eee Data Saved Ra
224. ined data on the partition Note Press the cursor button gt to switch to the PARTITION NAME Press the lt 1 button to return to the original model name display HDD EXPLORE PARTITION NAME HDD PARTITION TYPE S P2 HD CONTENTS TEST PART 3 PART 1 VENDOR Panasonic MODEL xx012345 SIZE 55 9 GB USED 37 4 GB 5 CARDS REMAIN 18 5 GB DvcpRo zis MENU MENU SET THUMBNAIL lt 4 PARTITION INFO Enter the PARTITION NAME from the software keyboard by selecting CHANGE PARTITION NAME in the OPERATION MENU while the thumbnail of the hard disk drive is displayed Max 20 characters ALL HDD THUMBNAIL OPERATION PROPERTY EXIT IMPORT FORMAT HDD CHANGE PARTITION NAME EXIT a LT be 00 00 29 24 00 00 48 09 00 00 40 06 00 00 56 29 SERIAL AZBO4D0059 MODEL AJ P2CO004HG NUMBER 5 PARTITION TYPE S DATE 2006 MAR 21 TIME 02 26 24 VERIFY ON FINISHED NAME PART 1 ALL HDD 01 PARTITION NAME UU UU VU 12 05 PART 1ff UU UU 16 26 UU UU ZU 11 UU 0U 24 06 ee Ar i T ka 00 00 29 24 AZB04D0059 Lakel mi AJ P2C004HG 9 DATE TIME This section indicates the date and time the data on the partition was recorded 10 SERIAL This section indicates the serial number of the P2 card that originally contained the data on the partition 11 12 VERIFY This section indicates the verification setting and results at
225. ing and OBJECT object of shooting MEMO Displays NO the number of the text memo OFFSET location of the frame where the text memo is added PERSON person who recorded the text memo added to the clip and TEXT contents of the text memo SHOOT NEWS sreuquiny ym sdo Bulyejndiueyy Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Setting of Clip Meta Data 123 THUMBNAIL Displays the location of the frame frame offset 3 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer Then and the size height and width of the image selected as the thumbnail image 1 The USER CLIP NAME recording method is selectable For details refer to Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording method page 125 2 Be sure to enter TEXT when entering MEMO It is not possible to record only PERSON or OFFSET Note AJ HPX3000 only displays printable ASCII characters E Checking and modifying read metadata The camera recorder allows you to check the details of press the SET button This allows you to view the settings of the read metadata META DATA IE REC META DATA USER CLIP NAME REC OFF CREATOR META NAME LACT LIDDATE DERSON BESE read metadata 4 While viewing the settings for the metadata use the 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select METADATA PROPERTY from the thumbnail menu Then the screen like this is d
226. ing on the power again confirm the time code and reset if necessary Note When the POWER switch has been switched ON OFF ON the backup accuracy of the time code in free run mode is about 2 frames E Externally Locking the Time Code The unit s internal time code generator can be locked to an external generator In addition the external time code generator can be locked to the unit s internal generator Example of connections for external locking As the figure shows connect both the reference video signal and reference time code Example 1 When locking onto an external signal Reference time GENLOCK IN Reference video signal Note In place of the HD Y reference signal composite video signals can be input as the reference video signal Example 2 When connecting a multiple number of units and using one of them as the reference unit _ _1C_OUT __ MON OUT or VIDEO OUT VBS k TCIN p GENLOCK IN ja STOUT MON OUT or VIDEO OUT VBS I l MON OUT or VIDEO OUT VBS To the next camera Note The system can be configured with multiple units by opening the lt GENLOCK gt screen from the SYSTEM SETTING page and setting the GL PHASE item to the connector using menu operations The phase of the time code can correspond to either the HDY output signals of the MON OUT connector or VBS output signals of the VIDEO OUT and MON OUT
227. ing on the power may cause a malfunction We recommend using an external DC power supply with double the capacity of the total power consumption of the unit and any other connected device that is turned by interlocking with the power on of the unit the viewfinder Select the DC cord that is recommended for the external DC power supply Confirm the pin arrangements of the DC output connector of the external DC power supply and the DC IN socket on the unit and connect the proper polarities to each other If the 12 V power supply is connected to the GND connector in error it may cause a fire or failure of the unit Pin No Signal J 1 4 1 GND O2 30 O O 2 3 4 12V DC IN Socket 104 Preparation Power Supply Notes if both the battery pack and the external DC power supply are connected the electric power is supplied from the external DC power supply While the external DC power supply is used the battery can be mounted and removed on from the unit When the external DC power supply is used ensure that the power switch of the external DC power supply is turned on first and then the POWER switch on the unit is turned on In the case of the reverse operation a malfunction may occur on the unit since the output voltage of the external DC power supply is raised slowly Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments Mounting the
228. ion see 1394 Error Codes page 152 WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second while the WARNING lamp recording is continuing Blinks 4 times per second while the TALLY Display window indication If the error occurs during recording 00 0000 11 appears as the time code indication The indication continues to flash after recording is stopped and until the next operation is performed There is no indication if the error occurs during playback Tay lamp LAMP recording is continuing In the case of Error Code 92 1394 INITIAL ERROR indicator lights up during pause Viewfinder and recording For Error Codes other than Error Code 92 or if REC SIGNAL is set to 1394 no error is displayed in the viewfinder WARNING lamp If the error occurs during recording the lamp flashes four times per second for a period of about three seconds The lamp does not light if the error occurs during playback Warning tone Beeps 4 times per second while ALARM recording is continuing If the error occurs during recording the lamp flashes four times per second for a period of Tally lamp about three seconds The lamp does not light if the error occurs during playback A flashing CARD ERR appears In the Viewfinder actual indication the is replaced by the slot number of the P2 card that triggered the error Warning tone If the error occurs during recording the tone sounds fo
229. is changed by the oe DIONIC90 litem settings selected on the BATTERY erie A A Oe ite heka DIONIC160 SETTING1 page 182 and BATTERY NP L7 SETTING2 page 183 menus C U F ENDURA7 The initial value for TYPE A is set to CARDEND JON Select whether or not to set the alarm to ENDURA10 DIONIC90 while the same for TYPE B is ALARM OFF beep for P2 CARD END ALARM ENDURA D set to HYTRON140 ICIU F PAG L95 oe P a ee CARD 3min i Set the length of time for one segment BP L65 95 ee joes Spt Pee Seka IS HO a REMAIN 5min m m of the P2 card s remaining capacity NICD14 f indicator bars TYPE A 3min m One segment represents 3 C U F TYPEB minutes EXTDCIN JAC ADPT Set the remaining capacity detection 5min m One segment represents 5 SELECT PROPAC14 type when a battery is connected to the C UIF minutes TRIMPAC14 DC IN connector Remaining capacity HYTRONSO detection is also performed according to The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the HYTRON140 the selected battery type DIONIC90 The variable range is changed by the DIONIC160 litem settings selected on the BATTERY NP L7 SETTING1 page 182 and BATTERY ENDURA7 SETTING2 page 183 menus ENDURA10 Analog voltage is displayed on the ENDURA D Viewfinder screen PAG L95 When BP GL65 or BP GL95 a battery BP L65 95 made of Sony is used set this to BP NICD14 L65 95 preset mode TYPE A
230. is not output and the camera recorder operates in power saving mode CAM OFF Note that the audio output is synchronised with the video For types of video outputs see Settings of signals output from VIDEO OUT connector page 80 or Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector page 81 Notes During recording this switch does not switch output signals before stopping the recording operation When CAM is not selected through the REC SIGNAL menu option the output signals are the same as for MEM even if the switch is set to CAM The menu option REC SIGNAL is found in the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page 20 Parts and their Functions Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section 20 21 22 23 24 20 26 21 28 29 REW rewind button and lamp During pause this button performs a fast reverse playback with the lamp blinking During playback it performs an approximately 4x fast reverse playback with the PLAY and REW lamps blinking If this button is pressed when playback is paused the start of the clip being played back is located in pause mode STOP button This button stops playback FF fast forward button and lamp During pause this button is used to perform fast playback with the lamp blinking During playback it performs an approximately 4x fast playback with the PLAY and FF lamps blinking If this button is pressed when playback is paused
231. ished by the SD Association in 2006 The SD card logo is a registered trademark MMC MultiMediaCard is a registered trademark of Infineon 33 REMOTE remote control connector Technologies AG The remote control unit AJ RC10G optional i ted here z i ala 36 BUSY operation mode display lamp Note This lamp indicates the active status of the SD For software of the AJ RC10G use Version 1 10 00 memory card 000 or higher It stays illuminated when the card is active Note 34 OPTION SLOT While the lamp is on do not insert or remove the card Attach the video encoder card AJ YAX800G optional For information about the installation and proxy recording see the AJ YAX800G_ instruction manual 22 Parts and their Functions Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section Menu Operation Section 1 MENU button Used to turn on off the menu 2 JOG dial button With the menu open this button is used to navigate through menu pages select options and specify RAYA J OSs2 values l l l l 600 o For directions on manipulating the menu see Setting Poa 4 Menu Options page 157 0 O SD memory card insertion slot 9 S 9 A D c An SD memory card optional accessory is inserted K ENY ee AAA here It is used when writing or saving menu data or ale G a j te 5 lens files on an SD memory card RAAS N 4 BUSY operation mode display lamp This lamp indica
232. isplayed META DATA P2 alle REG META DATA REC OFF CREATOR Laub ELISE LAST UPDATE PERSON SHOOT PLACE NAME SCENARIO NEWS MEMO 124 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Setting of Clip Meta Data cursor buttons to move the pointer to the desired option Then press the SET button A software keyboard screen is displayed allowing you to modify the setting META DATA IE REC META DATA USER CLIP NAME To set whether or not the uploaded metadata is recorded Set ON OFF in META DATA gt RECORD from the thumbnail menu The factory setting is OFF Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording method f Select META DATA gt USER CLIP NAME from the thumbnail menu to select the recording method Two options are available TYPE1 and TYPE2 TYPE1 Factory setting USER CLIP NAME to be recorded If clip metadata has been read in Uploaded data If no clip metadata has been read in or if the setting for recording Fame aS GTOBAL CEIRD clip metadata has been turned off UMID data TYPE2 USER CLIP NAME to be recorded Uploaded data COUNT If clip metadata has been read in value If no clip metadata has been read in or if the setting for recording clip metadata has been turned off Same as CLIP NAME The COUNT value is indicated as a four digit number The COUNT value is incremented each time a new clip is captured if clip metadata has been r
233. isplayed move the arrow cursor to YES by turning the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button DELETE _ Af Arrr 1 2 3 4 5 6 To delete the CAC FILE from the SD memory card Open lt CAC FILE CARD READ gt from the FILE page using the menu operation The following screen is displayed gt lt CAC FILE CARD READ gt CARD FILE SELECT 01 READ DELETE TITLE READ TITLE SCROLL 01 01 HA22X7 8BERM M58 02 HA16X6 3BERM M58 03 HJ17EX7 6B IASE 04 HJ22EX7 6B IASE 05 NO FILE 06 NO FILE 07 NO FILE 08 NO FILE Select TITLE READ using the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button The lens product number is displayed in the TITLE part Select CARD FILE SELECT using the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button Select the TITLE NO of the CAC FILE to be deleted and then press the JOG dial button Select DELETE using the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button The following screen is displayed DELETE 5 gt Nd t Move the arrow cursor to YES by turning the JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial button Adjustments and Settings for Recording Chromatic Aberration Compensation CAC Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy 99 If the following messages are displayed when the JOG dial button is pressed the data cannot be deleted Error message Measures DELETE
234. it is turned on Read the CAC FILE that is applicable for the lens to be used CAC LENS DATA INVALID When the unit cannot respond to the return data from the lens or when any responses other than ones as defined in the CAC FILE are returned This lens does not support CAC correction Although it cannot execute CAC correction using this lens presents no problems Initialization of the Turn the focus zoom LENS INITIALIZE lens position ring to through the NOT detection focus intermediate point of COMPLETED zoom in the encoder the operation range type is not completed yet DELETE OK Notes When lens optical accessories converter lens attach J ment are installed the CAC may not operate properly due to changes in the optical characteristics of the lens In this case turn off the CAC function When focus support is used with CANON lenses data must be recorded after initialization in the automatic initial ization mode The state where the focus ring is moving may be recorded When the CAC does not operate and no error message is displayed the version of the software for the lens may be out of date and invalid Please contact the lens manufac turer 100 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Chromatic Aberration Compensation CAC Preparation Power Supply A battery pack or an external DC power supply can be used as AJU HPX3000 s power supply Using a
235. ite balance adjustment method to the thumbnail of that clip This button also adds a shot mark to any thumbnail selected on the LCD PRST Use this when you have no time to adjust the monitor Y white balance i For more information on shot marks see Shot Mark The value for the white balance is factory set Function page 42 to 3200 K This button cancels the revised set value when the It can be changed to any color temperature menu is displayed using a menu option For more information see Setting Color Temperature Manually 13 Text memo button Records a text memo if pressed during recording or playback or when playback is paused Parts and their Functions Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section 19 suol ouN Jay PUL Sed 14 15 16 17 SAVE ON OFF switch Used to select the power supply method for each output section ON The output selected through the menu option SAVE SW is power saved This option can be found on the OPTION MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page OFF Power saving is canceled Note The ON OFF switch does not function during record ing The ON OFF status changes after recording is completed VIDEO OUT output signal selector switch Changes the mode of the signals output through the VIDEO OUT connector HDSDI HD SDI signals are output When the camera recorder is in SD mode SD SDI signals are output SD SDI SD SDI signals are output VBS Composite video
236. item e Need eee ee Ren ceraivly gine OFF set to ON Adjustment to F16 will be 000 a a Fe ted on the executed on the lens TTET i200 LENS R 000 For adjusting the flare level of Rch FLARE ioo BLACK SHADING J FJ LENS G 000 For adjusting the flare level of Gch Items Adjustable FLARE 100 DataSaved Range Remarks CORRECT JON ON OFF switching for digital black F OFF shading compensation LENS B 000 For adjusting the flare level of Bch FLARE C U F R ioo DETECTION Execute digital black shading S FIF DIG compensation aS Data adjusted on the LENS FILE ADJ screen can be stored on an SD memory card as a lens file WHITE SHADING The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range CORRECT JON ON OFF switching for white shading OFF compensation C U F R R H SAW 255 For executing the white shading R H PARA compensation manually R V SAW 000 The sawteeth shaped waveform and the R V PARA 255 parabola waveform of the respective G H SAW RGB channels are adjusted in the G H PARA horizontal direction and the vertical G V SAW direction G V PARA B H SAW B H PARA B V SAW B V PARA Fl 190 Menu Menu Description Tables
237. ition you can use the copy function for each text memo block to take only the necessary portions out of a clip i Front mounted Sound Level Control Mechanism AJ HPX3000 features a front mounted control for fine adjustment of the sound recording level This control is particularly effective for adjusting the sound level when you are shooting without a sound recordist The control can be disabled Refer to page 16 Wi Support for Built in Unislot Wireless Receive AJ HPX3000 is designed to support an optional slot in wireless receiver Refer to page 108 Hi Recording Review Capability This capability automatically plays back the last 2 to 10 seconds of recorded video allowing you to quickly check the recorded contents Wi Built in Time Code Generator reader A special purpose Subcode track can be used to record and reproduce time code information Hi Support for Metadata AJ HPX3000 is capable of recording positional information latitudes longitudes and altitudes as UMID information metadata from the GPS unit AJ GPS910G optional accessory Names titles can also be recorded e g the camera person the reporter or the program which was registered on the SD memory card in advance This information is also useful in managing information on clips Regarding SD memory cards please also see lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt page 22 10 General Features of Recorder player unit Wi Recording Time Operation of the fo
238. justable Range column indicates the to scroll the CAC files preset mode 01 32 The file names from 01 to 32 are displayed with up to 27 characters 188 Menu Menu Description Tables SCENE INITIALIZE Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range READ USER Read out the data from the user area in READ The menu MAIN MENU OPTION DATA the memory FACTORY MENU values are all reset to factory eames pea on pa DATA settings Note 1 SCENE SEL 7 Select ie Scene wile The settings for the following are not 4 reset to the factory set values RSSB Scene file READ Read the scene file User data Lens file E n ea _ _ _ _ _ Black shading data WRITE Write the scene file WRITE USER Save the user preference menu data in DATA the camera s internal memory RESET Reset the scene file values to the initial values ni SAARE a For a USB DEVICE mode errors occur even if the READ ee Create the Scene fiig ttie FACTORY DATA item is executed since it does notaccess gt a ae Pa an SD memory card Set PC MODE to OFF and then D execute the operation again c Note The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the For a USB DEVICE mode errors occur even if the READ preset mode USER DATA item is executed since it does not access an SD memory card Set PC MODE to OFF
239. ke several seconds for the system to operate stably when the input signals are switched or operation is transferred from one mode to another Perform recording operation after the system operation has stabilized For recording data using the IEEE1394 interface input selection or for signals output from the IEEE1394 interface the AUDIO LEVEL Volume on the side panel is disabled When camera recorder is controlled through PC application software etc take note of the following The scene to scene continuity recording from an arbitrary position on the clip is not possible Recording will always continue immediately after the latest clip Software must be used under the condition where the camera recorder thumbnail screen is closed The application software may not be able to apply control when the thumbnail screen is open During special playback video and audio signals which have not been processed as the output signals of the IEEE1394 interface will be output When these video and audio signals are monitored on another device they may be at variance from the video and audio signals which are played back by camera recorder 134 Connection with external device Connection through the DVCPRO connector Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port I Connection with a PC in the USB DEVICE mode By connecting AJ HPX3000 with an external PC using USB 2 0 the P2 card connected to AJ HPX3000 can be used as a m
240. l button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button The data stored in the scene file area of the internal memory of the unit is read to complete the setting 8 To exit the menu press the MENU button QQ Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data To return data for scene files to their defaults 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SCENE gt screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option SCENE SEL 3 Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers Then turn the dial button to select the scene file that you want to reset lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL Ha READ WRITE RESET TITLE1 ttrt TITLE2 teteenee TITLE3 tetereee TITLE4 tteeeeee 4 Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file 5 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option RESET lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL id READ WRITE RESET TITLE1 otetereee TITLE2 teteenee TITLE3 tetereee TITLE4 2 teeters 6 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message RESET RP gt NO RIFET 7 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button The data stored in the scene file area of the internal memory of the unit is reset to the defaults 8 To exit the menu press the MENU button To title settings data for scene files 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SCENE gt screen 2 Tur
241. l does not change enabled when the front by turning the volume control microphone is selected FRONT Only enabled when FRONT is W L The microphone low cut filter is selected enabled only when the wireless W L Only enabled when WIRELESS microphone is selected is selected REAR The microphone low cut filter is REAR Only enabled when REAR is enabled only when the rear selected clulFl microphone is selected u F ALES Enabled torany input selected LIMITER CHT ON Select the limiter FRONT VR OFF Select whether or not to enable the OFF The limiter is enabled when AUDIO CH2 FRONT FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control for the clu F SELECT CH1 switch is set to MAN W L signal selected as an input signal to LIMITER CH2 ON Select the limiter REAR AUDIO CH2 OFF The limiter is enabled when AUDIO ALL OFF Disabled for any input selected SELECT CH2 switch is set to MAN Recording level does not change lelulFl by turning the volume control FRONT Only enabled when FRONT is AUTO LEVEL ON Select the level setting method selected CH3 OFF For more information see CH3 and W L Only enabled when WIRELESS CH4 Recording Levels page 54 is selected C U F REAR Only enabled when REAR is AUTO LEVEL ON Select the level setting method selected CH4 OFF For more information see CH3 and IclulF ALL Enabled for any input selected CH4 Recording Levels page 54 MIC LOWCUT OFF Select the microphone low cut filter for C U F CH1 F
242. l source FRONT MIC IN 1 GND LCH IN H L CH IN C R CHIN H ol A Wj N RCH IN C AUDIO IN 1 GND 2 AUDIO IN H 3 AUDIO IN C AUDIO OUT 1 GND L CH OUT H L CH OUT C R CH OUT H ol A j N R CH OUT C Matsushita part number K1AB105B0002 Maker part number NC5FBH NEUTRIK Matsushita part number K1AB103A0011 Maker part number HA16PRM 3SG Hirose Denki PUSH Matsushita part number K1AA105H0016 Maker part number HA16RD 5P 76 Hirose Denki DC OUT 1 GND 2 R TALLY Open collector REC START SW 12V OUT Max 1 5 A Matsushita part number K1AY104J0001 Maker part number HR10A 7R 4SC 73 Hirose Denki Connector at the cable side Maker part number HR10A 7P 4P 73 Hirose Denki suondedsu pue soueusjuley Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance 145 REMOTE 1 CAM DATA H Data from the camera to the remote control H 2 CAM DATA C Data from the camera to the remote control C 3 CAM CONT H Control signals from the remote control to the camera H 4 CAM CONT C Control signals from the remote control to the camera C 5 RC ON Identification signals of the remote control Low ON 6 RC VIDEO OU
243. le Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom operation Turn the manual zoom lever to check that the image changes to telephoto and wide angle Set the iris to automatic adjustment mode and aim the lens at objects with different degrees of brightness to check that the automatic iris adjustment operates normally Set the iris to manual adjustment mode and turn the iris ring to check the manual iris adjustment 142 Maintenance and Inspections Inspections Before Shooting 5 While holding down the instant iris automatic adjustment button aim the lens at objects with different degrees of brightness to check that the instant iris automatic adjustment operates properly Return the iris to automatic adjustment mode and change the GAIN switch setting to L M and H to check the following items The iris is adjusted for objects with the same brightness according to the switch setting The gain value displayed on the viewfinder screen changes according to the switch setting When a lens with an extender is mounted set the extender to the operating position to check that the extender operates properly E Inspecting the Memory Recording Functions Make sure you successively carry out the inspections from 1 Inspecting the P2 Card Recording to 4 Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker 1 Inspecting the P2 Card Recording 1 Check on the display inside the viewfinder that the remaining P2 card recording capa
244. le TABLE A when the GAIN switch is in the M S C U F R 63 s clu F IB position G 63 For performing the color saturation mH MATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table SAT 00 Poregupi ongeeni TABLE A when the GAIN switch is in the H T slclulF B position S C U F R 63 G YI 63 For performing the color saturation SAT 00 correction between green and yellow Note 00 The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT siclulF R 63 MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt yi 63 For performing the color saturation screen The items without are the setting items for SAT w correction of yellow PAINT MENU LEVEL R W ae Please refer to SD CARD R W SELECT page 187 for S C U F R 63 more information he 5 For eee the sae aaah All of the preset data for the respective linear matrix data of SAT 00 A a a the m MATRIX TABLE B are set to 00 SiclulFIR 63 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 165 LOW SETTING Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Rang
245. led the SDI OUT IN option connector becomes the SDI IN connector and SDI OUT signals are not output SDI OUT IN switching is not performed automatically 914 p eUJ9 X9 ULIM UOIO UUOD Connection with external device Connection using the SDI IN connector when AJ YA350AG attached 141 Maintenance and Inspections Inspections Before Shooting Make sure you check that the system is operating normally before embarking on a shoot We recommend using a color video monitor to check the image F Preparing for Inspections Mount a charged battery pack Turn the power switch ON and check that 5 or more BATT indication marks appear f fewer than 5 BATT indication marks appear replace the battery with a fully charged battery E Inspecting the Camera Unit 1 3 Insert a P2 card into the card slot and close the slide cover Confirm that the P2 card access LED for the inserted card slot lights up in orange If P2 cards are inserted into multiple card slots only the P2 card access LED for the first inserted P2 card lights up in orange Then the other P2 card access LEDs light up in green when P2 cards are inserted If the access LED for the P2 card slot in which a P2 card is inserted keeps blinking in green or if there is no display recording is not possible on that particular P2 card Set the zoom to electric zoom mode and check the zoom operation Check that the image changes to telephoto and wide ang
246. les 1 ma LENS FILE DATA DATA READ USER data i LENS file nT o LENS FILE No of files 1 WRITE No of files 8 READ FACTORY DATA FACTORY data Revision disable LENS FILE CARD R W LENS FILE CARD R W No of files 1 READ WRITE Files built in the unit Menu operations 82 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data SD memory card Lens file i No of files 8x8 It is possible to write eight titles for eight lens files on the SD memory card Setting Data Using an SD memory card An SD memory card optional accessory can be used as a setup card that stores up to eight files of settings menu specifications This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum state Regarding SD memory cards please see lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt page 22 Handling SD memory cards An SD memory card may be inserted or removed either before or after the power is turned on To insert an SD memory card Open the lid of the switch cover and insert an SD memory card optional accessory into the SD memory card slot with the notch upward Close the lid Note An SD memory card must be inserted with the right side facing the slot If the card is hard to insert it may be reversed or upside down Do not force it into the slot Check the card before re inserting it To remove the SD memory card Open the lid of the switch cover and ensure
247. level setting s clu F 6s s clu F 6s V DTLLEVEL 00 For performing the vertical detail V DTLLEVEL 00 For performing the vertical detail ip correction level setting io correction level setting s clu F si s clulF DTLCORING 00 For performing the noise elimination DTLCORING 00 For performing the noise elimination level setting for detail 2 level setting for detail 02 03 s c u F i5 S C U F 15 H DTL FREQ 00 For performing the horizontal detail H DTL FREQ 00 For performing the horizontal detail frequency selection frequency selection D 18 18 5 c C U F 31 SIC U F 31 LEVEL 0 For setting the LEVEL DEPEND LEVEL 0 For setting the LEVEL DEPEND DEPEND 1 When the Y detail is emphasized DEPEND When the Y detail is emphasized details of dark sections are 3 details of dark sections are 5 compressed 5 compressed If the numerical value is larger details of If the numerical value is larger details of siclulFl bright sections are also compressed siclulFl bright sections are also compressed MASTER 0 30 For setting the master gamma 0 01 MASTER 0 30 For setting the master gamma 0 01 GAMMA ste GAMMA ste 6 45 p 6 55 p s clulF 0 75 C U F 0 75 BLACK 3 For setting the gamma curve for the BLACK 3 For setting the gamma curve for the GAMMA dark portion GAMMA dark portion OFF 3 to 1 OFF 3 to 1 3 The dark portion is compressed 43 The dark portion is compressed OFF OFF Standard s
248. lip property and the shooting date shown when DATE is selected under the item DATA DISPLAY 128 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode Properties The clip s properties and the P2 card s status are displayed It is possible to edit and rewrite recorded clip metadata while clip properties are displayed L Clip Property From the thumbnail menu select PROPERTY CLIP PROPERTY The following screen appears PROPERTY USER CLIP NAME VIDEO 00018K 00 00 00 12 940F3082 16 MAY 2007 15 38 06 GMT 09 00 DURATION 00 00 07 10 V_FORMAT DV100_1080 59 94i FRAME RATE 59 94i SCENARIO NEWS MEMO THUMBNAIL REC RATE 1 Clip Number 2 Thumbnail 3 Clip Information Indicates the indicators added to the clip and the number of text and voice memos added to the clip The mark appears if the clip is recorded on a write protected P2 card Note AJ HPX3000 is not capable of recording or playing back voice memos B Modification of recorded clip metadata 4 5 Clip Information Displays detailed information about the clip CLIP NAME Display clip names START TC The time code value at the start of the recording START UB The user bit value at the start of the recording DATE The date of the recording TIME The time at the start of the recording DURATION The time length of the clip V FORMAT The recording format for the clip FRAME R
249. llowing P2 cards with AJ HPX3000 has been verified AJ P2C004HG 4 GB AJ P2C008HG 8 GB AJ P2C016RG 16 GB The model numbers and capacities are accurate as of August 2007 but may change to expand capacity The AJ P2C002SG 2 GB is disabled Recording Time on P2 Cards When one 16 GB card is used HD Mode Recording method and Recording time Image system DVCPRO HD AVC iIntra100 AVC Intra50 1080 59 94i Approx Approx Approx 50i 16 minutes 16 minutes 32 minutes 1080 30PN Approx Approx 25PN Native 16 minutes 32 minutes 1080 24PN _ Approx Approx Native 20 minutes 40 minutes 1 Including 30P 24P and 25P pull down of the DVCPRO HD SD Mode Recording method and Recording time Image system DVCPRO 50 480 59 94i 576 50i Approx 32 minutes 2 Including 30P 24P and 25P pull down Notes The values for 8 GB cards are 1 2 and the values for 4 GB cards are 1 4 those of 16 GB cards shown above If the one time continuous recording exceeds the duration which is given in the table below when a P2 card with a memory capacity of 8GB or more is used in AJ HPX3000 the recording is automatically continued on a separate clip When performing thumbnail operations such as display delete repair or copy for these kinds of clips using a P2 device it is possible to perform the operations for the entire recording as a single clip However with
250. lor bar complied with the B GAMMA SPLIT SMPTE standards oes ARIB FULL BARS Full color bar DRS SPLIT SPLIT color bar for SNG ASSIST Satellite News Gathering ano et ARIB Color bar complied with the Nini Cho IclulF R ARIB standards REC SW S GAIN OFF L M H For selecting the method used to RET SW S GAIN release the super gain mode PRE REC L M H Disabled when the gain SLOT SEL ae switch io utton is operated C U F R PC MODE S GAIN Disabled only with the S GAIN switch USER ICIUIFIR button The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the 178 Menu Menu Description Tables preset mode Items Adjustable Items Adjustable Data Saved Range Remarks Data Saved Range Remarks DS GAIN OFF L M H For selecting the method used to COLOR TEMP 2300K For setting the color temperature when DS GAIN release the digital super gain mode PRE the WHITE BAL switch is set to the cumulative gain 3200K PRST position L M H The mode is released by 5000K The PRESET color temperature making a change in the L M H selected in TEMP PRE SEL SW is set switch position and the 2300K 8000K DS GAIN switch USER When VAR was selected in TEMP switch PRE SEL SW DS GAIN The mode is released using only the DS GAIN switch 3200K 3200K 5600K USER switch EeOO
251. m 138 Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port A Q 7 Writing data on a hard disc drive Switch the mode to USB HOST For more information see Switching to the USB HOST mode page 136 Connect a hard disc drive via USB A hard disc drive that has not been formatted with the camera recorder must be formatted as directed in Formatting a hard disc drive Insert a P2 card Press the thumbnail button to display the thumbnail screen Press the MENU button and select HDD gt EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu Then specify the slot that contains the P2 card bearing the data to be written to the hard disc drive Select YES to start writing When the data is being written a progress bar is displayed To discontinue writing press the SET button and select YES instead of cancellation confirmation Notes To disable verification at the time of writing select HDD SETUP from the thumbnail menu and set the option VERIFY to OFF This speeds up writing without verifying data writing Select ALL SLOT to write data collectively onto all P2 cards currently inserted in the unit to the hard disk drive When the writing is completed the message COPY COMPLETED is displayed Notes For a Type S hard disc drive data can be written on a card basis The data on up to 23 P2 cards can be stored on the hard disc drive The data set on each P2 card is recogniz
252. maining level voltage XK KV AK EMP MAX Battery remaining level in tenths of a volt The remaining battery level is indicated in percentage This indicates that the battery level is empty This indicates the battery is fully charged 70 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Information Item Indication Status 10 MODE CHECK LOW MID HIGH Value set for the master gain Indication Area 3 to 30 Example LOW 0 STATUS S GAIN 30 36 Gain value to which S GAIN and DS GAIN are assigned Master gain DS GAIN 67 10T 127 USER SW GAIN 15 1 20 1 Cause of LED GAIN 0 dB Gain status illumination displayed GAIN 3 dB Gain status full screen DS GAIN DS GAIN value e Indications selected SHUTTER Shutter status ion WHITE PRE White balance status th hth ti LED are markedwth EXTENDER Extender status EX2 or OFF i B GAMMA BLACK GAMMA status ON or OFF t l MATRIX MATRIX status A B or OFF Indications which may COLOR COR Color correction status ON or OFF activate the LED are FILTER Filter status marked with II FUNCTION OUTPUT MEM CAM OFF Position of OUTPUT SEL switch VIDEO OUT TYPE HD SDI SD SDI VBS Setting for menu option VIDEO OUT switch CHAR ON OFF Position of VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch FUNCTION OUTPUT MEM CAM OFF Position of OUTPUT SEL switch MON OUT SELECT VBS VF Y Signal mode set through the MONITOR OUT menu option CHAR ON OFF Th
253. mation of editing of clips For more information about the approximate duration for proxy recording see Approximate Proxy Recording Time optional on SD memory cards page 11 Please also see lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt page 22 Data protection Data on P2 cards will not be lost due to overwriting unless the files are deleted or the cards are initialised Recordings are written only to free space H HD Format AVC 1100 AVC I50 DVCPRO HD SD Format DVCPRO50 Recorded video is compressed through a component digital recording method that uses a state of the art compression technology and sound is recorded using the non compression PCM recording method which excels in such areas as S N ratio frequency bands waveform properties and reproducibility of fine areas These methods further enhance the quality of images and sound And it is also possible to select AVC Advance Video Coding compression of the ISO IEC14496 10 standard in addition to DVCPRO HD in HD mode The unit performs the in frame compression It is also possible to select DVCPRO HD in addition to H 264 AVC Intra Profile compression in HD mode The unit performs the in frame compression Note When the clip is played back in the format not selected on the menu the picture may be disturbed until the format is detected i 4 channel Digital Audio Recording all formats In HD 1080i mode 4 channel digital audio recording is used All formats in
254. me Data 545 E Recording time code and user bits The number of frames for TC varies with the settings for the input signal system mode and camera mode as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No of No of Recording TC in frames of No of famn soi UB in REC SYSTEM TC in sub TC during frames of UB in sub VIDEO AUX frame VIDEO AUX 3 the SIGNAL MODE 10 code area recording the output _ code area area MODE area VITC displayed and TC TC VITC UB presetting 60i As per the TC As per the TC OUB 30P Over 60i mode mode 30 24 As per the UB mode switchable mode 24P Over 60i Always non Always non 30 oe fr me 24PA Over 60i drop frame drop frame ag information 1080 59 94i 30 30PN Native As pet ine TC As per the TC 30 mode mode Recording As per the UB Always frame Always non Always non erica mode raie ion 8 24PN Native yanan ysnon 24 Playback information drop frame drop frame 30 24 switchable CAM 50i As per the UB o Perme 25P Over 50i mode i 4 4 mode 1080 50i 25 25 25 a ways frame 25PN Native ae per the vB rate mode Panig information 60i As per the TC As per the TC Ga afi 30P Over 60i mode mode zoj A the UB mode see 30 Po switchable mode j Al f 24P Over 60i Always non Always non ae oy 24PA Over 60i drop frame drop frame 2 43 information As per t
255. me differ from the actual local time the time zone may not be set correctly Check again to see if the time zone is set correctly The date and time need not be set again The built in clock operates for several years on a lithium battery built into the camera recorder When the lithium battery is exhausted the viewfinder indicates the message BACKUP BATT EMPTY when the power is turned on For more information see Maintenance page 144 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data 59 Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy le Setting the Time Code 1 Position the DISPLAY switch at TC 2 Position the TCG switch at SET 3 Set the menu option TC MODE to DF or NDF DF steps the time code in drop frame mode and NDF steps it in non drop frame mode However the camera always operates in NDF for 24P 24PA and 24PN Native modes The menu option TC MODE can be found in the lt TC UB gt screen which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page Note Switching between DF and NDF is operative only when the system frequency of the camera recorder is set to 59 94 Hz 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to set the time code The time code setting range extends from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 29 59 94 Hz 23 59 59 23 24PN or to 23 59 59 24 50 Hz gt button Shifts the target blinking digit to the right lt button Shifts the target blinking digit to the left A button Adv
256. mmediately after the power is turned on the menu option PRE REC TIME is selected and or the storage duration is changed the content in internal memory will be undefined In these situations the video or sound will not be recorded for the duration specified even if either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start recording A P2 card that has been just inserted takes some time to recognise In this situation video or sound may not be recorded for the duration specified even if either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start a recording The internal memory does not store video or sound when a playback or recording review is being performed For this reason no video or sound can be recorded during such operation When recording starts the time code indication TCG may be shown as HOLD until the P2 card has been recognised During recording of IEEE1394 input or INTERVAL REC operation PRE RECORDING is not available Loop Recording When two or more P2 card slots contain cards this function allows the target P2 card to be switched in order Even when the free space of a P2 card is used up this function continues recording while erasing existing data To use this function the menu option LOOP REC MODE must be set to ON The option LOOP REC MODE can be found in the lt REC FUNCTION gt screen on the
257. mory card drops below one minute during proxy recording the message is displayed when AJ YAX800G is attached Displayed when full capacity is reached during proxy recording on the SD memory card when AJ YAX800G is attached Displayed when proxy recording stops because of failure on either the video encoder card or the stream when AJ YAX800G is attached Displayed when a failure occurs on the SD memory card during proxy recording and only recording on the SD memory card stops when AJ YAX800G is attached No return video playback or externally input video can be output to the viewfinder The RET button was pressed to regenerate the time code as the time code for the last clip recorded on a P2 card This blinks while the recording slots of P2 cards are switched after pressing the USER switch where the SLOT SEL function is assigned This is displayed if the recording slots of P2 cards cannot be switched when the USER switch where the SLOT SEL function is assigned is pressed This is displayed when the recording starts or completes while a P2 card with an irregular directory arrangement is inserted or data are recorded after inserting an irregular P2 card This is displayed when the recording starts or completes with an expired P2 SLOT1 2 3 4 5 card or when data are recorded after inserting an expired P2 card 14 Time code indication TCG 12 59 59 20 TCG time code generator value TCR 12 59 59 20 TCR time cod
258. mpossible to add delete shot marks t is impossible to add shot marks to incomplete clips refer page 115 For clips recorded on plural P2 cards or clips split on a P2 card refer to Notes on page 10 a shot mark is added to the top clip only Recording Setting and Operation Mode AJ HPX3000 recording mode works according to the priorities outlined in the following table relative to the setting of the menus and switches Menu switches related to system recording Buttons Proxy Functional recording operation mode REC INTERVAL LOOP REC PRE REC Recording a PC MODE SIGNAL RECMODE MODE MODE Text Memo Shot Mark optional USB device Cee Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled USB host USB HOST Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled naan a Input 1394 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled ON or F INTERVAL REC ONE SHOT Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled OFF CAMERA Enabled LOOP REC VIDEO ON 1s 8s Disabled Disabled Disabled SDI optional OFF Normal Recording OFF mee Enabled Enabled _ Enabled Disabled for color bars 42 Recording and Playback Shot Mark Function Adjustments and Settings for Recording Multi Format I Video system and Recording format The unit uses an interlace progressive scan reading all pixels switchable type CCD
259. n will not be interrupted For more information see Warning System page 149 SAVE Lamp In the normal setting The lamp stays on when the SAVE switch is positioned at ON and the output of video and audio is power saved When the menu option SAVE LED is set to P2 CARD The lamp starts blinking when the P2 card remaining free space is getting low The menu option SAVE LED can be found in the lt VF INDICATORS gt which is accessible from the VF page 50 50 Mbps recording playback Lamp In using the SD viewfinder This lamp stays illuminated when the unit is set to the DVCPRO50 50 Mbps format and when playback is being performed in the DVCPRO50 format Note that the lamp is factory disabled For more information see the relevant section of the menu option 50M INDICATOR in VF DISPLAY page 172 E Mode Check Screen Displays MODE CHECK button function The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to check the settings and status of the unit Each press of the MODE CHECK button switches the screen as follows STATUS screen LED screen FUNCTION screen gt AUDIO screen CAC screen No indication Each screen is displayed for about three seconds A press of the MODE CHECK button switches the current screen Whether or not to display each screen is specified through the lt MODE CHECK IND gt screen which is accessible from the VF page lt MODE CHECK IND gt STATU
260. n P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the operating Instructions visit the P2 Support Desk at the following Web sites https eww pave panasonic co jp pro av 14 General System Configuration Parts and their Functions Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section 7 Ss lt O jan Sis Dal gt POWER switch Used to turn on off the power Battery mount A battery pack from Anton Bauer is mounted here DC IN external power input socket XLR 4P camera recorder is connected to an external DC power supply BREAKER switch When an excessive amount of current is fed through the camera recorder due to any abnormal event the breaker automatically turns off the power in order to protect the device After the interior of the camera recorder has been checked and or repaired this button must be depressed If there is no unusual reaction the unit can be powered up GPS connector This connects the optional GPS unit AJ GPS910G Shoulder strap fittings The shoulder strap is attached here Light shoe A video light or similar accessory can be attached here Lens mount bayonet 2 3 type The lens is attached here Lens lever Lower this lever to lock the lens to the lens mount 10 11 12 13 14 15 Lens mount cap To remove the cap raise the 9 lens lever When the lens is not mounted replace the cap Light cable clamp Secures
261. n the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option TITLE 1 4 for the appropriate scene file lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL Hl READ WRITE RESET TITLE1 TITLE ttteeree TITLES ttereeee TITLE4 2 teeters 3 Press the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the title entry area putting the unit in entry mode lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL ial READ WRITE RESET TITLE 2 ottrrreee TITLE ttrrreee TITLES ttttttee TITLES t rra 4 Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears The characters that appear are switched in the following order Space oO y Alphabetical characters A to Z y Numerals 0to9 y Symbols s gt lt g 5 Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character 6 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next digit clockwise and repeat Steps 4 5 to set characters up to eight characters 7 When the title is set turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to 8 Press the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the options TITLE 1 4 9 Turn the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the option WRITE 10 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message WRITE aed ERAIN TITLE gt J 1 1 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button This writes the title into the scene file area of the unit
262. n the camera recorder is in USB HOST mode the viewfinder indicates USB HOST and the USB LED on the side panel stays illuminated If the hard disc drive is not properly connected both indications blink When a user button is assigned the PC MODE on off switching capability you can press that user button to switch between the normal and USB HOST modes For information about how to assign functions to the user buttons see Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons page 51 2 Press the THUMBNAIL button to go to the thumbnail screen Check to see that the screen indicates USB HOST in the lower right corner When a hard disc drive is connected the HDD indication in the upper right corner stays illuminated However if this indica tor illuminates red it means that the hard disk drive cannot be copied Confirm the hard disk drive type For information about the HDD indication see Thumbnail Screen page 114 a Using the USB host mode _ oa ell v 00 00 55 11 B 00 00 00 00 oF 06 re 00 02 33 26 A i 00 03 51 04 00 04 48 26 00 06 47 11 re aT 00 00 45 12 00 09 44 03 00 00 00 00 USB HOST display Note In USB HOST mode clips on P2 cards can be displayed but video from the camera or an external device cannot be recorded Clips written to a hard disc must be written back to a P2 card before it can be played back For information about how to write clips back to P2 cards se
263. n the display window if an error occurs in the camera Confirm the type of warning and refer to the details in the Warning Description Tables page 145 for countermeasures Code No Description Type of warnings E 11 Video initialisation error 1 System Errors E 27 Recording control error 1 System Errors E 30 P2 card removal error 2 Card removal error E 34 LCD microcontroller error 1 System Errors E 38 P2 streaming microcontroller error 1 System Errors E 39 Abnormal initialization of the AVC Intra codec board 1 System Errors E 3F Image sequence error in case of 24P 30P and 25P 6 Image Sequence Error 24P 30P 25P E 40 Microprocessor error in the camera control circuit 1 System Errors E 63 Something is wrong with the system control microprocessor 1 System Errors E 6F Reference signal error 1 System Errors 00 00 00 11 Recording error on a P2 card 7 Recording Error fal 1394 Error Codes Code No Description Indication in display window Signals being input to the DVCPRO connector Stops 1394 E 82 are not 1x speed transfer signals in DVCPRO50 50 Mbps format Incorrect signals are being input to the Stops peers DVCPRO connector 1394 E 84 Signals being input to the DVCPRO connector Stops are not in DVCPRO format Signals being input to the DVCPRO connector Stops 1394 E 85 are not 1x speed transfer signals in DVCPRO The time co
264. n to select the file 1 to 8 to be recorded lt LENS FILE CARD RWW gt gt CARD FILE SELECTI 1 4 READ yyy WRITE TITLE READ TITLE DIAM I 2 3 4 J 4 Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number Give a title to the selected card file 5 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the TITLE item lt LENS FILE CARD RW gt CARD FILE SELECT 1 READ WRITE TITLE READ gt TITLE oND J 2 3 4 J 6 When the JOG dial button is pressed the arrow cursor moves to the title input area and the input mode is established Now perform step 7 on page 93 through step 75 on page 94 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data 95 Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy Loading lens files from the SD memory card 1 Using menu operations open the lt LENS FILE CARD R W gt screen from the FILE page 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the CARD FILE SELECT item 3 Press the JOG dial button and the card file number will flash Turn the JOG dial button to select the file 1 to 8 to be read lt LENS FILE CARD RW gt vhbbay gt CARD FILE SELECTS 1 gt READ EEF WRITE TITLE READ TITLE Onan 1 2 3 3 4 4 Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number Now perform steps 5 through 8 on page 94 Note The card file titles on the
265. n with external devices using the USB 2 0 port 135 Connection using the SDI IN connector when AJ YA350AG attached e eeen 141 Maintenance and Inspections Before Shooting cccccccccccsesecssseesecsssesececeeseeseeeeees 142 Inspections Ma ntenange iii pana S Yala a E ee none a i 144 Warning SySteim ccccccceeeecseeeeeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeesaaeaeeeeea 149 Menu Menu ConfiQUratiOnccccss cssescasoestgacsnssdeasteadtadeasdonusspoenvereuenteetelendes 155 Menu Description Tables 0 cccceecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 159 Updating the firmware incorporated into the cCamera reCOrdel cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 OSC ITI CALLOUS AA EAEE AA A a E EEE poe sir vas a oe gee ee E AAE 194 Attention Adjust the following three settings when using the unit for the first time Adjust the black balance setting when using the unit for the first time Refer to page 48 The unit is delivered from the factory with the color TV standard not yet specified To revise the settings for frame frequency according to the TV standard refer to the procedures described on page 13 Set VF TYPE on the lt SYSTEM MODE gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page depending on your viewfinder The factory setting is set to the HD viewfinder The unit is a solid CCD camera recorder integrating 2 3 inch 2 2 megapixel components that support interlaced progressive drive reading all pixels and record pla
266. nal setup file from the other device will be lost We recommend managing the respective SD memory cards on the respective devices independently 86 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data R SELECT READ W SELECT WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ RRR ERE RRR RE TEETER RRR RE i f 5 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message 6 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button When the data has been read the following message appears READ OK The data will not be read if any of the following messages appears when the JOG dial button is pressed Error message Remedy FORMAT ERROR SD memory card not properly formatted READ NG Insert an SD memory card NO CARD No SD memory card inserted READ NG The card has not been formatted using the unit Replace the card READ NG Write file data NO FILE No file found READ NG Only data written with the unit ERROR is readable SD memory card not readable READ NG Example The SD memory card CANNOT ACCCESS is not accessible because it is SD memory card not being played back accessible After the operation in process read data 7 To exit the menu press the MENU button The settings menu will be replaced by status indications for the unit Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling dat
267. nd Inspections Warning System warning and Error Display for Thumbnail Operation and USB HOST MODE INVALID VALUE Item Message Description Measure CANNOT ACCESS Data cannot be accessed because it is Restore media and clips to normal state before corrupted or for other reasons access WRITE The P2 or SD card is write protected Insert write enabled media PROTECTED CARD FULL The P2 or SD card is full Insert media with sufficient capacity NO CARD No P2 or SD card is inserted Insert compatible media NO FILE The designated file is not found Check the file CANNOT COPY Images cannot be copied Check the conditions for copying CANNOT DELETE Contents version mismatch prevents i Match devices and contents version deletion UNKNOWN N ba a CONTENTS Warning displayed to inoicate contents Match devices and contents version FORMAT version mismatch CANNOT FORMAT P2 card problem prevents formatting Check P2 card CANNOT REPAIR Data cannot be repaired since content that eae Check selected content cannot be repaired is selected CANNOT RE A clip that does not span multiple cannot be CONNECT reconnected Check selected content INVALID VALUE Entered data was invalid Enter data in a valid range UNKNOWN DATA The metad ta character code is invalid Use UTF 8 for the metadata character code Use Thumbnails the v
268. nd use the AUTO W B BAL switch to adjust the white balance automatically AWB Use the AUTO W B BAL switch to adjust the black balance automatically ABB Again use the AUTO W B BAL switch to adjust the white balance automatically AWB 9 Repeat step 7 10 Using the menu operation open the lt WHITE SHADING gt screen from the MAINTENANCE page and a range of items from R H SAW item to B V PARA item so that the waveform is more flat lt WHITE SHADING gt CORRECT ON gt RH SAW 000 R H PARA 000 R V SAW 000 R V PARA 000 G H SAW 000 G H PARA 000 G V SAW 000 G V PARA 000 B H SAW 000 B H PARA 000 B V SAW 000 B V PARA 000 H SAW Before After correction correction Niir Yo o a H PARA 11 When the lens has an extender or ratio converter repeat steps 7 9 to enable the extender or ratio converter function The camera recorder stores as one lens file data item three different correction values for the following a lens with an extender a lens with a ratio converter and a lens with neither of them 106 Preparation Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments When making the white shading correction make the adjustment while observing the R G and B waveforms in the horizontal and vertical directions with the waveform monitor This now completes the white shading adjustments
269. ndicated on some lenses 5 Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position either manually or by electric drive 6 Aim the lens at the flange back adjustment chart and turn the distance ring to bring the chart into focus 7 Set the zoom ring to the wide angle position and turn the Ff ring to bring the chart into focus While focusing take care not to move the distance ring Preparation Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments 105 8 Repeat Steps 5 to 7 until the lens is in focus at both the telephoto and wide angle positions 9 Firmly tighten the F f ring clamping screw Adjusting the Lens White Shading Method to correct the waveform to be more flat by combining the sawtooth shaped waveform and the parabola waveform when watching the respective waveforms of R G and B of the video signals Adjust the white shading in the following manner after turning OFF the DS GAIN Note Coloring may occur in the vertical direction near where the lens aperture is open even when the white shading has been adjusted This is something that is inherent to lenses and optical systems and is therefore not indicative of a failure or malfunctioning 1 Attach the lens to the camera At this stage do not forget to connect the lens cable 2 Set the electronic shutter to OFF and the gain to L 0 dB 3 If the extender is attached to the lens release the extender function 4 Open the lt GAMMA gt sc
270. ng the viewfinder RET SW Notes PRE REC When video signals in a format SLOT SEL different from that for the video mode C U F R PC MODE of the camera recorder return video USERTSW IIN Allocate the USERT button For is not properly displayed S GAIN descriptions of the functions see When the GENLOCK item the DS GAIN __ Assigning Functions to USER MAIN GENLOCK screen on the SYSTEM SIRIS USER1 and USER2 Buttons page 51 SETTING page is set to INT the LOVR return video image may be displayed SBLK C U F R as slightly shaking horizontally B GAMMA S BLK LVL OFF For setting the super black level Y GET 10 DRS ee ASSIST C U F R 30 C TEMP AUTO KNEE JON For selecting ON OFF of the AUTO AUDIO CH1 SW OFF KNEE function and DRS function AUDIO CH2 DRS When it is set to OFF the AUTO KNEE REC SW may not function even if the AUTO RET SW KNEE switch is turned ON PRE REC When the DRS function is enabled and SLOT SEL the AUTO KNEE switch is positioned to C U F R PC MODE slclulF R ON the DRS function turns on USER2 SW INH Allocate the USER2 button For SHD ABB SW JON For the setting to adjust the black S GAIN descriptions of the functions see CTL OFF shading automatically when the AUTO DS GAIN Assigning Functions to USER MAIN W B BAL switch is held to the ABB side S IRIS USER1 and USER2 Buttons page 51 clulF R for 8 seconds or more LOVR COLOR BARS SMPTE For selecting the color bar to be used S BLK FULLBARS SMPTE Co
271. nge nemarks CARD FILE 1 For selecting the number of the lens file FILE READ screen SELECT i in the SD memory card Items Adjustable Remarks READ For reading the lens file data from the Data Saved Range SD memory card TITLE The name of the CAC File selected in ie BEE item onha CAG FIELECARD WRITE For writing the lens file data into the SD is displayed memory card YES The CAC files that are read from the SD memory card are recorded in the built in SEAIS memory of the unit TITLE READ For reading the title of the lens file in the NO CANCEL The CAC files read from the SD SD memory card memory card are not recorded in the built in memory of the unit TITLET 8 kXxXX For setting a title consisting of not more MEM STORE EMPTY EMPTY When data are recorded in kkk than 12 characters NO 1 built in memory of the unit the system searches vacant as fed 32 spaces to record the data 1 32 Data are recorded with the Note selected number If any CAC FILE has already been For a USB DEVICE mode errors occur even if the recorded with that number respective items of LENS FILE CARD R W are executed data are overwritten since it does not access an SD memory card Set PC TITLE 1 The CAC files in built in memory of the MODE to OFF and then execute the operation again SCROLL unit are scrolled Select this item using 25 the cursor and press the JOG dial ate ih button and then turn the JOG dial button The ___ in the Ad
272. nnection is established the P2 card s access LED should not be lit except when access is being carried out When a USB device is active recording playback or navigation through clip thumbnails is disabled During a USB connection the USB LED on the side panel stays illuminated Also USB DEVICE is displayed in the system information warning area in the viewfinder When the connection is not correctly established both of these indications blink USB LED USB DEVICE 6f F iit g L A 1 8dB F 2 g There are two ways to terminate the USB mode as follows Turn the POWER switch of AJU HPX3000 OFF Set the PC MODE item to OFF from the menu operations 914 p eUJ9 X9 UIIM UOIO UUOD Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port 35 E USB HOST mode In this mode it is possible to connect to a hard disc drive HDD store card data EXPORT Refer to Writing data on a hard disc drive page 139 view thumbnails of stored clips EXPLORE Refer to Viewing hard disc drive information page 137 and write data back to P2 cards IMPORT Refer to Writing data back to P2 cards page 139 E Switching to the USB HOST mode 1 By navigating the menu set the PC MODE SELECT menu option on the SYSTEM MODE screen to USB HOST then the PC MODE option to ON This will place the camera recorder in USB HOST mode Whe
273. nput through the DVCPRO connector are recorded the settings above are overridden audio signals from the SDI IN or DVCPRO connector are always recorded E Selecting Audio Input Signals The input signals to be recorded on Audio Channels 1 2 3 and 4 are selected with the AUDIO IN switch For more information see Audio input Function Section page 16 AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switch Display window MONITOR CH1 3 I ST CH2 4 selector switch MONITOR SELECT CH1 2 CH3 4 selector switch LEVEL CH1 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 CH2 controls CH3 CH4 buttons Notes Audio Channels 1 and 2 always receive the signals selected with the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches Four channel recorded audio signals are SDl output as they are Specific audio settings are performed through the lt MIC AUDIO1 gt and lt MIC AUDIO2 gt screens which are accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page For more information see MAIN OPERATION page 181 lt MIC AUDIO1 gt FRONT VR CH1 OFF FRONT VR CH2 OFF MIC LOWCUT CH1 OFF MIC LOWCUT CH2 OFF MIC LOWCUT CH3 OFF MIC LOWCUT CH4 OFF LIMITER CH1 OFF LIMITER CH2 OFF AUTO LEVEL CH3 ON AUTO LEVEL CH4 ON TEST TONE NORMAL lt MIC AUDIO2 gt FRONT MIC POWER ON REAR MIC POWER MONITOR SELECT FRONT MIC LEVEL REAR MIC CH1 LEVEL REAR MIC CH2 LEVEL REAR LINE IN LVL AUDIO OUT LVL HEADROOM WIRELESS WARN ON STEREO 401B
274. o level and level meter F AUDIO IN switch is positioned at FRONT WwW AUDIO IN switch is positioned at W L WIRELESS R AUDIO IN switch is positioned at REAR 24 Super black ON B Super black ON 25 Super iris ON S Super iris ON 26 Iris override Correction phase of the iris override when active indication On the open side by 1 On the open side by 0 5 On the closed side by 1 On the closed side by 0 5 No indication Standard status No indication 27 Iris F value NC Lens cable is not connected OPEN Lens iris is at maximum F1 7 F16 Lens iris value CLOSE Lens iris closed Note These indications are provided when the lens is capable of indicating the iris value When the iris is being overridden they blink 28 Zoom indication Z00 Z99 Zoom degree is indicated This indication is not provided for a lens that does not return the zoom position even if the indication is set to ON 29 INTERVAL REC PRE J Displayed before and after operation during INTERVAL REC mode RECORDING blink Displayed during INTERVAL REC operation indication blink x h m s Displays the pause time before the next recording during INTERVAL REC SD memory card P REC blink Indicated while pre recorded video and audio are being recorded on the P2 remaining free space card If the USER switch is set to perform the PRE RECORDING function either P REC OFF or the specified duration 1s 8s is displayed when the PRE RECO
275. ode 1080 GPS Stays illuminated when radio waves are not received during GPS operation GPSY Stays illuminated when radio waves are received during GPS operation P REC Stays illuminated when the PRE REC MODE is set to ON and blinks when recording is continued after the recording tally lamp has gone out iREC Remains illuminated during INTERVAL REC mode recording and blinks during a pause i Blinks when INTERVAL REC mode is selected J NDFSLAVEHOLDWHD GPSY CTL VTCG TIME DATE P iREC Ci TI T Cece ce ee uh Y minM s D frm MEDIA E mu mu mm m a m F BATT E mu m mm m mm m m F 1 o 1 TEs 10 i i o T Q m D wi 40 m m 00 a LOOP OP SLOT 13 24 J Audio channel level meter When the MONITOR SELECT CH1 2 CH3 4 switch is set to CH1 2 the meter indicates 1 and 2 as the audio channel numbers together with their audio levels When the switch is set to CH3 4 the meter indicates 3 and 4 as the audio channel numbers together with their audio levels Memory action status indication Error Code Indication for more information see Warning System page 149 Q m d NDF SLAVEHOLDWHD GPSY CTL VTCG TIME DATE P iREC Cie Ct Cat mie Oe Oo ce oe h Y minM sD ls 1 o 1 10 MEDIA E mu mu mu mm m ee F BATT E mu m m mm mm m m F es OP SLOT a o T M
276. oduct ID number Note Please refer to Setting UMID Information page 66 for the UMID information setting The preset mode in the Adjustable Range column indicates the Fite SD CARD READ WRITE SD CARD R W SELECT Items Adjustable Boing Items Adjustable R marks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range R SELECT j1 Select the file number to read out SYSTEM ON Specify whether or not to use the MODE RW OFF settings for the options on the SYSTEM F 8 MODE screen when data is read or READ Read out the data from the SD memory Fy written from or to SD memory cards card ID READ ON Select whether or not to include the en fa eae WRITE OFF CAMERA ID when reading out or writing W SELECT i Select the file number to write in Fy to the SD memory card USER MENU JON Select whether or not to include the F 8 SELECT R W OFF FILE MENU SELECT settings when WRITE Write the camera recorder s menu data reading out or writing to the SD memory to the SD memory card F card SYSTEM ON Specify whether or not to use the MENU RW JOFF settings on all screens except the name Format the SD memory card SYSTEM MODE screen on t
277. omatic adjustment will be used Retaining black balances Each value in memory is retained even if the camera recorder is turned off 48 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance Setting the Electronic Shutter This section provides a description of the electronic shutter together with setting and handling directions a Shutter Modes The table below lists the shutter modes in which the unit s electronic shutter can be used as well as the shutter speeds which can be selected Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy To use the fixed shutter speed To use the half shutter speed HALF For eliminating flicker due to lighting For shooting images when adding effects as if taken with For shooting fast moving subjects clearly film To use the shutter speed of SYNCRO SCAN Notes No matter in which mode the electronic shutter is used For shooting monitor screens in a way that minimizes the the higher the shutter speed the lower the camera s pattern of horizontal lines sensitivity For shooting images when adding effects to the subjects When the aperture is in the automatic mode it will movement increasingly open and the depth of focus will become shallower as the shutter speed is increased CAMERA Mode Video system MODE Shutter speed Half shutter speed Variable range for SYNCRO SCAN 1080 59 94i 60i 1
278. on Bauer battery holder includes both a power supply output connector for lighting and a lighting control switch which are convenient when attaching a light Please contact Anton Bauer for information about the lighting system 2 Insert the battery and slide it in the direction of the arrow lt For your information gt Removing the battery pack Completely push down and hold the release lever on the battery holder Then slide the battery pack in the opposite direction to the arrow while holding the lever down 102 Preparation Power Supply 3 Setting the battery type Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT Select BATTERY SELECT from the lt BATTERY P2CARD gt screen in the MAIN OPERATION page Please refer to BATTERY SETTING1 page 182 for more information The following Anton Bauer batteries can be used e PROPAC14 e TRIMPAC14 e HYTRON50 e HYTRON140 e DIONIC90 e DIONIC160 Using an NP 1 type battery pack CAUTION These servicing instructions are for use by qualified service personnel only To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so 1 Remove the battery holder 2 Mount the NP 1 type battery case on the camera recorder Tighten the mounting screws Tighten the power contact screws Insert the upper part of the removed cover in the direction of th
279. on REC SIGNAL is found in the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page For more information see Recording Setting and Operation Mode page 42 Thumbnail operation and menu operation Thumbnail operation does not work during the INTERVAL REC mode operation Press the STOP button before operating thumbnails When standby time is set to 1 minute or more or when in ONE SHOT mode the following restrictions apply even though the menu can be operated during stand by mode The respective settings or SYSTEM MODE REC SIGNAL CAMERA MODE REC MODE 25M REC CH SEL and PC MODE cannot be changed The respective settings for SD CARD READ WRITE LENS FILE CARD R W READ USER DATA and READ FACTORY DATA cannot be executed yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Recording and Playback Interval Recording 39 Recording Review Function When recording is paused pressing the RET button automatically locates the last two seconds of video just recorded and the viewfinder provides video playback After playback the camera recorder is again ready to start recording The picture location playback duration can be increased to up to 10 seconds by continuously pressing the RET button For short clips however when the start of a clip is located continuously pressing the RET button does not play back any clips before that clip The function of the RET button may be assigned to a desired user button by using one of the menu options USER MAIN SW
280. one of the above operations defective clips will be generated Delete them and then copy them again When clips are copied to P2 cards all the information on the clips is copied However when they are copied to the SD memory card video and sound information is not copied only thumbnails clip metadata icons Voice Memo proxy and real time metadata When there is insufficient recording capacity on the destination the message LACK OF REC CAPACITY is displayed and copying will not proceed When clips to be copied include some with defects the message CANNOT ACCESS is displayed and copying will not proceed If selected clips include any that are already recorded on the destination P2 card copying will not proceed To stop copying press the SET button Clips currently being copied to the destination will be deleted When identical clips exist on the destination card the OVERWRITE is displayed Select YES or NO 1 Regarding SD memory cards to be used see lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt page 22 122 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Reconnection of Incomplete Clips Setting of Clip Meta Data Information such as the name of person who shot the video the name of the reporter the shooting location or a text memo can be read from the SD memory card and can be recorded as Clip Meta Data Reading Clip Meta Data metadata upload Clip Meta Data items 1 Inse
281. onize the time code To set this timing open the lt TC UB gt screen from the VTR MENU page and set it in the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item Set by referring to the connection example Setting of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item Item Variable Remarks range TC VIDEO SYNCRO 0 For setting to correct the time code 1 according to the delay of video 2 signals 3 0 Do not correct 1 To delay the time code to be input according to the timing of the video images 2 To forward the time code to be output according to the timing of the video images 3 To delay the time code to be input and forward the time code to be output respectively according to the timing of the video images Example 3 When the unit and an external device are locked to the external time code generator which is connected externally and when simultaneous recording is made by using the TC OUT output signals Reference video signal External time code generator Device that records images without a delay Settings of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item 1 VIDEO IN SDI IN HD SDI IN 62 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Example 4 When the unit and an external device are locked to the external time code generator and when several units of the camera are connected in a cascade configuration Reference video signal Extern
282. onnect a hard disc drive via USB Insert the target P2 cards in slots Press the MENU button and select HDD gt EXPLORE Then move to the appropriate partition and select it with the SET button From the thumbnail menu select OPERATION gt IMPORT gt ALL Then specify the slots that contain the empty target P2 cards Select YES to start writing data to the cards lt For your information gt To disable verification during writing select HDD gt SETUP from the thumbnail menu and set the option VERIFY to OFF This speeds up writing without verifying data writing 914 p eUJ9 X9 ULIM UOIO UUOD Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port 139 7 When the writing is completed the message COPY COMPLETED is displayed Note If a clip is written back to a P2 card different from the original card that contained that clip then the clip may be incomplete If this is the case reconnect the clip For more information see Reconnection of Incomplete Clips page 122 Direction for using a hard disc drive A hard disc drive must be used under the following conditions It must meet the operating requirements e g temperature It must not be placed in an instable place or a place exposed to vibrations Some hard disc drives do not operate properly Some hard disk drives with the SATA Serial ATA interface or the PATA Parallel ATA interface connecte
283. or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start recording To use this function the menu option PRE REC MODE must be set to ON The storage duration of the internal memory can be set from the menu option PRE REC TIME PRE REC MODE and PRE REC TIME menu options can be found in the REC FUNCTION screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page The function of the menu option PRE REC MODE may be assigned to a desired user button by using any one of the menu options USER MAIN SW USER1 SW or USER2 SW These options can be found in the USER SW screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page These are the options for PRE REC TIME Specify the duration for which data may be recorded before either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens is pressed a gt REC start REC PAUSE Recording starts Recording pauses Z Z Real time video Real time sound Specified PRE REC duration New clip J 36 Recording and Playback PRE RECORDING function Notes P REC indication when the PRE REC MODE menu option is set to OFF After recording is stopped the P REC indication remains displayed until all video and sound are recorded on the P2 card even if the PRE REC MODE menu option is set to OFF For details of the P REC display refer to 29 INTERVAL REC PRE RECORDING indication SD memory card remaining free space page 74 in Viewfinder Status Indication Layout I
284. or the AJ YA350AG 2 Confirm that the connected device has the same signal format as camera recorder 3 When signals are input from the SDI IN connector set the REC SIGNAL in the setting menu to SDI The REC SIGNAL item will be selected from lt SYSTEM MODE gt on the SYSTEM SETTING page Notes If the HD SD SDI input board is not attached REC SIGNAL cannot be set to SDI When nothing is connected to the SDI IN connector or there is no input signal images to be recorded will be black and no sound will be recorded Input the same signals as the format set in the SYSTEM MODE item in the setting menu through the SDI IN connector If the formats are different data will not be properly recorded on the P2 card Note the following points when the REC SIGNAL of the setting menu is set to SDI Audio signals are input from the SDI IN connector Audio signals must be input synchronized with video images Data will be recorded as 48 kHz 4CH 16 bit on a P2 card When the REC SIGNAL item is set to SDI signals input from the GENLOCK IN connector are disabled even if nothing is connected to the SDI IN connector Please note that there is a delay between video images and voice signals when the unit is used on a system synchronized with the reference UMID information time code and user bits cannot be recorded on a P2 card using the SDI IN connector When the HD SD SDI input board AJ YA350AG is instal
285. orded Open TC ON COLOR BAR from the VF INDICATOR 3 screen on the VF page Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy 65 setting UMID Information The unit supports UMID metadata You need to specify as UMID information the country where you live using up to 8 To exit the menu press the MENU button three characters organisation or company up to four characters and user name up to four characters For the country name you must use abbreviations prescribed in the ISO03166 Country Code Here are some examples of the correct method for specifying a user name 1 Examples China CHN U S A USA Canada CAN Japan JPN lt UMID SET INFO gt WNE COUNTRY ae ORGANIZATION USER Bees DEVICE NODE 1 Go to the lt UMID SET INFO gt screen from the MAIN OPERATION page 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option USER 3 Press the JOG dial button The cursor moves to the user entry area allowing you to enter a user name 4 Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears The characters appear in the following order Space o y Alphabetical characters A to Z y Numerals O0to9 y Symbols gt lt Note The COUNTRY entry can only include alphabetical characters and spaces 5 Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character 6 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to th
286. osition lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO z1 READ WRITE RESET ALL l TITLE sheer bebe oND 1 2 3 4 J 1 1 When the JOG dial button is pressed the arrow cursor returns to the TITLE item lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO aa READ WRITE RESET ALL gt TITLE ppp oND 1 2 3 4 J 12 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the WRITE position lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO i READ gt WRITE RESET ALL TITLE peeke ONAN 1 2 3 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewisnipy 93 13 When the JOG dial button is pressed the following message appears WRITE MGS gt stNO 2 PyVyys 14 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to YES and press the JOG dial button The current white shading correction value the flare compensation value and the RB gain offset correction value are stored in the built in memory of the unit Note The values will not be stored in the unit s internal memory if another menu screen is selected without executing WRITE or if the menu is exited 15 Press the MENU button The setting menu is cleared and the displays showing the unit s current statuses appear at the top and bottom of the viewfinder screen E read the lens file from the builtin memory 1 2 4 Using menu operations open the lt
287. ot Displays the total remaining free space for all 5 slots Please note that the remaining capacity of a write protected P2 card is not included in the total remaining capacity Warning symbol When the following P2 card is detected the J symbol is displayed RUN DOWN CARD The volume of data on the card exceeds the limit defined in the standards DIR ENTRY NG CARD The directory structure on the P2 card does not com ply with the standards The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card detailed information indication in 2 P2 Card Status remaining free space From the thumbnail menu select PROPERTY CARD STATUS The following screen appears When REMAIN is selected When USED is selected 100 3 42 NO CARD NO CARD NO CARD 1 Write protect Mark The A mark appears if the P2 card is write protected P2 Card Status used memory capacity The used memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated by a bar graph and a percentage figure The bar graph indicator moves to the right as the used memory capacity increases The following indications may appear depending on the card status FORMAT ERROR An unformatted P2 card is inserted NOT SUPPORTED An unsupported card is inserted in the camera NO CARD P2 cards are not inserted Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2 card for data you want to access and press the SET button to display detailed information about the P2 card to check indiv
288. ot available Terminating the LOOP REC Mode You can terminate the LOOP REC mode by either Turning off the POWER switch of camera recorder or Setting the menu option LOOP REC MODE to OFF Interval Recording It is possible to record in intervals of one frame as the shortest length by using the internal memory of the unit To use this option open the REC FUNCTION screen from the SYSTEM SETTING page and set the interval recording mode REC TIME PAUSE TIME and TAKE TOTAL TIME for the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE When the settings are finalized TOTAL REC TIME needed on the P2 card is automatically calculated and displayed The following are the options for INTERVAL REC MODE OFF No interval recording performed ON Interval recording performed ONE SHOT Performs one shot recording for the duration specified under the REC TIME option by pressing either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens Notes When executing interval recording data cannot be output with IEEE 1394 When the 1394 CONTROL is set to BOTH it is also impossible to control external devices The shortest recording time stand by time and the set value of the cut off unit frame number may vary with the recording method as follows Recording method Unit frame number 1080i 60i 50i 30P 25P Pull down 1 frame 30PN 25PN Native 24P 24PA Pull down 5
289. otal free space capacities of the P2 cards when MODE CHECK is being performed Note When the menu option P2 CARD REMAIN is set to ONE CARD the number of the P2 card slot that contains the target card is indicated together with the remaining space For more information see P2 Card Remaining Free Space capacity Indication page 75 P2 card remaining free space MODE CHECK EJ min The number of the P2 card slot that contains the target card and the remaining free space when MODE CHECK is being performed are indicated In LOOP REC mode the minimum guaranteed recording time Refer to Loop Recording page 37 is indicated This indication also appears when the target P2 card has been switched with a user button Camera recorder REC indication REC When an external device is controlled through the 1394 connection when the 1394 option is set to BOTH the recording status of the camera recorder is displayed using characters The indication stays illuminated during recording This is displayed when the menu option REC TALLY of the OPTION MODE is set to CHAR This can also be displayed during the recording using the unit alone This is displayed when the menu option REC STATUS of the VF INDICATORS is set to ON Battery type MODE CHECK PRO14 AC ADPT Battery type selected through a menu option AC ADPT indicates when an external DC power supply has been input Battery re
290. perimposed on SDI input signals are not recorded CAMERA MODE menu option Used to select a camera operation mode when the option REC SIGNAL is set to CAM For information about the behavior for each setting see Recording formats and output connector signal formats page 44 Note When the camera has been switched from 60i or 30P to 24P or 24PA video may produce noise for a moment because the pull down five frame cycle is adjusted This is not an abnormal condition REC MODE menu option Used to select the recording mode For HD mode 1080i AVC 1 50 The AVC Intra50 format is used to record video The native recording is applied to the 30P 24P and 25P modes AVC I 100 The AVC Intra100 format is used to record video The native recording format applies to the 30P 24P and 25P modes DVCPRO HD The DVCPRO HD format is used to record video The pull down recording is for the 30P 24P 24PA and 25P modes Note When AVC Intra 50 or AVC Intra 100 is selected the 24PA mode cannot be selected For SD mode 480i 576i DVCPROS50 The DVCPROS50 format 50 Mbps is used to record video ASPECT menu option Used to select the aspect ratio for the SD mode 480i or 576i 16 9 The 16 9 aspect ratio is used to record video 4 3 The 4 3 aspect ratio is used to record video Adjustments and Settings for Recording Multi Format Bulpsooey 104 sbuljeas pue sjuewjsnipy fi Recording formats and output connector signal form
291. play the clips SETUP Please refer to Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode page 128 for information about this item EXIT Close the sub menu Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Switching the Thumbnail Display 117 D a 3 D 5 a Q D gt 4 5 Z 3 a 5 2 D E Changing thumbnails It is possible to replace thumbnails with images that include previously attached text memos while images are recorded or played back 1 Add text memos to images that you intend to change Refer to Text Memo Function page 41 for the method to add text memos 2 Select THUMBNAIL TEXT MEMO CLIPS to display thumbnails of the clips with text memos Place the pointer on the clip of the thumbnail that you intend to change and then press SET Move the pointer to the text memo display on the lower row 4 Select the thumbnail that you intend to replace place the pointer on it and then select OPERATION gt EXCH THUMBNAIL on the thumbnail menu TEXT MEMO THUMBNAIL OPERATION PROPERTY META DATA HDD EXIT Wr FORMAT 00 01 28 23 REPAIR CLIP RE CONNECTION COPY EXCH THUMBNAIL ICAI MEMO i DEVICE SETUP gt CLIP 11 T04 05 ExT TENEI vu 1 30 00 5 Press SET When the YES NO confirmation window is displayed select YES by using the cursor button and the SET button The menu closes and the thumbnail for the clip is replaced TEXT MEMO 01 05 Pa ig i 00 00 0
292. position where a text memo is recorded page 120 Move the pointer to the desired text memo and then press the SET button You can select more than one text memo Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select OPERATION COPY 4 User the cursor buttons and SET buttons to select the destination slot Then select YES to start copying the clip The portion between the selected text memo and the next one is copied If no text memo is found after the selected one then all part after the selected text memo is copied If multiple text memos are selected the selected sections are copied When the clip is being copied the camera recorder indicates the progress of the copy process and cancellation status To discontinue the copy process press the SET button Then a YES NO confirmation screen is displayed Use the cursor buttons and SET button to select YES Deleting Clips Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip you want to delete Press the SET button to select the clip Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION DELETE from the thumbnail menu 4 5 The following screen appears Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES DELETE FORMAT REPAIR RE CONNI bs copy EXIT i DELETE 2 CLIPS PROPERTY META DATA DEVICE SETUP EXIT The clip is deleted All selected clips in blu
293. ps eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av Regarding SD memory cards to be used see lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt page 22 Note The file which was edited by except P2 viewer is displayed as UNKNOWN DATA and may not be read GLOBAL CLIP ID Displays the global clip ID which indicates the shooting status of the clip USER CLIP NAME Displays the clip name specified by the user x1 VIDEO Displays FRAME RATE frame rate of the clip PULL DOWN and ASPECT RATIO AUDIO SAMPLING RATE sampling frequency of recorded sound and BITS PER SAMPLE digitized bit s of recorded sound ACCESS Displays CREATOR person who recorded the clip CREATION DATE date when the clip was recorded LAST UPDATE DATE date of the latest update of the clip and LAST UPDATE PERSON person who made the latest update of the clip DEVICE Displays MANUFACTURER name of the device manufacturer SERIAL NO serial number of the device and MODEL NAME model name of the device Displays SHOOTER name of the person who shot the video START DATE start date of shooting END DATE end date of shooting and LOCATION ALTITUDE LONGITUDE LATITUDE SOURCE PLACE NAME altitude longitude latitude and source of the information and name of the location SCENARIO Displays PROGRAM NAME SCENE NQO and TAKE NO Displays REPORTER name of the reporter PURPOSE purpose of shoot
294. ps with proxy attached T Text Memo Indicator This marker is displayed for a clip with a text memo attached 14 E Edit Copied Clip Indicator This marker is displayed on a clip when the model supports edit copy such as the AJ HPM100 For more information about edit copying see the instruction manual for a mode that supports edit copying 15 W Wide Clip Indicator This marker is displayed for clips recorded with the 16 9 aspect ratio However it does not accompany clips in HD format syreuquiny ym sdo Bulyejndiueyy Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Thumbnail Screen 115 Selecting Thumbnails Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in the thumbnail screen 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer yellow frame to the desired clip and press the SET button The frame around the selected thumbnail changes to a blue frame Press the SET button again to deselect the clip 2 Additional clips can be selected by repeating Step 7 It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails in the thumbnail screen for playback Please refer to Switching the Thumbnail Display page 117 for more information LCD Monitor THUMBNAIL Button EXIT Button ODY CURSOR Buttons _ SET Button Playing back Clips 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the desired clip 3 Press the PLAY PAUSE b
295. r Recording Setting Time Data Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy 57 i Frame rate 24P Over 60i 2 3 Frame rate information recorded in user bits Starting field for the If video information to be recorded based on the frame rate updated frame Time code frame digit set through the menu option CAMERA MODE is recorded 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 aes 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 in the user bits it can be edited with editing tools e g PC editing software In 1080i and SD mode the frame rate image information for the user bits recorded in the VIDEO AUX RolbeBolBelboCelCpeDobgholAelBolBel CoDeDoDejAojAe BoBe Bo Ce coDeo De area are used Sequence No Frame rate information Updated frame information The frame rate and video pull down menu are linked to the 10 10 o 0010 40 07 01 T00 time code and user bits as follows Frame rate 24PA Over 60i 2 3 3 2 x x O 4 E 2 4 8 x Time code frame digit i o0 01 02 03 04 05 06 aes 23 24 25 26 27 28 I 29 Media management information Fixed valle Updated frame information Image Chec ing Effective frame Gore BoBeBce ColC E A Bo Bel_ ColCeDo DelAo Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De information for the 6 REC START STOP mark digits at right Camera shooting mode sequence No Sequence No 60i 600 foltl2ztloy yOo i
296. r by one digit V button Winds back the blinking number by one digit Press the HOLD button to display a time in the display window Use the CURSOR buttons to set the hour minute and second h min s Position the TCG switch at F RUN or R RUN The internal clock starts at the moment the switch position is changed 8 Press the HOLD button to display a time zone time difference between local time and Greenwich Mean Time in the display window 9 Position the TCG switch at SET 10 Use the A and V buttons to set the desired hours and minutes ahead of no sign or behind sign the Greenwich Mean Time Example If the local time is five hours behind Greenwich Mean Time set the time zone to 5 00 The time zone is always recorded together with the date and time as metadata See the table at right to set the time zone according to your local time 1 1 Position the TCG switch at F RUN or R RUN to accept the time zone Notes When using the camera recorder for the first time be sure to perform this setting beforehand Do not change the setting during use of the camera recorder When the TCG switch is positioned at SET thumbnails cannot be manipulated aie Area aime Area difference difference 00 00 Greenwich 12 00 Kwajalein 00 30 11 30 01 00 Central Europe 11 00 Midway I
297. r off the assigned USB device or USB host mode Switching between the USB device and USB host modes is set by selecting the PC MODE SELECT menu option in the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Note When the remote controller AJ RC10G option is connected and I OVR or C TEMP is assigned to the USER button on the side of the AJ RC10G operation of the jog dial button on the main unit is disabled ie Setting the Switchover of USER SW GAIN AJ HPX3000 allows three other modes to be used in addition to the L M H standard gain settings the analog gain up S GAIN super gain mode to achieve a gain of 30 dB or more the cumulative gain up DS GAIN digital super gain mode which uses progressive drive To select these functions perform menu operations to open the lt USER SW GAIN gt screen from the CAM OPERATION page select the S GAIN item and DS GAIN item and preset the gain to be used for each item For instance if the S GAIN and DS GAIN functions have been allocated to the USER MAIN button USER1 button or USER2 button the gain can be increased by using these buttons in combination with the USER buttons 1 To increase the gain without increasing noise The DS GAIN function is used 2 To increase the normal analog gain noise is increased Use the S GAIN feature alone Note Note that the accuracy of AUTO IRIS White Balance and Black Balance may be influenced by an increase in noise 3 To achieve ultra
298. r selected functions To select desired functions use the menu options USER MAIN SW USER1 SW and USER2 SW These options can be found in the lt USER SW gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page lt USER SW gt USER MAIN SW SLOT SEL USER1 SW 2S GAIN USER2 SW DS GAIN Selectable Functions INH S GAIN DS GAIN S IRIS 1 OVR S BLK B GAMMA Y GET No function assigned S GAIN function assigned DS GAIN function assigned Super Iris function assigned This is useful for backlight compensation Iris Override function assigned The target reference value in Auto Iris mode must be changed To change the target value put the unit into this mode and press the JOG dial button Turn the JOG dial button clockwise or anti clockwise to change the value The iris indication section of the viewfinder screen displays or When the desired value is displayed stop turning the JOG dial button Then press the dial button to accept that value Note that once the mode is cancelled or the power is turned off the original reference value will be used again Iris opens up by 0 5 Iris opens up by 1 Iris closes down by 0 5 Iris closes down by 1 No indication The reference value is used Super Black function assigned This function lowers the black level to the pedestal level or below The BLACK GAMMA function is allocated This function
299. r the viewfinder are further enhanced If 0 is selected then the detail is the same as IC U FIR that for the main line ZEBRA1 0 Set the ZEBRA1 detection level IRE DETECT 70 value C U F R 109 ZEBRA2 0 Set the ZEBRA2 detection level IRE DETECT 5 value C U F R 109 ZEBRA2 ON Set the ZEBRA2 to ON OFF or SPOT SPOT C U F R OFF LOW LIGHT OFF Set the camera incoming light volume at LVL 10 which to display LOW LIGHT 15 20 25 30 C U F R 35 RC MENU ON For the setting to display the menu in the DISP OFF viewfinder screen when the remote IC U F R control unit is connected to the unit 50M ON For specifying whether to enable or INDICATOR OFF disable the 50M LED inside the SD viewfinder when the REC MODE menu option is set to DVCPROSO In SD C U F R mode only MARKER 50 Adjust the brightness of markers and CHARLVL 160 characters displayed on the VF 70 80 90 C U F R 100 SYNCHRO sec For setting the unit to indicate SCAN DISP deg SYNCHRO SCAN mode sec indicates time deg indicates the opening angle of clulF R the shutter 172 Menu Menu Description Tables ZEBRA Pattern Display Video Level ZEBRA 2 OFF SPOT 109 ZEBRA2 N DETECT Yy Yj ZEBRA1 Gf AA fA DETECT 0 The ___ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode VF MARKER VF USER BOX
300. ration is performed This lamp will flash 4 times every second WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second while recording Warning tone operation is made after recording Tally lamp LES continues until an operation is made after recording f Tally Blinks 4 times per second while recording Viewfinder The END indicator blinks ally lamp continues This tone will sound continuously until an Viewfinder The REC WARNING indicator lights up Warning tone Beeps 4 times per second while recording continues Warning The P2 cards are recorded to maximum description capacity Recording playback The recording stops operation Delete the clips in the P2 card or insert a Countermeasures new P2 card This indicates a failure either in the P2 card recording or the recording circuit This is 6 Image Sequence Error 24P 30P 25P Pees displayed when attempting to record clips p where the total quantity exceeds the upper limit 1000 pieces for a single P2 card Recording The recording may stop or continue playback operation Restart recording Or turn the power OFF Countermeasures and turn it ON again before starting recording 8 Low Wireless Signal Reception Display window indication E 40 appears in the time code display field Display window indication No display WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second Tally lamp
301. rder 2 Open the lt 1394 SETTING gt on the SYSTEM SETTING page and confirm that the settings in the 1394 IN CH item and the 1394 OUT CH item are set to AUTO 3 Open lt SYSTEM MODE gt on the SYSTEM SETTING page to set REC MODE to DVCPRO HD 4 In case of input from the IEEE1394 interface set REC SIGNAL to 1394 The REC SIGNAL option must be selected from the lt SYSTEM MODE gt menu on the SYSTEM SETTING page Notes When the AVC Intra format is selected and data are recorded it is impossible to input output data from the DVCPRO connector When INTERVAL REC is operated it is impossible to input output data from the DVCPRO connector When no device is connected to the DVCPRO connector or no signal is being input to the connector the display window indicates 1394E 90 in the counter section Input the same signals to the IEEE1394 interface as the format set in SYSTEM MODE and REC MODE in the setting menu If a different format is used signals are not properly recorded on P2 cards When playback signals other than regularx1 normal speed playback signals have been input no guarantees are made for the video and sound recorded or for the video and sound of the EE system For information about the error codes see 1394 Error Codes page 152 The audio signal input will consist of an input signal from DVCPRO connector When the audio signal input from the IEEE1394 interface is 32 kHz 4CH 12
302. rding order of the slot may vary with the recording method For SLOT SEL SLOT1 when the power is turned on details refer to Interval Recording HOLD C U F page 37 The recording order starts with the TAKE TOTAL NONE Specify the time needed for shooting card Sara ara when the TIME Select from NONE continue until Pas WaS recone operation is manually stopped to 5 days c u F 5day E y stopped M The recording order starts with the TOTAL REC 00m00s0if Display total recorded time The setting card that is inserted in Slot 1 when the TIME cannot be changed using this option C U F power is turned on 99m59s29f Displays the recording time recording OVER100min time needed for the P2 card calculated NONE using REC TIME PAUSE TIME and Note Vai TOTAL TIME Displayed REC TIME PAUSE TIME and TOTAL REC TIME Note an are translated into either drop frame or non drop frame A value based on actual processing is A h f displayed according to the mode 0 operation AUDIO REG TON Solsctwhether or not sound wili bs TAKE TOTAL TIME is actual time Therefore TOTAL REC OFF recorded TIME may incorporate fractions depending on the settings c UjF Example of drop frame START DELAY 0SE Set the delay after pressing REC START to start recording in INTERVAL REC REC TIME 02s00f c u F 10SEC PAUSE TIME 02s00f PRE REC ON Select whether or not to enable PRE 7 MODE OFF RECORDING TAKE TOTAL TIME 40min ON PRE RECO
303. record the camera ID COLOR BAR OFF displayed or not on the color bar OFF BAR The camera ID is recorded when Note the color bar signals are recorded The time code is displayed on the color clulFIR OFF Disable ID mix Iclulelr bar but it is not recorded ID POSITION UPPERR For setting the position to display the TC OFF Select the time code to display UPPERL camera ID TCG OFF Disable the time code display LOWERR UPPERR Upper right TCR TCG Display the time code generator LOWERL UPPERL Upper left TCG TCR value in recording mode LOWER R Lower right TCR Display the time code reader lclu FJR LOWER L Lower left value in playback mode DATE TIME JON For selecting an option to display year TCGITCR s OFF month day and hour minute second Display the time code generator value simultaneously when the camera ID is in recoraing mode and Me MINE coe displayed IclulE R reader value in playback mode clu F R playe ZOOMLVL JON Set the zoom position indication to ON SYSTEM INFOJOFF Select ine method of displaying system OFF or OFF ALWAYS information and warnings NORMAL OFF Display no warnings other than C U F R TURN POWER OFF and COLOR TEMP ON Set the color temperature indication to SYSTEM ERROR OFF ON or OFF eee ways display warnings EME NORMAL ve SYSTEM ON For selecting ON or OFF for the Display warnings for 3 seconds only MODE OFF SYSTEM MODE and REC MODE C U F R when problems occur C U FIR display SA
304. reen from the PAINT page using the menu operation to confirm that GAMMA MODE SEL is set to HD Then open lt VF DISPLAY gt from the VF page to confirm that ZEBRA1 DETECT and ZEBRA2 DETECT are the same as shown in the following illustration If they are not the same revise the settings and close the menu screen lt VF DISPLAY gt DISP CONDITION NORMAL DISP MODE 9 VF OUT iT VF DTL 13 ZEBRA1 DETECT 070 ZEBRA2 DETECT 085 ZEBRA2 SPOT LOW LIGHT LVL 35 RC MENU DISP OFF 50M INDICATOR OFF MARKER CHAR LVL 150 SYNCHRO SCAN DISP rsec QO Set the ZEBRA switch on the viewfinder to ON Shoot a white sheet of paper with no unevenness of color Note Since fluorescent lights mercury lamps and other such kinds of lighting tend to flicker use a light source which is free from flicker such as sunlight or a halogen lamp 7 Set the lens aperture control to manual and adjust it so that the zebra pattern covers the whole screen Check that the lens aperture is between F4 and F11 Notes The zebra pattern will not cover the whole screen if there is any unevenness in the lighting In this case make adjustments to the position of the lighting etc Make adjustments to the position of the lighting etc also when the lens aperture is not between F4 and F11 Be absolutely sure to leave the electronic shutter at OFF 8 Set the WHITE BAL selector switch to A or B a
305. reset to 0 and real time data is reset to the initial value 24 Parts and their Functions Time Code Section DISPLAY counter display selector switch Indications of the time code CTL and user bits on the counter of the display window depend on the positions of this switch and the 7 TCG switch Pressing the 4 HOLD button also displays Date Time Time Zone UB User bits DATE TIME Time zone indicated TC Time code indicated CTL CTL indicated TCG time code selector switch This switch is used to specify the stepping mode for the built in time code generator F RUN Select this position to continuously advance the time code independently of the P2 card recording status Use this mode to synchronise the time code with the time of day or to externally lock the time code SET Select this position to set the time code and or user bits R RUN Select this position to advance the time code only during recording For spliced scenes recorded on P2 cards the sequence of time codes is unbroken CURSOR and SET buttons Use these buttons to set the time code and user bits The four triangular buttons are the CURSOR buttons and the center rectangular one is the SET button For guidance in setting the time code and user bits see Setting Time Data page 55 Warning and Status Display Functions NAA E Back tally lamp When the 2 BACK TALLY switch is set to ON the
306. ress the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen on the LCD monitor Pressing the THUMBNAIL button again returns the display to the regular display When switching is done from the regular screen display to the thumbnail screen display all the clips will be displayed on the thumbnail screen Pressing the MENU button allows you to navigate the thumbnail menu Note With the TCG switch positioned at SET when the time code or user bits are set or when camera menus are being manipulated thumbnails cannot be manipulated 1 ALL 101 02 103 mL amp ves m J 00 00 00 00 00 00 55 11 00 01 28 07 00 02 08 07 05 06 F hs ra TA 00 02 33 26 00 03 51 04 00 04 48 26 00 06 47 11 3 a Boe EE mT 00 00 45 12 00 09 44 03 00 00 00 00 4 5 6 7 Thumbnail screen PIT 11 12 13 14 15 114 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Thumbnail Screen Display Mode The type of the thumbnail indicated on the display and the types of the other information screens are indicated ALL Display all clips SAME FORMAT The clips in the same format as the system format are shown SELECT The clips selected with the SET button are shown MARKER Display clips with shot marks TEXT MEMO Display clips with text memo data SLOT n Display clips in the specified P2 card n 1 to 5 which indicates Slots 1 5 UPDATING Indicated when the camera recorder is updating the screen or reading data When the screen is
307. rophone 48V Audio signal from a passive microphone is input The unit supplies power to the remote microphone Wireless slot A Unislot wireless receiver optional accessory may be attached here FRONT AUDIO LEVEL audio recording level adjustment control This control adjusts the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2 However when the 3 AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switch is set to AUTO the level will adjust automatically and the 2 AUDIO LEVEL CH1 CH2 knob and this knob will not be active The control can be enabled or disabled through the menu options FRONT VR CH1 or FRONT VR CH2 These options can be found in the lt MIC AUDIO1 gt screen on the MAIN OPERATION page 9 10 11 Audio output Function Section AUDIO OUT connector XLR 5 pin This connector outputs audio signals recorded on Channels 1 2 or 3 4 Output signals are selected with the MONITOR SELECT CH1 2 CH3 4 selector switch MONITOR SELECT audio channel CH1 2 CH3 4 selector switch Use this switch to select the audio channel whose signals are output to the speakers earphones or AUDIO OUT connector CH1 2 Signals on Audio Channels 1 and 2 are output CH3 4 Signals on Audio Channels 3 and 4 are output The channel indications on the display window and on the audio level meter in the viewfinder are synchronised with this selector switch MONITOR SELECT audio selection CH1 3 ST CH2 4 selector switch The MONITOR
308. rt the SD memory card that contains the Clip Meta Data metadata upload file 2 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor Note Press the thumbnail button while pressing MODE CHECK button when a thumbnail is displayed to move to Step 4 3 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and Select META DATA LOAD from the thumbnail menu and press the SET button OPERATION PROPERTY RECORD USER CLIP NAME gt INITIALIZE PROPERTY LANGUAGE EXIT mT 00 00 00 00 00 00 45 12 00 09 44 03 4 Names of metadata upload files stored on the SD memory card are displayed Select the desired files using the cursor buttons and choose YES Upload starts Uploaded metadata is retained even if the power is turned off For more information on confirmation of uploaded data see Checking and modifying read metadata page 124 Press the cursor button lt 1 to display the full name of the file up to 100 characters at the cursor position Press the cursor button gt to return to the original state Clip Meta Data includes the following items Underlined items can be set by reading the metadata upload file on the SD memory card Other items are set automatically during shooting Using the latest update version of P2 viewer metadata upload files can be written to SD memory cards using a PC Download the latest update version of P2 viewer from the following URL and install it to your PC htt
309. s Press the TEXT MEMO button during recording or playback of a clip A text memo is added to the position where the button is pressed Press the TEXT MEMO button when the thumbnail screen is displayed A text memo is added to the beginning of the clip Note One clip can have up to 100 text and voice memos in combination Note that camera recorder is not capable of adding or showing voice memos Text Memo Button Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Shot Mark 119 sreuquiny ym sdo Bulyejndiueyy E Playing back a clip at the position where a text memo is recorded 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select THUMBNAIL TEXT MEMO CLIPS from the thumbnail menu The clip thumbnails with text memos attached are displayed in the upper section of the LCD monitor The lower section of the LCD monitor shows information about the text memo on the clip selected by the pointer 02 oa 00 00 55 11 ae iT 00 06 47 11 00 00 00 00 TEXT MEMO CLIP 07 T01 04 Thumbnail Shows the still image that the Display text memo is related to Shows the total number of text memos attached to the clip Deleting a text memo 3 Move the pointer over the clip that contains the desired text memo to playback and press the SET button The pointer moves to the lower part of the LCD monitor TEXT MEMO 02 Ba aT 00 00
310. s indicated System format The format for the clip on which the pointer is located is indicated Duration The duration of the clip on which the pointer is located is indicated USB HOST mode indicator Indicated when the mode has been switched to USB HOST Clip Number The numbers set by the camera for all the clips recognised correctly by the P2 card These numbers are allocated in chronological order by shooting dates and times If clips cannot be played because of different recording formats they are displayed in red ij Defective Clip Indicator and 2 Unknown Clip indicator This marker is displayed for defective clips which may result from a variety of causes e g powering down during recording Clip with yellow defective clip indicators can be restored in some cases Please refer to Restoring Clips page 121 for more information A clip displayed with a red corrupt marker cannot be restored and must be deleted If the clip cannot be deleted format the P2 card When clips have different formats is displayed instead of R I Incomplete Clip Indicator Indicates that although a clip is recorded across multiple P2 cards one of these cards is not inserted into a P2 card slot IM Shot Mark Indicator This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot mark attached Please refer to Shot Mark page 119 for more information about shot marks E Indicator for clips with proxy This marker is displayed for cli
311. scription is the original written in English This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non commercial use of a consumer to i encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard AVC Video and or ii decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non commercial activity and or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA LLC See http www mpegla com Unislot is a trademark of Ikegami Tsushinki Co Ltd Other names of companies and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies 197 Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment private households This symbol on the products and or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste For proper treatment recovery and recycling please take these products to designated collection points where they will be accepted on a free of charge basis Alternatively in some countries you may be able to return your products to your local retailer upon the purchase of an equivalent new product EE osi l isposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and th
312. set mode Menu Menu Description Tables 169 D 5 f KNEE LEVEL GAMMA Items Adjustable R imarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range MASTER PED 200 Set the master pedestal MASTER 0 30 Set the master gamma in 0 01 steps AMMA 015 0 45 s c U F R 200 s c U F R 0 75 MMANUAL JON Set the mode when the AUTO KNEE RGAMMA 15 Set the Rch gamma KNEE OFF switch is OFF The KNEE POINT SLOPE set value is enabled when this 00 s c u F R setting is ON s clu F R 15 KNEE POINT 70 0 For setting the knee point position in B GAMMA 15 Set the Bch gamma increments of 1 steps 93 0 00 S C U F R 107 0 s c u F R 15 KNEE SLOPE 00 For setting the inclination of the knee 85 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the a preset mode C U F R 99 MWHITE CLIP ON Set the WHITE CLIP feature to ON or OFF OFF The WHITE CLIP LVL set value is SIC U FIR enabled when this setting is ON WHITE CLIP 90 Set WHITE CLIP LEVEL LVL 109 S C U F R A KNEE 80 Set the AUTO KNEE POINT position in POINT NeR 1 steps This setting is enabled when 93 the OUTPUT AUTO KNEE selector 107 switch is set to CAM AUTO KNEE ON S C U F R A KNEE LVL 100
313. sion for the serial interface FPGA DIAGNOSTIC1 SDI IN FPGA Displays the version of the program for the SDI board FPGA optional Items Adjustable Remark SCIZ Data Saved Range AVC I SOFT Display the control software version of CAMSOFT Displays the version of the main the AVC I board MAIN software for the camera microprocessor n ia la bei a AVC I FPGA Display the FPGA program version of CAM TABLE Display the table version the AVC I board PULSE FPGA Displays the version of the program for driving the CCD HOURS METER UCIF FPGA Displays the version of the program for items Adjustable the microprocessor interface FPGA Remarks Data Saved Range D O S G E OPERATION Display total hours the camera power FM FPGA Displays the version of the program for has been turned ON the frame memory control FPGA TooToo fs Pe PON TIMES Display total number of times the power CHAR FPGA Displays the version of the program for switch has been turned ON the HD signal I O control FPGA na DC FPGA Displays the version of the program for the SD signal I O control FPGA Menu Menu Description Tables 191 D 5 I OPTION MENU OPTION AREA SETTING Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range ENG ON Select whether or not to prohibit opening AREA NTSC NTSC Any NTSC color TV SECURITY OFF the
314. sland 01 30 10 30 02 00 Eastern Europe 10 00 Hawaii 02 30 09 30 Marquesas Islands 03 00 Moscow 09 00 Alaska 03 30 Tehran 08 30 04 00 Abu Dhabi 08 00 Los Angeles 04 30 Kabul 07 30 05 00 Islamabad 07 00 Denver 05 30 Bombay 06 30 06 00 Dacca 06 00 Chicago 06 30 Rangoon 05 30 07 00 Bangkok 05 00 New York 07 30 04 30 08 00 Beijing 04 00 Halifax 08 30 03 30 Newfoundland Island 09 00 Tokyo 03 00 Buenos Aires 09 30 Darwin 02 30 10 00 Guam 02 00 Mid Atlantic 10 30 Lord Howe Island 01 30 11 00 Solomon Islands 01 00 Azores Islands 11 30 Norfolk Island 00 30 12 00 New Zealand 12 45 Chatham Islands 13 00 Notes In Step 4 if the TCG switch is positioned at F RUN or R RUN this also activate the internal clock To cancel date time and time zone settings in process hold down the SET button and position the TCG switch at F RUN or R RUN Clock accuracy fluctuates between about 30 seconds per month when the power is turned off If more accurate timekeeping is required check the time when the power is turned on and if necessary reset the clock When the GPS unit AJ GPS910G is installed and if it successfully receives time information the internal clock keeps accurate local time based on the received time Greenwich Mean Time and the time zone If the date and ti
315. t UB to display real time time zone hour and minute Time count indication The time code CTL user bits and real time are shown Note When the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB each press of the HOLD button changes the indication through VTCG VTC DATE TIME No Indication Time Zone TCG TC in that order 26 Parts and their Functions Display Window Functions LCD Monitor LCD monitor The LCD monitor displays the video in the viewfinder Alternatively it can show clips on the P2 card in a thumbnail format In thumbnail display mode clips can be edited or deleted or P2 cards can be formatted using the 4 THUMBNAIL MENU button and 5 CURSOR and SET buttons OPEN button Used to open the LCD monitor THUMBNAIL button This button switches the content on the 1 LCD monitor from the video in the viewfinder to clip thumbnails Another press switches them back to the video from the viewfinder Note that this switchover is not performed during a recording or playback THUMBNAIL MENU button In thumbnail display mode this button allows you to manipulate the thumbnail menu e g to delete clips 5 CURSOR and SET buttons The four triangular buttons are the CURSOR buttons and the center rectangular one is the SET button They are used to select a thumbnail and manipulate the thumbnail menu For more information see Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails p
316. tate Standard state 1 to 3 1 to 3 slclulFl The dark portion is extended slclulFl The dark portion is extended mMATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table m MATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table TABLE A for the linear matrix TABLE A for the linear matrix s c u F B s c u F B mCOLOR ON For switching ON OFF of the 12 axis mCOLOR ON For switching ON OFF of the 12 axis CORRECT OFF independent color correction CORRECT OFF independent color correction SIC U F SiC U F Note The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt screen The items without are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R W Please refer to SD CARD R W SELECT page 187 for more information The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 167 ADDITIONAL DTL Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range KNEE APE OFF For changing the detail level of the high LVL 1 brightness portion 5 S C U F R DTL GAIN 31 Adjust the detail level toward upwards 00 up C U F Rj 31 DTL GAIN 31 Adjust the detail level toward the downwards 00 S C U F R 31 DTL CLIP 00 For setting the level for clipping the detail signals 63 etail signals S C U F R DTL SOURCE R G 2 For setting the proportion of the RGB
317. ted Move the cursor to the option TITLE READ and press the JOG dial button Edit the data title To write set data on an SD memory card 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt screen To select a file number 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option W SELECT Then press the dial button lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt R SELECT READ 6 Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears The characters that appear are switched in the following order Space v Alphabetical characters Vv Numerals Vv Symbols oO AtoZ O0to9 1 gt lt gt W SELECT WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ wwe y lt gor E ani 3 Turn the JOG dial button to select a desired number 1 8 Then press the dial button To give the selected file a title 7 Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character 8 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next digit clockwise and repeat Steps 6 7 to set characters up to eight characters To write data on a selected file 9 When the title is set turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt 4 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option TITLE R SELECT READ W SELECT WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ TITLE fi teen lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt R SELE
318. tenance 47 Unislot Interface 1 CH 1 SHIELD GND 2 CH 1 HOT Audio input from the wireless receiver HOT 3 CH 1 COLD Audio input from the wireless receiver COLD 4 GND GND 5 12V UNREG Power supply to the wireless receiver 6 RX ON Power supply remote output to the wireless receiver 7 RF WARN RF warning input from the wireless receiver 8 RM5 Not used 9 RM4 Not used 10 SPARE 1 Not used 11 SPARE 2 Not used 12 EXT CLK Not used 13 CLK SHIELD Not used 14 CH 2 SHIELD Not used 15 CH 2 HOT Not used 16 CH 2 COLD Not used 17 5 6V Power supply to the wireless receiver 18 VIDEO OUT Not used 19 VIDEO RET Not used 20 VIDEO EN Not used 21 RM 1 RM CLK Not used 22 RM 2 RM DATA Not used 23 RM 3 RM WR Not used 24 RM 5V Not used 25 RM GND Not used 148 Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance Matsushita part number K1GB25A00010 Maker part number HDBB 25S 05 Hirose Denki 5000000000000 a 4 Warning System f warning Description Tables If a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on or during operation this will be indicated by the WARNING lamp lamps inside the viewfinder and a warning tone Note The WARNING lamp has the highest priority followed by the tally lamp and then the warning tone When multiple errors occur simultaneously a higher
319. tension board attached can record SDI signals input through the SDI input connector only if the signals are in the same format as the camera recorder The unit does not support the various Native methods Hi Remote control connector By connecting the remote control unit AJ RC10G which is available as an optional accessory the unit can be controlled remotely Refer to page 111 i Confirmation of return video signals It is possible to confirm the return video signals analog HD Y signals in the HD mode VBS or Y signals in the SD mode supplied to the GENLOCK IN connector of AJ HPX3000 in the viewfinder to confirm programs Only video signals from the same record format can be confirmed Refer to page 178 HDC OUT connector The DC OUT connector of the unit produces 1 5 A of electrical current By connecting an external switch to this connector it is possible to control REC start stop Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting the LED to this connector it is useful for shooting video when fixing the camera on a crane Refer to page 112 General Features of the Input Output unit 11 Other features Hi Viewfinder connection From the viewfinder connector of the unit 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 480 59 94i or 576 50i signals are output Furthermore signals are output for switching the frequencies of the connected viewfinder Confirm images in multi formats by connecting the viewfinder AJ HVF21G which is avail
320. ter is CjU F M erop 100S Sece applied are 200 Hz to 10 kHz MIC LOWCUT OFF Select the microphone low cut filter for oS Si Ore Se E low cut filter is The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the REAR disabled for any input preset mode FRONT The microphone low cut filter is enabled when the front microphone is selected W L The microphone low cut filter is enabled only when the wireless microphone is selected REAR The microphone low cut filter is enabled only when the rear clulFl microphone is selected MIC AUDIO2 TC UB Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range FRONT MIC JON Select the phantom power supply for the TC MODE DF Set the time code mode POWER OFF front microphone NDF DF Drop frame C U F ee drop frame REARMIC JON Select the phantom power supply for the When the camera recorder operates at POWER OFF rear microphone 50 Hz or in 24P or 24PA mode the non When OFF is selected no phantom drop frame is always used power is supplied even if the REAR CIU F IclulF AUDIO CH1 or CH2 switch is set to 48 UB MODE USER Select the user bits mode MONITOR STEREO When the MONITOR switch is set to ST ae USER Ra a valyer et inthe LOD SELECT MIX stereo select the signal format for the EXT
321. tes the active status of the SD memory card It stays illuminated when the card is active Note While the lamp is on do not insert or remove the card 5 Shot Mark Cancel Menu button Undoes any changes to the menu option settings if pressed during the changes Parts and their Functions Menu Operation Section 23 suoljoun 1194 pue Sse Time Code Section GENLOCK IN connector BNC This connector is used to input a reference signal before the camera unit is gen locked or before the time code is externally locked TC IN connector BNC This connector is used to input a reference time code when you externally lock the time code TC OUT connector BNC When you inter lock the time code of camera recorder with that of an external device this must be connected with the time code input TC IN connector of the external device Note The time code must be input in the same format as the system mode of the camera recorder HOLD button Pressing this button freezes the time data indication on the counter Note that time code generation continues Pressing the button again reactivates the counter This function is used to ascertain the time code or CTL count of a particular recorded scene RESET button This button resets the time data CTL on the counter to 00 00 00 00 If this button is pressed when with the 7 TCG switch positioned at SET time code and user bits data are
322. th the MENU and JOG dial buttons The menu comprises main menu sub menus and options menus The data specified through menu options are written and saved in the internal memory of the unit This section describes how to set options in MAIN MENU The other menus can be configured in the same manner the method of displaying the menu screen depends on the particular menu Note When the unit is in thumbnail mode the viewfinder displays THUMBNAIL OPEN disabling navigation through the menu 1 Press the MENU button for three seconds or longer The MAIN MENU screen appears together with its options gt MAIN MENU SYSTEM SETTING PAINT VF CAM OPERATION MAIN OPERATION FILE MAINTENANCE USER MENU SELECT 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark gt toa desired menu option Then press the JOG dial button to display the sub menu screen MAIN MENU SYSTEM SETTING PAINT VF CAM OPERATION MAIN OPERATION FILE MAINTENANCE USER MENU SELECT 3 Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark to a desired menu option Then press the JOG dial button to display the options screen lt CAM OPERATION gt CAMERA ID SHUTTER SPEED SHUTTER SELECT USER SW SW MODE WHITE BALANCE MODE USER SW GAIN IRIS 5 Turn the JOG dial button to change the value 4 Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark to a desired option Then press th
323. than STOP REW FF PLAY PAUSE are disabled However during a pause in ONE SHOT mode REC REVIEW can be executed with the RET button on the lens If the power is turned off during recording If the AJ HPX3000 is turned off during interval recording the video stored in memory is recorded onto the P2 card and then the camera automatically turns off To start emergency recording during a pause By setting the REC button to USER MAIN or USER1 USER2 emergency recording can be performed during a pause by pressing the button Pause time measurement continues after such emergency recording Note However this function does not work when the recording signals are in 24P 24PA or 24PN Native mode Time code indication When recording starts the time code TCG display may not update until the unit recognizes the P2 card Removing cards During INTERVAL REC mode operation the P2 card access LED for the inserted P2 card blinks in orange Do not remove the P2 card during this status If you should remove the card accidentally restore clips However even if the clips are restored the last 3 to 4 seconds up to a maximum of about 10 seconds of the recording may be lost if the P2 card is removed while recording onto multiple P2 cards For more information on how to fix clips see Restoring Clips page 121 Operation mode INTERVAL REC does not work when 1394 is selected for the menu option REC SIGNAL The menu opti
324. that the BUSY lamp is not illuminated Then further depress the SD memory card towards the main unit This releases the SD memory card from the insertion slot Take hold of the SD memory card and remove it Close the lid SD memory cards must not be used or stored in an environment where they may be Exposed to high temperatures humidities Exposed to water droplets or Electrically charged For storage the SD memory card must be kept inserted into the unit with the lid closed B Formatting Writing and Reading an SD memory card To format an SD memory card write settings data or read data on an SD memory card navigate the menu to the lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt screen from the FILE page lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt R SELECT Ha WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ LOR SRR LOR LR If an SD memory card that is formatted in a standard other than the SD standards and SDHC standards FORMAT ERROR is displayed in the top right section of the window In this case reformat the card as follows Note that the indication FORMAT ERROR does not disappear if the SD memory card is replaced with this menu page open When the SD memory card is replaced perform TITLE READ Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewisnipy 83 To format an SD memory card Note SD memory cards may be formatted via the thumbnail screen For more information see Formatting
325. the start of the next clip is located in pause mode PLAY PAUSE button This button is used to view playback using the viewfinder screen or a color video monitor The lamp comes on when playback starts In playback mode this button pauses PLAY PAUSE playback with the lamp blinking REC button Pressing this button starts recording and pressing again stops recording This button has the same function as 11 the REC START STOP button and the VTR button at the lens It may be disabled with 25 the REC protection button REC protection button This button disables 24 the REC button on the handle ON The REC button is enabled OFF The REC button is disabled P2 CARD ACCESS LED This LED indicates the recording and playback status of each card Slide lock button Used to open the slide out door for inserting P2 cards While depressing this button slide the door to the left USB 2 0 connector DEVICE USB 2 0 connector HOST A USB 2 0 cable is connected here When the menu option PC MODE is set to ON data can be transferred via USB 2 0 During such data transfer recording playback or operations of clips is permitted The menu option PC MODE is found in the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page For more information see Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port page 135 30 GENLOCK IN connector 31 Used to input an HD Y signal when GENLOCKing the camera or externally locking th
326. the following a user defined value time date same value as the time code frame rate information for camera shooting externally input value through the TC IN or DVCPRO connector and value regenerated as the user bits recorded in a clip on a P2 card The camera recorder includes only one user defined value If user defined values are selected for both the UB and VITC UB then the same value is used Types of UB can be selected in UB MODE and types of VITCUB can be selected in VITC UB respectively However in the following cases these are fixed to the frame rate information of the editing machines editing software for PCs For recoding 24P 24PA in 1080i or 480i mode VITC UB is fixed to frame rate information In Native mode VITC UB is fixed to frame rate information Bulpsooey 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy Date and time real time The built in clock maintains the date and time When the GPS unit AJ GPS910G is installed the built in clock is corrected with accurate date and time information from the GPS This clock is used to store the date and time while the power is turned off and as the time for the user bits and date data as well as the reference for file generation times during clip recording which determine the sorting order of thumbnails and the order of playback It is also used to generate clip metadata and UMIDs Unique Material Identifiers in the VIDEO AUX area Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Ti
327. ther than 3dB DS GAIN ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the DS GAIN clulF R cumulative gain is activated SHUTTER JON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the electronic IC U FIR shutter is activated WHITE ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the PRESET OFF viewfinder on when the WHITE BAL C U FIR switch is set to the PRST position EXTENDER JON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the lens extender is ICIUIFIR activated B GAMMA ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the BLACK GAMMA ICIUIFIR is activated MATRIX ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the color correction ilc u E R table for the linear matrix is selected COLOR ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the CORRECTION OFF viewfinder on when the 12 axis ilc ulE R independent color correction is selected FILTER ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the filter combination is anyone other than 3200K Ic ulE R and CLEAR The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 175 oO 5 f I CAM OPERATION CAMERA ID SHUTTER S
328. tion C U F R respective CC filters the color temperature at that time is SHOCKLESS OFF For setting the length of time for memorized in the position of the WHITE AWB FAST transiting to the switched position of BAL switch B If the white balance has NORMAL _ white balance when the position of the been automatically adjusted or the CC SLOW1 WHITE BAL switch is changed filter has been switched then up to SLOW2 OFF To transit instantly _ _lFI 9000K may be indicated SLOW3 FAST About 1 second poh pane g BSA The ___ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the SLOW2 About 10 seconds preset mode lclu FJR SLOW3 About 20 seconds AWB AREA 25 For switching the detection area for 50 executing the automatic adjustment of 90 white balance 25 An area near the screen center equivalent to 25 of the screen is detected 50 An area near the screen center equivalent to 50 of the screen is detected 90 An area equivalent to 90 of the C U F R screen is detected TEMP PRE VAR For selecting whether the PRESET color SEL SW 3 2K 5 6K _ temperature is variable or switchable between 3200K and 5600K Immediately after revising the value the color temperature for PRESET is set to 3200K For Filter A VAR Selectable within the range from 2300K to 8000K 3 2K 5 6K Switchable between 3200K and z ap 5600K Menu Menu Description Tables 179
329. tions Media remaining space indication bar The bar indicates the remaining free space on each P2 card using a seven segment display Each segment can represent either three or five minutes of remaining free space depending on the value set through the menu option CARD REMAIN According to the set value the segments disappear one by one The menu option CARD REMAIN can be found in the lt BATTERY P2CARD gt screen on the MAIN OPERATION page NDF SLAVEHOLDWHD GPSY ver P ren D CTL VTCG TIME DATE P iREC G G G I e AAT n E E h Y minM s D frm VEDA mm a a oF D gt BATT E mm mu ee F r LOOP OP SLOT 13 24 Battery remaining level indication bar For a battery with a digital indicator percentage indication if the remaining level of the battery is higher than 70 all seven segments up to the F position are lit When the remaining level falls below 70 the segments go out one by one for each drop of 10 All seven segments can be set to light up when the battery remaining balance is 100 To do so select 100 for the menu option BATT REMAIN FULL in the lt BATTERY P2CARD gt screen of the MAIN OPERATION page Mode indication W Stays illuminated when the camera recorder operates in SD mode 480 59 94i 576 50i and is set to 16 9 mode HD Stays illuminated when the camera recorder is in HD m
330. to ON or OFF OFF aula Note FRINE SIG 123 Setthet R When SYSTEM MODE item is set to either 1080 59 94i 4 3 et the frame marker m rae 13 9 Only enabled when REC MODE is set to or 1080 50i in HD mode the user box is not displayed 14 9 16 9 on the LCD monitor or the SD viewfinder if LT BOX or S C U F R VISTA The VISTA ratio is 16 8 65 CROP is selected in DOWNCON MODE FRAME LVL 0 Set the level outside the frame marker H 0 FAA to signal OFF Blanking The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the status r tm 7 IclulF R 15 Same brightness as center area preset mode Note When SYSTEM MODE is set to either 1080 59 94i or 1080 50i in HD mode the safety zone marker the safety zone area and the frame marker are displayed on the LCD monitor or the SD viewfinder if LT BOX or S CROP is selected in DOWNCON MODE Menu Menu Description Tables 173 VF INDICATOR1 VF INDICATOR2 Items Adjustable R marks Items Adjustable Reitarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range EXTENDER JON For selecting ON or OFF for the CAC ON For selecting ON or OFF for the color OFF extender display OFF astigmatism correction display C U F R
331. to be locked For adjustment each control must be depressed while turning AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 audio channel 1 amp 2 automatic manual level adjustment selector switch Use this switch to select recording level control mode for Audio Channels 1 and 2 AUTO Recording level automatically controlled MAN Recording level manually controlled AUDIO IN audio input selector switch Use this switch to select the signals recorded through Audio Channels 1 4 FRONT Signal from the microphone connected to the 1 MIC IN jack is recorded W L WIRELESS Signal from the slot in wireless receiver is recorded REAR Signal from the audio device connected to the 5 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connector is recorded 16 Parts and their Functions Audio input Function Section 8 Note When you use stereo microphone AJ MC900G optional set both CH1 and CH2 to FRONT The signal from L CH is recorded to CH1 and that from R CH to CH2 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 audio input channel 1 amp 2 connectors XLR 3 pin Audio devices or a microphone may be connected here LINE MIC 48V line input mic input mic input 48V selector switch Used to select the audio signal input from the 5 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors LINE Audio signal line input from the audio device is input MIC Audio signal from a self powered active microphone is input The main unit does not supply power to the remote mic
332. tting and Operation Mode ccsseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 42 MultiiPormatwcacacccee As el heb ae eae 43 Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance ccceeeeeeee 45 Setting the Electronic Shutter c cc ceeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaaes 49 Preparation Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons 51 Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels 53 Setting Time Data 2 ec ciceecee eee enee teste eeteneee eee eettteaaeeeeeesneeaaaaes 55 Viewfinder Screen Status DisplayS 0 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeetetteeeeeetee 68 Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 79 Selection of video output Signals ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaaaes 80 Handing dettatc 22 sets oe ec Ae A et 82 Chromatic Aberration Compensation CAC seeen 97 Power Supply cccccceeceeeccceeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeeccaaaeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaeeeeeeesaaaes 101 Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustment cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 105 Preparing for Audio Input 0 2 eee eee eect e ee eeeeeaeeeaaaaaaaaaaaaaaeeeeees 108 Mounting the Camera on a Tripod 2 0 0 2 eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaaaes 109 Attaching the Shoulder Strap cccccceccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeees 110 Attaching the Rain Cover cccccccccceeeeeeeeeecaeccaeeeeeeteecn
333. uency of use To display MAIN MENU press the MENU button for three seconds or longer SYSTEM SETTING This option is used to specify recording signal recording system etc PAINT This option is used to fine adjust images while monitoring the output waveform of the camera using the waveform monitor Normally this adjustment requires assistance from a video engineer This menu option may be set with an external remote controller and is useful when using the unit without a sound recordist VF Used to select the information items to be displayed in the viewfinder screen CAM OPERATION Used to change settings according to the conditions for the subject MAIN OPERATION Used to specify recording related items such as audio settings time code battery and P2 card remaining amounts FILE Used to specify file related items such as SD memory card reading writing and lens file settings MAINTENANCE Used to specify maintenance related items USER MENU SELECT Used to edit USER MENU OPTION MENU Provides options which may be needed if functions are added in the future To display OPTION MENU hold down the LIGHT button and press the MENU button For more information contact your distributor 156 Menu Menu Configuration Q LIGHT button om Rvs Lf Shot Mark Cancel Menu button SUZ MENU button JOG dial button ooo AA ees TA E Setting Menu Options The menu options are set wi
334. up is switched to 7 5 for the connector optional camera output and 0 for the Notes _IclulelrR recording In Native mode for the AVC Intra and PCMODE USBHOST Specify the operation mode of the DVCPRO HD 1394 cannot be SELECT USB DEV camera recorder when an external selected device is connected via USB After the power has been turned OFF USB HOST this setting defaults to CAM when the Sets the camera recorder to the mode power is turned ON again that allows an external hard disk drive In order to select VIDEO and to be connected synchronize video signals input to the USB DEV GENLOCK IN connector VBS with Sets the camera recorder to the USB the unit set the GENLOCK item of device mode ies aie aPC ae n n connected via U O for use wi C U F R GENLOCK page 163 10 EXT P2 cards as mass storage CAMERA 1080 59 941 For setting the video system for Note MODE 480 59 94i shooting When the PC MODE menu option is set 60i Note to ON no change can be made to this 30P In AVC Intra mode 24PA cannot be F option 24P selected PC MODE ON Used to enable or disable the mode that 24PA OFF allows the camera recorder to be 1080 50i connected to a PC or an external hard 576 50i disk drive via USB 2 0 50i ON Sets the camera recorder to the C U F R 25P mode selected through the PC s MODE SELECT menu option ASPECT 16 9 Select the aspect ratio for recording In OFF Disables the PC MODE for normal 4 3 SD mode onl
335. ur times per second for a period of about three seconds The tone does not sound if the error occurs during playback Warning This indicates a failure of the DVCPRO description connector The operation continues but input signals to DARS the DVCPRO connector are abnormal For more information see 1394 Error Codes operation page 152 Check the connection between the IEEE1394 cable and the DVCPRO connector settings of any external device Countermeasures and menus and the turn on the power again If the warning indication is still illuminated confirm the 1394 Error Codes page 152 and consult your distributor 10 Battery Nearly Empty Warning An error has occurred while recording data description to or playing data from a P2 card Recording Stop recording or playback After recording playback is stopped the P2 card where error occurs is operation write protected Countermeasures Replace the affected P2 card 13 FAN STOP Display window indication One of the bars in the battery remaining indicator starts blinking Display window indication No display WARNING lamp Blinks once per second WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second Tally lamp Blinks once per second Tally lamp No display Viewfinder The BATT LED blinks Warning tone Beeps 4 times per second Viewfinder The FAN STOP indicator blinks while re
336. utton Select YES when the confirmation screen is displayed EXIT ALL HIDE Returns to the previous menu ALL CLIP SAME FORN SELECTED MARKED CL TEXT MEMC SLOT CLIPS DATA DISPLAY DATE FORMAT gt ZAJ THUMBNAIL SIZE gt THUMBNAIL INIT EXIT ALL HIDE ON All indicators are not displayed OFF Indication No indication will be set depending on the following menu The factory settings are as follows MARKER IND Switches the shot mark marker between indication and no indication ON OFF The factory setting is ON indication TEXT MEMO IND Switches the text memo marker between indication and no indication ON OFF The factory setting is ON indication WIDE IND Switches the wide marker between indication and no indication ON OFF The factory setting is ON indication PROXY IND Switches the proxy marker between indication and no indication ON OFF The factory setting is ON indication DATA DISPLAY The time display field of the clip offers a choice of Time Code TC User Bits UB Shooting Time TIME Shooting Date DATE Shooting Time and Date Time DATE or USER CLIP NAME The factory setting is Time Code DATE FORMAT You can specify the display order for the shooting date as either Year Month Day YMD Month Day Year MDY or Day Month Year DMY The factory setting is Month Day Year This setting is reflected in the recording date shown in the c
337. utton and the clip under the pointer will be played back on the LCD monitor After playback of the clip under the pointer subsequent clips are played back in order according to when they were shot The thumbnail screen returns after the last clip has been played back Notes When playing back clips it is not necessary to select the clips blue frames around the thumbnails Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be played 4 During playback pressing the REW button starts 4x speed reverse playback and the FF button starts 4x speed fast playback Press the PLAY PAUSE button to return to normal playback 5 During clip playback pressing the PLAY PAUSE button will temporarily stop pause the process During a pause pressing the REW button moves the pause position to the beginning of the clip Pressing the REW button again moves the pause position to the beginning of the previous clip During a pause pressing the FF button moves the pause position to the beginning of the next clip 116 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Selecting Thumbnails 6 Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops the playback and returns the display to the thumbnail screen Note When playback is stopped the position of the pointer remains on the clip that was being played back regardless of where the playback started However when the THUMBNAIL button is pressed to close the thumbnail screen the pointer will mo
338. ve to the starting clip i e the clip with the earliest recording date and time not the clip on which the pointer was last positioned Switching the Thumbnail Display The display can be switched so that only those clips matching the specified conditions are displayed in the thumbnail screen 1 2 Press the THUMBNAIL button 3 Select THUMBNAIL from the thumbnail menu Switch The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor the thumbnail display by selecting one of the following items Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button The thumbnail menu appears ALL CLIP SAME FORMAT CLIPS HIATT SELECTED CLIPS J iia MARKED CLIPS sii TEXT MEMO CLIPS me SLOT CLIPS SETUP 00 04 48 26 00 06 47 11 oy A 00 00 00 00 THUMBNAIL MENU button ALL CLIP Display all clips SAME FORMAT CLIPS Displays clips in the same format as the system format System format means the image system set in SYSTEM MODE and REC MODE Press the MODE CHECK button to display the viewfinder Refer to 1 System mode 70 page and 3 REC mode 70 page of Viewfinder Status Indication Layout SELECTED CLIPS Display randomly selected clips MARKED CLIPS Display clips with shot marks attached TEXT MEMO CLIPS Display clips with text memo data attached SLOT CLIPS Display clips recorded in the P2 card inserted in the specified slot When this item is selected SLOT1 to SLOT5 are displayed as a sub menu Select the desired slot to dis
339. y o k peration 16 9 Record in lt 16 9 gt aspect ratio Note C U F R Se QC OR RIM Sait ae peer ratio Once the power is turned off the option is always set to OFF when the power is The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the F turned on next time preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 159 D 5 E OPTION MODE 160 Menu Menu Description Tables Items Adjustable Reiiarks Items Adjustable Renvarke Data Saved Range Data Saved Range REC TALLY RED Select the method for displaying the AUTO REC OFF Select the method for detecting REC GREEN recording status of camera recorder TYPE1 START STOP marks from the frame rate CHAR when controlling an external VTR by TYPE2 information in the user bits added setting 1394 CONTROL items to BOTH through HD SD IN in HD mode in order Sele ies CONTROL item onthe to automatically start or stop recording lt 1394 SETTING gt screen in the SYSTEM OFF N t ti ding i SETTING page o automatic recording is RED The red tally lamp lights up performed GREEN The green tally lamp lights up TYPE1 REC START STOP marks are CHAR The VF displays REC in detected from LTC input IclulF characters through HD SDI for automatic recording ACCESS LED OFF Specify whether or not to enable the
340. yback that supports the compression format for AVC Intra100 AVC Intra50 and DVCPRO HD and DVCPRO50 The unit supports the HD and SD methods shown in the following table The unit is also equipped with CAC chromatic aberration correction function for the magnification ratio chromatic aberration of lenses Scan Reverse corrects images when Anamo lenses or lenses for film applications are used and the film like gamma function For recording the compression and recording methods are selectable among AVC Intrra100 AVC Intra50 DVCPRO HD and DVCPROSO Since minimal image deterioration occurs when recording with AVC Intra 100 compression in particular high image quality can be retained jesoued Hi Supported formats Mode SYSTEM MODE Shooting Recording method AVC Intra100 59 94i 29 97P Native AVC Intra50 23 98P Native 1080 59 94i 59 94i 29 97P Over 59 94i HD DYCPRO HE 23 98P Over 59 94i 2 3 Pull down 23 98PA Over 59 94i 2 3 3 2 Pull down AVC Intra100 50i AVC Intra50 25P Native 50i 25P over 50i 59 94 29 97P Over 59 94i 4890 59 94 DVCPRO50 53 98P Over 59 94i 2 3 Pull down SD 23 98PA Over 59 94i 2 3 3 2 Pull down 50i 25P Over 50i 1080 50i DVCPRO HD 576 50i DVCPRO50 General 7 8 Features of Camera unit H Multi format By applying the interlace drive progressive drive reading all pixels to the 2 2 mega pixel CCD the unit supports a variety of

1 - GRS Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents